Home
        DigiTech C0408 Telephone User Manual
         Contents
1.                                                     2 6  Departmental Calling Distribution                                                     2 6  Designated  Programmable Buttons                                             2 7  Dial 0  For  System Att  ndant      ete er ee ens A             Bak re e a at d 2 7  Direct Department Calling  With DCD                                             2 7  Direct Inward Station Dialing                                                2 8  Direct                 Hold                            HOD ARES US dem               i eer d ru e cR aee 2 9  Direct Station Selection Programmable                                           2 9  Distinctive Ringing 7152454 266 d OX CIBC Cre oa Qu X  o     Eee A cs 2 9            Distros tts s e e e eerie Reet ac Y cde deest A ede re E Ae 2 9  Do Not  Disturb  Inhibit                                               RE ee oem e IRR e RIESCO a XR EUROS 2 9  Do Not Disturb Override                                                    2 9  Dual  Intercotm EDS      ge    2 4  Dynamic Line  B  tloris    4 12                                            2 9  End To End Signalling On Intercom                                             2 10  End  To End Signaling  On Lines                                              2 9  Exel  sive Holdo                           Se wer eto        cv coat              Poe      ne 2 9  Exclusive Hold System Wide Enable Disable                                        2 10  Executive Att
2.                         H3               ORANGE WHITE   WHITE GREEN   28  5   SIGNAL   GREEN        ENT mr E NN NN    WHITE BROWN   BROWN  WHTESROWN     RED                                       4  8                WHITE SLATE   SLATE PWHTESLATE  5  09                SLATE WHITE  RED      31  11   SIGNAL          12  PATH        32  13   SIGNAL   GREEN      7  14   PATH   RED   EN    GU iru SIGNAL E 33 GENE    GREEN RED     8  16       PATH     S i7 SIGNAL GREEN    4    9  18   PATH   REG   FREDSLATE   estae            sonal      o 1    20   PATH  RED     ae ai   SIGNAL GREEN   96      11  22   PATH   RED     EM                                L37  23   SIGNAL   GREEN   37    ORANGE BLACK HO ARGEBACK ae  24     PATH   RED              BLACK GREEN 13              BATH RED         26     BLACK BROWN     PBLACKBROWN        07                 BROWN BLACK    BLACK SLATE   p LI   40   SLATE BLACK   15  30   PATH   ol         PYELLOW BLUE   16  41 131  SIGNAL   GREEN _ 41      42  33     17 134     43 35     18  36      44  37     19 138      45  39      20  44      46  41      21  42                 BLUE VIOLET  VIOLET ORANGE   47  43    ORANGE VIOLET   22  44       48  48      23  46      49  47 __    24  48     50  49    SLATE VIOLET            3 10           66 083    LL        4 LINE  8 5             BASE UNIT    LINE JACKS 1 82    AUX LINE 2    LINE JACKS 3  amp  4  AUX LINE 4    STATION 10 17  COMMON AUDIBLE   DATA PORT  STATION 17 AUDIBLE   POWER FAIL STATION    HYBRID STRAP 
3.                       2 12            GrOUpS    3   54 4             eet           AR Go NILUM i dA        A          2 12  Line Preselectior  54                               AES              Ds E Rode s dug  2 12  Line And Line Group Queuing Bate                   Nube morc       ost eue                                   2 12  Manual Hold               ie ee             ee ee        eee ee           RV      a      2 12  Meet Me Answer                                                          ed mre             Ea  2 12  Memory Retention Without Batteries                                              2 12  Message Waiting ideo Uu          Bas ee urn e                 uec         ec e S WIS RT Roo e aed  2 12  Modular Wring And Jacks s  n Re RR e ehh hh i hh hin n nn  2 13  Music Interface          2 13  Music On Hold                                    Bo ee    2 13  Music On Hold System Wide Enable Disable                                        2 13                                               ad et God Sn    eta Base au         2 13  Night Transtar  OC RINGING       ox nk vada      SCIRE UN  2 13  On Hook Dialing                                                                                             a                            2 13           06 083    Originating Denied   PBX CENTREX CO  Personalized Ringing  Pooled Line Access    Table Of Contents    Compatible mom om om oos om      om o   s      o9 onm s m onm             9 o9        somos om            om somos on os
4.                     4 9  Answering Intercom Calls                     5 1 Call Pick up Answering       5 1  Answering Outside Calls                      5 1 Call Pickup   Directed                        2 4  Area Code Band Tables                    4 69 Cal Pickup   Group                        2 4  Area Paging Interface                      2 1 Call Transfer   Screened                      2 4  Assist BURON                      2 1  5 13 Call Transfer   Unscreened                    2 5  ATI Distinctive Ringing                    4 57 Call   Waiting               tee an hl eck RR  5 9  Attendant Configuration                    4 78 Call Waiting Tone                         2 5  Attendant Station Operation                  5 14 Calling Station Identification On                    2 5  Audible Monitoring                      4 31 Centeral Office Limits                     219  Autodial Buttons                        4 42 Centeral Office Lines                     4 15  Autodial Programming                     5 11 Central Message Desk                    4 26  Automatic CallBack                    2 1  59 Character Dialing Codes Chart             4 21  5 16  Automatic Cal Back Button                  4 45 Cheok        no e Rx neun   3 31  Automatic Dialing                      2 2  5 3 Class Of Service Program Printout               2 5  Automatic Hold                     2 2  4 28 Class Of Service Programming                 4 2  Automatic Hold   Transfer To Intercom          
5.                   A14  Line port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or press B1  B2  Line port 17 24   Dial 17     24   OR   Press HOLD then press Al     8     Dial    for next group    OR   Dial       for configuration mode   8  Dial 3 for Line Group 3   LED On   Lines Assigned   9  Select line ports   Select line ports to be disabled   LED On   Disabled    Line port 1 14   Dial 01   14 or Press        Al4  Line port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or press B1  B2  Line port 17 24   Dial 17     24   OR   Press HOLD then press               10  Dial    for next group    OR   Dial       for configuration mode           LINE GROUP 2                    GROUP 3     Press SPKR to end        BJ     4        Press           7 46    forbaselevel     FEATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD         Groups    continued 10  Dial 4 for Line Group 4            GROUP 4     LED On s Lines Assigned   11  Select line ports to be disabled   LED On   Disabled    Line port 14 Dial 01   14 or Press Al       4  Line port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or press BI   B2  Line port 17 24   Dial 17   24   OR   Press HOLD then press Al     A8   12  Dial    for next group    OR   Dial       for configuration mode             ulse Tone Switchable      Whenrotary   Dial 36   PULSE DIAL    lial lines are installed  the user can   Select pulse dial line ports  LED On   Pulse    witch from pulse  rotary dial signalling  Line port 1 14   Dial 01   14 or Press Al              tone  dual tone multiple frequency   Lin
6.                   ENTRY _ ENTRYNUMBER ISMAXMUM              rye           5     Ts                    s 5    E                       ped opea             TABLE ASSIGNMENT  LINES STATIONS    TOLL RESTRICTION TABLE 1 4    TYPE  ALLOW DENY  ENTRY ENTRY NUMBER  16 MAXIMUM          718911011 12113  14 15  16    Ed b         yy Ty      2                   TOU RESTRICTION TABLE 15  TYPE  ALLOW             TOLLRESTRICTIONTABLE                     ALLOW                     ENTRY ENTRY NUMBER  16 MAXIMUM                               0        va t    DATA PRINTER SERVICE    When a data printer is connected to the system  the station message detail record  SMDR  for the system is printed automatically without any  programming or user intervention     The data printer can also be commanded to print the configuration data for the system  Partial or complete printouts can be obtained as desired   When the printer is being used to print the configuration data or SMDA information  SMDR printout is temporarily halted  The SMDR data  collection is continued by the system during this time  but if more than two calls are logged for any one line  call records may be lost     FEATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY    Base Level  The first step In any Press ITCM  Dial    746      programming sequence is to enter the   base level  Once in this mode  the   printing of configuration data can be   commanded     Enable data printer operation 1  Dial 91     PRINT CONFIG     2  Choose config
7.                   ew etr ee          4 64  integrated  Call      sce Sex          a tb e SOS Ies ew Moe s Ad 4 65  Station Message Detail Accounting Reporting                                      4 74  Attendant Configuration              GN eS ily            dut ad ac nw td          cad          na ue dA Die  ii Se  4 78   SECTION 3 VIDEO DISPLAY TERMINAL PROGRAMMING                          4 83  Introduction                    ee ee                4 83  VDT Programming Procedure                         ID IM    4 83  Remote Programming          4 84                     Operation                                                                                                                                                 4 84           Descriptions iurat des to hd eae tes                                                ea sede          io de OR are age e deed                                  Ms  4 87  Main Menu Selections     s t ee  4 87            System  COS Menu Selections   uus                                       EE eee       4 87  Line COS  Menu  Selections                 KAR         UG EIE Xue do e             4 88  Station COS Menu  Selectiohs  22                                                  chc  nm                          RD  4 89  Toll Restriction Table Administration                                               4 90  CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURES                      5 1  SECTION 1 STATION OPERATION                                       5 1  Answe
8.               5 5  oduar Wiring And Jacks                   213  ounting Considerations 0                       3 1  outing Dimensions                      3 2  ouning Procedure                          3 1  ultiple Intercom Button                   4 43  usic Interface                     2 13  3 22  Music Interface                      1 9  3 22  Music On Hold                   2 13  4 81  5 15  Music On Hold System Wide     Enable Disable         2 13             os        ee PE PIS aoe 0  2 13  Mute Handsfree Answer Inhibit                 5 8  N  Night Transfer  Of Ringing          2 13  4 37  4 81  5 14  Non Square System                      441  Non Square System Reference Record            4 49  0  Office Code Band Tables                   4 68                     Dialing    uel dux RET EG S 2 13  Operating Environment                        1 9  Operaion  Account Code                   5 10  Operation  Attendant Station                 5 14  Operation  Departmental Station               5 1  Operation  Speakerphone                   5 11    Option Installation Details                   3 14  Originating Denied                       2 13  Outline Dimensions    Common Equipment           1 5  Outline Dimensions  Station Equipment             6  Outside Line Calling                         5 2       deo Pr 4 12             2222 2222 54                           1 9  Paging              RAE Sha eee        5 7  Paging Interface                     3 18  3 19  Pause  Ting
9.               BATTERY  BACK UP  CONNECTOR    GROUNDING t SYSTEM STATUS LED  TERMINAL PAGING PORT    I L  MUSIC INTERFACE    8       I6 STATION BASE UNIT    STATION 10   25  COMMON AUDIBLE   DATA PORT  STATION 17 AUDIBLE   POWER FAIL STATION    HYBRID STRAP    LINE JACKS 1  amp  2  AUX LINE 2     LINE JACKS 3 44  AUX LINE 4  LINE JACKS 5  amp 6   LINE JACKS 7  amp 8    GROUNDING  TERMINAL    STATIONS 1 0 25   RS 232 DATA             RS 232 DATA PORT p  LINE JACKS 9  amp  10    LINE JACKS 11  amp  12  LINE JACKS 13  amp  14 MUSIC INTERFACE    LINE JACKS 15  amp  16    SYSTEM STATUS LED     PAGING PORT     6  L INE  32 STATION BASE UNIT  LINE JACKS 7  amp 6  LINE JACKS 5  amp 6  LINE JACKS 3  amp  4  AUX LINE 4  LINE JACKS 1  amp  2  AUX LINE 2  POWER FAIL STATION    PAGING PORT  SYSTEM STATUS LED                  oe                                  BACK UP  CONNECTOR    STATIONS    26   41    GROUNDING    TERMINAL    STATION 17  AUDIBLE    COMMON  AUDIBLE  HYBRID  STRAP    BATTERY  BACK UP  CONNECTOR    esu     MUSIC INTERFACE    Figure 3 3  Common Equlpment  Statlon And Line Connections    on              TO AUXILIARY JACK 4  TO AUXILIARY JACK 2             INES  NECTOR        TTION                       i     1 1       o4   8    Zoa        i        egi  N        on             1          oot                    5  M    22 0 22               pe   ESI            gerr terrere wf          E       L EU Man DESEE 28                       gt   5  25  x       x    8      5            
10.            2 8  E   End To End Signafling On Intercom              2 10  End To End Signafling On Lines               2 9  Equipment Required  Data Communications             3 29  Exception Tables                       4 68  Exclusive Hold                     2 9  4 0  5 4  Exclusive Hold System Wide Enable Disable         2 10  Executive Attendant Override           2 10  4 24  5 10  Expansion Module Installation                 3 26  Extended DTMF Tones For Automatic Dialing        4 13  External  Paging                  eo ea        5 7          External Paging Connection                  3 18  External Paging Connection   Line Port            3 19  External Paging Interface                2 10  3 18  F   Failure Isolation                        3 31  FCC Rules And Regulations                  3 32  Feature Code Numbering                       5 19  Feature                                2 10  4 11  Five Party Conference                      5 5  Fash Real                     2 17  4 6  5 6  Flexible Ringing Assignments              2 1 0 436  Flexible Ringing Assignments Of PA Port           2 10    Flexible Station And Line Class Of Service Control      2 11       Flexible Station Numbering Plan            2 10  4 23  Full Button Programmabilty Of Features           2 10  Fuse  Location                                         6 1  General Check  2                      3 31   General Information  Programming                  4 1  General Specifications                   
11.            m      AS           g   ol 2                lt   D O           lt                                D        DEFAULT   ALL ENABLED                 rj               NOTE  Feature status is not conveyed via LED       Press SPKR to end       vSU 22 INI                         WIIS  S            PressITCM   7 46 for base level       SS           Options  The      port can be  issigned lines for direct ring  delayed  ing  or night transfer  of ringing   The  iort can also be arranged to receive  ither zone or all call paging     lelay tracking of the enabled ringing       be selected as either station 17  inging or paging port ringing     Ri  1    2     nging      Dial 60         OPTIONS      Choose ringing assignment    Dial 1 for direct ring   DIRECT RING     Dial 2 for delay ring   DELAY RING    Dial 3 for night ring   NIGHT RING        Select line ports     Line port 1 14   Dial 01 14 or press Al       4  Line port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or press B1  B2  Line port 17 24   Dial 17   24    or press HOLD then press Al   A8    NOTE  LEDS turn on when line is    4     assigned     Dial 3  for next PA option    OR   Dial       for configuration mode     Zone Paging    1   2     3              60            OPTIONS    Dial 4 to assign   zone paging  PA ZONES    Choose zone    Press Al or dial 1 for zone 1    Press   2 or dial 2 for zone 2    Press      or dial 3 for zone 3    Press   4 or dial 4 for all call     NOTE  Al  A2        or A4 LED turns on when    4     a zone is ass
12.            mp s Dll       je  CR  WoW  Woo                UR    CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION                                                                     N NJ 3 B                3 s              SECTION 1 STANDARD INSTALLATION DETAILS ao MAE                                          INE tat That  ay                                                  Mounting Considerations                                                                                                  RUE        ay                 Mounting Procedure    AC Power Connection   s e KK IIR 2555555                    System Grounding  Line Connections  Station Connections     2 13  2 13     2 13  2 13   2 13  2 13   2 14  2 14  2 14    2 14    2 14  2 14     2 14  2 14     2 14     2 14     2 14     2 15  2 15  2 16     2 16     2 16  2 16     2 16     2 16     2 16     2 16    2 16    2 16       2 17     2 17  2 17      2 17     2 17     2 17     2 17     2 17     2 17     2 17     2 18     2 18     2 18  2 18      2 18     2 18    Table Of Contents             SECTION 2 OPTION INSTALLATION DETAILS                                 3 14  Key System Hybrid Configuration                                                3 14  Power Failure Station Connections                                             3 15  Auxiliary Equipment Interface                                                 3 16  Common Audible And Auxiliary Ringing interface                                      3 17               Paging  Interface     avid   do
13.           ek nem                        Ye        Yo                         ere                Automate  Dialing    2c 4 dd do                    o bee es s dd eot docs Este  Automatic Hold For Intercom                                                     Automatic Hold  Transfer To Intercom                                            Automatic Hold     Transfer To Line                                               Automatic  Pause  Insertion e ca s dE        nde Ee dud yu uu Nd ugs    Automatic Privacy                  Vr      Nin ot eet            Fd cont Ae        D         Automatic                       bro e ny tl ee ux Nee E              USE ee be     Automatic  Station Relocation                          REX Rho          Ue RR RARE de A  Auxiliary Equipment  interface       rubr RESI DS IUE NORRIS  Auxiliary  Ringer  Interface      e   u Te E wie coe                                   Eu elo                     Background  MISC a          dette e SU                                                 Basic Key Service  1  2  Emulation              25          Pete                  Ree cR  Battery Back Up  5 25 5           recto buf             ial afi Rc ER deter    age ce ed  Battery Back Up Interface                                                   Block  Programming    3 55  S                             ene du                                            Call Announce Wiih Handsfree Answerback                                         Call  Costing Arid  SMDA Reports    xx
14.         2 1  4 18 Cable  Clips                                3 5  AC Power Connection                      3 3 Cable Requirements  Station                  1 8  AC Power Connection And System Grounding          3 4 Call Announce With Handsfree Answerback         2 3  Access Denied                     2 1  4 38 Call Costing And SMDA Reports                2 3  Account Code Button                  2 1  448 Call Costing Diagram                     4 67  Account Code Display                     4 76 Call Costing Table Record                   4 11  Account Code Operation                   5 10 Cal Costing Tables                      4 70  Account  Codes             tete eee E RACES        4 75 Call Forward                           5 9  Account Codes Positive Verification                2 1 Call Forward Button                         4 46  Add On Expansion Module Configuration           3 24 Call Forward On Busy Ring   No Answer           4 32  Add On Expansion Modules                  3 23 Call Forwarding   Personal                    2 4  All Call And Zone Paging              2 1  435  5 7 Call Forwarding On All Calls                     2 4  Al CallZone Page Button                   4 45 Call Origination Denied                    4 39  Analog Terminal Interface                   4 55 Call Park 22 22 2224    2 4  5 4  Answer Time Limit                       4 73 Call Park Orbit Button                     446  Answering Calls                         5         Park Recall Time  
15.         60          SYSTEM  20 LINES AND 40 STATIONS   BASE UNIT PLUS ONE EXPANSION MODULE     350000 0282 0000904 oo     gt  eS    16 LINE  32 STATION BASE UNIT    2983066 92700060    oo     72 PORT SYSEM  24LINES AND 48 STATIONS   BASE UNIT PLUS TWO EXPANSION MODULES        Figure 3 14  Add On Expansion Module Configuration    3 24    166 083 Installa    on       Table 3 6  Statlon Connections    408 Expansion Module                  CABLE CONNECTIONS   _2 WIRE CONNECTIONS           CONNECTIONS    Ari                 SIGNA                                       peanceware    3 patie      2   2    SIGNAL  GREEN   3                           3 16 __  PATH  a       BROWN WHITE  PATH   WE       30  9 __  SIGNAL GREEN      HL PATH     Sia SCN  BLUERED _ PATH   T E RET       O ORANGE RED PATH   GREEN RED   PATH  RED        RED BROWN                  Hc  D MERE  EES              cres                           BEA    38  25      v EE   SLACKCBHOWN    E WIEN    purestack                                             FAIL    3 25           66 083    installation    INSTALLATION    Each add on expansion module measures 15 5 wide x  3 4 high x 1 6 wide and weighs approximately 4  pounds  The modules are designed to be attached to  the base unit and connected to it via cabling     e The first module must be connected to the upper  location on the base unit     To install an expansion module to a base unit  refer to  Figure 3 15 and perform the following procedure     1  Disconnect both AC 
16.         pair of data modems     The data modems can be any commercially available  300 or 300 1 200 baud type with auto answer   capability  Be sure to verify the auto answer capability  before purchasing the units    is recommended that  the same make and model of modem be used at both  the installation site and the remote programming site     INSTALLATION    The equipment connections at the customer location  are as illustrated      Figure 4 3 on page 4 80  Connect  the equipment for remote programming as illustrated  therein and discussed below       Determine the signal needs of the modem from the  users manual for it     e Wire the proper connector  to match the data jack   on one end of a length of multiline cable     e Punch down the appropriate leads on the connector  block  Refer to Chapter    for connection details as  needed     e Connect the network jack of the data modem to an  outside telephone line   If a line is not reserved for  remote programming  a line switch        be installed  so that an outside telephone line can be switched  by on site personnal between the data modem and  the common equipment cabinet when remote  programming is to be done      e Refer to the users manual for the modem  and  program the modem to automatically answer after  the first ring     e Interface the VDT or PC with the modem at the  programming site per the users manuals for the  equipment be used     OPERATION    To establish a communications link for programming  the system f
17.        Button    Keypad Buttons  Transfer Conference     Button  Mute Pe                Programmable  Button Buttons  Speaker  Button   MNTR     Hold Programmable 1 Intertom   Button Buttons Button  Volume Alphanumeric Display       Ringer  Control Volume Control                H andset    5                  Programmable  Buttons     Keypad Buttons    Transfer Conference  Button    Mute  Button  Speaker  Button    Hold Programmable  Intercom  Button Buttons Button    Figure 5 1  Controls and Indicators    5 18    SECTION 3  SYSTEM OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS    FEATURE DIALING CODE NUMBERING PLAN    All                                            87   Background Music  ER           Automatic                Station to Station   Messaging   LCD Messaging           02  1   0              02  Call Forward          05  Ext     Cancel    ITCM  5      Pak 1 PickUp      TCM    91   99                             ITCM  Ext      01                                  Cancel   Hang       Do Not Disturb Ist   Programmed Button  Programmed Button    Executive Override           Ext     03  External Page          _______  Handsfree Answer  Set MUTE       MUTE                   HOLD      Exclusive   HOLD  HOLD       Continued on next page    5            Operation    NUMBERING PLAN    continued                    FEATURE DIALING CODES    Line Group Access ITCM 9                   82             Line Queuing HOLD    Enable Line Group ITCM  Group code     8    mus  Meet Me Answer  Paging  ITCM 88  
18.       W 80 15 22222     REFERENCE RECORD    2    BUTTON    no o  2     ___ 9     ____      6 _____  Zo    8 ____  9    0       DEFAULT       ii                                            W  mee         gt          r  lac        e  ess  geb  c        7      data with  two stop bits      Press SPKR to enc                                             ulelsAS             Press             7 46    for base level   IFEATURE DESCRIPTION NTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD    Tone or Voice Signalling  Intercom 1  Dial 16                ANN  FIRST SIGNALLING   VOICE  TONE         can be tone signalled or voice 2  Press Al to toggle between Voice To Tone   signalled  The first choice in  LED On   voice signalling    signalling is programmable   OR   Dial 1 for Voice First     VOICE ANN  FIRST     Dial 2 for Tone First     TONE ANN  FIRST     3  Dial    for configuration mode     Delete Statlon Message Detall 1  Dial 18   ATTN DELETE XXX   ATTENDANT SMDA RECORD DELETE   Accounting SMDA  records by 2  Press Al to toggle between enable and disable PAE S    Attendant  When SMDA records  LED On   Enable    exceed storage capacity  they must  OR       be deleted to make mom for more  Dial 1 to Enable  ATTN DELETE ON    The attendant can be allowed to  Al LED On      delete these records if enabled by this Dial 2 to Disable  ATTN DELETE OFF    programming step  3  Dial    for configuration mode                        Do Not Disturb          Inhlbit Any 1  Dial 19   DND XXXXXXXX   
19.       for configuration mode             24      DEFAULT   NONE ASSIGNED    Press SPKR to end          80 99 IWI               Press            7 4 6    for base level        FEATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY    Direct Department Calling  Stations  can be grouped by department to allow a    call to search for an idle station within a  department if a busy or RNA is  encountered at a called station  There  can be up to four departments with up to  16 stations in each one  One additional  station can be placed in each  department to serve as a termination  station  Calls that roll to a termination  station will follow a call forward if it is set  at that station     NOTE  See page 4  18 for department  line assignments and  page 4 23 for department  access code assignemnt    Audible Monitoring  The DSS BLF at a  multiline station provides a visual  indication of idle  busy and line ringing  status of monitored stations  Audible  indication of direct and delayed ringing  can be provided for selected stations if  the visual indications are program  enabled  refer to system configuration     station monitoring    procedure on page  4 9      1  Dial 53   STATION FEATURES   2  Dial 19   DEPT  CALLING    3  Dial 1  4fordep  1 4     DEPARTMENT X  4  Select department stations      Station 10    57  Dial 10    57   5  Dial    to program next department   6  Dial 5   8 for termination station in dept  1   4    DEPARTMENT X    7  Select termination station     Station 
20.      70 msec  off     Auto redial active    Night mode repeative off periods     Station 10 and 12  flutter rate   560 msec  off                uonejedo      5         80 99 IWI    System Operation           66 083         yo    2  5   005            Jenny   spouad                                     Jjo          0    uo  205   02   sannu snonunuon    uo                 uo                      Aoeeis       yo asw 0    uo  2  5   02                                    ein esnid                                                           JO 81niN    uo 215     punoJDXoeg   euoydueyeeds     uo osje          uo 1oxXeeds        eui UO                       5    ou op    uoneis                          JO eui episino  uo          uoneis ssa              uoneis sed    BuiGesseui aN      1                 5 27           66 083    Maintenance    CHAPTER6  MAINTENANCE    TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE AND REPAIR  SERVICE    TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE    Should you experience difficulty with installation   checkout  or programming  and have made an attempt  to isolate the problem using information provided  herein  or should you encounter problems at a later  date which cannot be resolved by referring to this  manual  call the Comdial Technical Service staff   They can be reached at 1 800 366 8224 between the  hours of 8 00 AM and 8 00 PM Eastern time  Monday  through Friday     When calling for technical assistance  you should be  at the job site and you should have in your  possession  as a minimum  an 
21.      OR    Dial       for configuration mode           Dial 53   STATION FEATURES       Dial 07   ATI THRU DIALING       Select station ports to be programmed  Station 10   57  Dial 104 57    Dial    for next feature    OR   Dial       for configuration mode        DEFAULT   NOT EN     gt                       gt      OR ORT  ENTE PORT  ENTRY    t                  1 33    9      3            23   19    ss   ___  24      40   lse        EFA z NOT ENABLED    Press SPKR to end                    1  2                  ENTRY        INIT      a  yo    l  16 I  2                       L   2   1   314   3   Bit hs O a  eof _ __ 36   2      E                                                     WMI               Vp            580 99 IWI      Press                    for base level   Press ITCM     7 4 6   for base level     FEATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD    Volce Mall Port  Connect the 1  Dial 53   STATION FEATURES     ExecuMailsystem or a model 2500 2  Dial 32   VOICE MAIL PORT    industry standardtelephoneto a 3  Select station ports to be programmed  stationportthroughthe Analog   Station 10 57  Dial 10 57  Terminal Interface ATI device  4  Dial fornext feature   Use this programming feature to  OR   enable the station port forExecuMail Dial       for configuration mode   operation  voice mail port   Disable the  Station port as a voice mail port when  used for model 2500 telephone  operation   NOTE  This feature is automaticaly  disabled if th
22.      the stations are accessible to   Dial 04 to disable Line Group 4   inauthorized users thus subject to   Dial 05 to disable Zone 1 Paging     ampering  These features are Dial 06 to disable Zone 2 Pagi         ging              when system default is    Dial 07 to disable Zone    Paging                       Dial 08 to disable All Call      Dial 09 to disable Meet Me Page     Dial 10 to disable Night Transfer      Dial 11 to disable Background Music      Dial 12 to disable Voice Announce Block     Dial 13 to disable Message Waiting      Dial 14 to disable Call Pickup     Dial 15 to disable Call Forward   a Dial 16 to disable Automatic Call Back      Dial 1 to disable Station to Station Messaging     Dial 18 to disable Line Group Queue      Dial 19 to disable Directed Station Hold      Dial 20 to disable Call Park Orbit 1     Dial 21 to disable Call Park Orbit 2      Dail 22 to disable Call Park Orbit 3      Dial 23 to disable Call Park Orbit 4     Dial 24 to disable Call Park Orbit 5      Dial 25 to disable Call Park Orbit 6     Dial 26 to disable Call Park Orbit 7      Dial 27 to disable Call Park Orbit 8       Dial 28 to disable Call Park Orbit 9      Dial 29 to disable Call Waiting      Dial 30 to disable LCD Messaging     Dial 31 to disable Executive Override Service  Observing      Dial 32 to disable Account Code     Dial 33 to disable Personal Call Forward     Dial 34 to Enable All Features     Dial    for next item     Dial       for configuration      1 4         
23.     1 9  Station Monitoring                      4 9  5 1  Station Monitoring With DSS Call Pickup           2 16  Station Names                      4 82  5 15  Station Operation                       5 1  Station Self Test                      2  3 31  Station Speed       sg Ghee Mace          eet aU     Station Speed Dial Programming PPS  Station To Station Messaging                   55  Station To StationPortReassignment            4 51  Station User Programming       ee              5 11    IMI 66 083    Station Wall Mounting                     6 1  Station Wall Mounting Details                  6 2  Station To Station Massaging      2 16  Station Line Configuration Record               4 40  Status Indiirs And Tone Sequences            5 21  Subdued Ringing                       2 17  System Alarm Report Station                  4 35  System Alarm Reports               2 17  4 10  5 17  System Capacity                           1 8  System Checkout And Failure Isolation            3 31  System Clock                     4 78  5 14  System configuration                     4 5  System COS Menu Selections                 4 87  System D  faut                           4 4  System Features  Description                  2 1  System Groundii                        8 3  System Operating Characteristics               5 19  System operating Procedures                     5 1  System Overview                          1 1  System Programming             nnnm     4 1  System Ringi
24.     2    B         z5                  lt                                           a  no       x ex  E                                      5 z  gee    586           amp   lt                        gt   58  CENE     EEG  14           8       7955                 m          Figure 3 4  Typical LIne Connections    Installat     IMI 66 083                                             4    c e nfd                             NOILVLS                              16                    AWOSIdAL    NOILVLS  INVGN3LLV  WODIdAL                          TIVA  NOILVLE TWoldAl                                        06      6         9 gt               f          Sy                  44       ap     e          e                                           1H    0000000                                     4                NSN OL             318v2              04 31vN                                                                                                    SNe ef MOM OHO     PHHH HEHEHEHEH    1 01 1404   011  16       32018 YOLIFNNOD  NOILVLS                   jon    SE    IMI 66 083    CTION 2    OPTION INSTALLATION DETAILS    KEY SYSTEM HYBRID CONFIGURATION    The systern can be configured to operate as either a   key system or as a hybrid system  Configuration is by  way of a wire strap connected as detailed below and   illustrated in Figure 3 6     The common equipment is shipped from the factory as  a key system              convert operation over to the  hybrid  MF  system  add t
25.     City  State    Zip    Addendum         JON          ede  eseejd    YSN   y     3080             TVIGINIOD                 NO POSTAGE  NECESSARY  IF MAILED    IN THE  UNITED STATES    BUSINESS REPLY MAIL  FIRST CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 594  CHARLOTTESVILLE  VA 22906      POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE    COMDIAL   TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS DEPARTMENT  P 0 BOX 7266   CHARLOTTESVILLE VA 22906 7266         illi illad      ill iili         ll    Fold    Please Tape     Do Not Staple       eur  Buo y 1n2    eur                            Made right        PK021 001 10        in the USA    TECHNICAL ADVISORY BULLETIN    Date  January 1993 Issue  TAB 099    SOFIWARE ENHANCEMENTS FOR    THE DigiTech DIGITAL TELEPHONE SYSTEM    This bulletin discusses the following software enhancements and feature additions to the DigiTech telephone system       Enhanced SMDA reporting    Expanded options for account code entry    Support for Caller ID service    Availability of these enhancements is as follows     BASE UNIT PRODUCT CODE SOFTWARE CARTRIDGE PRODUCT CODE  GO408      Revisions 50408 Rev  13a and later  GO81 6 All Revisions 50816 Rev  13a and later   31632 All Revisions 51632 Rev  13a and later    Note  Due to the addition of a new account code table  you should follow these steps when updating software      the field       1  Save current database   2  Install new software   3  Master clear system   4  Restore database   5  Perform additional programming  if desired    FEATURE AND BENEFI
26.     Figure 4 3  Remote Programming Block Diagram                  6                        66 083 System Programming       MENU DESCRIPTIONS     Master Clear System Data        5    i     Default Toil Restriction Tables    System EIS E On each default selection  the system questions the  2 Line C OSS  user as to whether the default should be made   f  3  Station C OS  response to the question is yes  Y   the default is  4  Toll Restriction Table Administration performed   5  Information When defaulting selected station data  the station to  6  Logoff be defaulted must be identified by port number  10           Enter Selection     MAIN MENU SELECTIONS              Selection 1  Chooses system COS programming     Selection 2  Chooses line COS programming     Selection 3  Chooses station COS programming     Selection 4  Chooses toil restriction table  administration programming     Selection 5  Choses an information menu to  provide assistance with VDT programming     System C O S  Programming   1  System Defaults   2  System Options   3  System Timing   4  Load   Save C O S  Data   5  Serial Communication Parameters   6  C O S  Data Printout   7  Set Clock Date   Time   8  SMDA Programming   9  SMDR Print Parameters   IO  Logical   Physical Assignments     Stations  ll  Logical   Physical Assignments   Lines  12  Automatic Station Relocation   13  Feature inhibit Programming   14  Enable Ail inhibited Features   15  LCD Messages   16  Software Version Number   17  Return To Prev
27.     Press      or dial 13  lt  1040 msec   3  Dial    for configuration mode        Press   7 or dial 07   320 msec           RINGING LINE                 DELAYED                      NIGHT _         SL  A  STATION 2        PAGINGPORT              DEFAULT   NO DIRECT RING  NO DELAY RING  ALL ZONES  STATION 17 RELAY          DF LT   80 MSEC      Press SPKR to end              VON                           W  JSAS    bl bp    LINE CONFIGURATION    Mark the desired selections in the charts to record programming needs   Dial the feature code and then dial the selection code or press the programming button to program the selection     IOTE  A current program setting is indicated oy a lighted LED next to the programming button for that selection  When a toggle  on off  action is  provided by a single button  the lighted LED indicates an active feature     To make a line port selection  press a programming button or dial a selection number on the keypad as follows     LINE PROG  BUTTONS KEYPAD BUTTONS   1 14 Al          01 14   15 16   1   2 15 16   17   24 HOLD plus           17 24   NOTE HOLD button is used to toggle program buttons between lines 1   14 and 17   24     FEATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD    Base Level  The first step in any Press        Dial    7 4 6     programming sequence is to enter the  base level  Once in this mode  any  desired configuration can be set                1  Dial 30   LINE DEFAULT      2  Press   to default line
28.    1 8  Grounding  System                          3 3  Group Call                                     4 30  H   Handsfree Answer Inhibit                   241   Hardware Summary                         3  Headset Interface                       4 29  Hold Recall Featue                         5 4  Holding  Calls              2 12  5 4  Hold And   Use Indications                  2 11   de Line Preference                   2 1 1 439  ndustry Regulatory Standards                    9  Initial                2                      3 31   nstallation                 me RE he bane  3 1  nstallation  Add On Expansion Module            3 26  Installation  Software Cartridge                3 27  ntegrated Call Costing                    4 65  ntercom Call Progress Tones              2 11  5 23  ntercom Calling                          5 2  ntercom Hunt Group                  2 11  4 30  nitercom                            Relate eed      5 26  ntercom Line                                  2 11   Introduction   rrr i 1  K   Key System Hybrid Configuration               3 14  L   Last Number                              2 11 5 3  LCD Messaging                2 12  4 81  5 6  5 15  LED     Support                       2 12  Line Access Restriction                    2   2  Line And Line Group Queuing              2 12  5 2  Line Answer From Any Station  Night Mode        2 12 5                                              walk a ne ee 4 41  Line Configuration                       4 1
29.    2 2 Class Of Service Programming  From Main Station     2 5  Automatic Hold   Transfer To tine                2 2 Class Of Service Programming  From VDT            2 5  Automatic Hold For Intercom              2 2  4 28 Common Audible And Auxiliary Ringing Interface       3 17  Automatic Pause Insertion                  2 2 Common Audible Interface Wiring               3 17  Automatic Privacy                    2 2 4 19 Common Audible Ringer Interface                2 5  Automatic Redial                     2 2  5 3 Common Equipment Description                  1 3  Automatic Redial Button  Programming            5 12 Common Equipment  Station And Line Connections         Automatic Station Relocation              2 2  4 10 Communications Procedures  Data Communications 3 29  Automatic Transfer Of Voice Mall               4 55 Conferencing              eed reet ebd  5 5  Auxiliary Equipment Interface              2 2  3 16 Conferencing  Add On                     2 6  Auxiliary Interface Connections                3 16 Conferencing    Multiline                     2 6  Auxillaty  Lines           4 15 Conferencing    Unsupervised                   2 5  Auxiliary Ringer Interface                     2 2 Configuration  Attendant                    4 78   Configuration  Add On Expansion Module          3 24  B    Configuration  Line                       4 14  Background Music            IL                 2 3  5 8 Configuration  Station                     4 22  Basic Key Serv
30.    Figure 3 9  Typical Common Audible Interface Wiring    3 17    ion    EXTERNAL PAGING  INTERFACE  A special transformer isolated paging port is used to  couple the system to an external paging amplifier     Relay closure dry contact points are available at the  ringing port terminal and can be used for controlling  the external paging amplifier during a paging  operation  These contacts close and stay closed  during the time that a paging operation is active to  provide a constant enable signal path for the paging  amplifier             TYPICAL  COMMON EQUIPMENT   8 LINE  IG STATION BASE  UNIT SHOWN         CLIP TERMINALS    IMI 66 083    NOTE  This paging enable constant closure function  overrides the ring pattern closure provided  when ringing is sent to the paging port  See    the previous paragraph titled Common Audible  And Auxiliary Ringing Interface     e Connect the audio input of an external paging  amplifier to the paging port as shown below in  Figure 3 10     e  f an enable signal is required by the paging  amplifier  connect the enable leads to the station 17  audible teminals as shown in Figure 3 10     PA SYSTEM    AUDIO INPUT           BARRIER STR IP   IG LINE  32 STATION BASE UNIT        CONNECTOR BLOC    5 K  i4 LINE  8 STATION AND S LINE  16 5             BASE UNITS     Figure 3 10  Typical External Paging Connection    3 18           66 083 Installe      EXTERNAL PAGING closure feature is not available for use with this  INTERFACE    LINE PORT installa
31.   OR      Press SPKR to end     Dial       for configuration mode     Press            7 4 6   for base level     EATURE DESCRIPTION   ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD  Q       Ine Groups  Outside lines of the  ame type can be grouped together for  dial up outgoing access  Access codes  yr the line groups are     Group 1   Dial 9  Group 2   Dial 81  Group 3   Dial 82  Group 4  lt  Dial 83    VOTE  System must be strapped for  hybrid operation  as detailed in  Chapter 3  before this  programming feature is  available  A line group queue  button can be assigned on a per  station basis as detailed on page  4 48     Line Groups   continued on next page           1  Dial 35  ASSIGN LINE GAPS    PoRT ENTRY   PORTIENTRY  PORT ENTRY   2  Dial 0 for no groups assigned GROUP              gt       3      NO LINE GROUP  b   hof he        OR            Dial 1 for Line Group 1    LINE GROUP 1            12 1      312             LED On   Lines Assigned    2  Select line ports to be disabled 8       14   1      8             Ling port    Dial pee  eb             Line port 1 14 z Dial 01   14 or Press AI          M       DEFAULT   NO LINE GROUPS ASSIGNED    Line port 15  16 z Dial 15  16 or press B1  B2  Line port 17 24   Dial 17   24   OR   Press HOLD then press Al     8     Dial X for next group    OR   Dial    X for next feature   5  Dial 2 for Line Group 2   LED On s Lines Assigned   8  Select line ports to be disabled   LED On   Disabled    Line port 1 14   Dial 01  14 
32.   and dial 2 to disable    3  Press SPKR to end     Continued on next                        91    FEATURE                  for   xecuMall voice  processing system     continued    BENEFIT  HUNT GROUPS  Option     When a station port that has been assigned to a hunt group is busy  a call      it will ring at the next  idle station port in the group  A call will try to ring every port in a hunt group and if all are busy    the telephone system will return a busy tone to the caller     programmer can assign      ExecuMail ports to a circular hunt group to take advantage of its multiple port interface capability   Make a circular hunt group by linking all ExecuMail ports to one another and then linking the last  ExecuMail port in the hunt group with the first ExecuMail port in the group  For example  with the  ExecuMail connected at station ports 013  014  015  and 016  place port 013 in a hunt group and  link 014 to it  then place 014 in a hunt group and link 015 to it  then place 015 in a hunt group and  link 016 to it  and finially place 016 in a hunt group and link 013 to it to complete the circle  With  this arrangement  a call will first try to ring at port 013  then try port 014 and so forth until it trys all  four ports     To program this feature  press            7 4 6    then do the following steps     1  Dial 53   STATION FEATURES     2  Dial 18   ITCM HUNT LINK       Select first linking station     station 11   57  Dial 11   57   3  Select second linking station   
33.   c  Repeat steps a and b until all account numbers  are assigned   d  Dial    for next SMDA feature     Dial 06 to clear account codes    CLEAR ACCT  CODE   a  Dial account code number  000    999    b  Dial   plus next account number   c  Repeat steps a and b until all account numbers  are cleared   d  Dial    for next SMDA feature     Dial 07 to enable account codes for use                     ACCOUNT   a  Press      to toggle between enable and disable   LED On    Enabled     OR     Dial 1 to enable  Al LED          ENABLE ACCOUNT      Dial 2 to disable   DISABLE ACCOUNT  b  Dial    for next SMDA feature     Dial 08 to enable system to compare user  account code entry with programmed  account code    VERIFICATION XXX  a  Press Al to toggle between enable and disable   LED On    Enabled     OR     Dial 1 to enable comparison    Al LED On    VERIFICATION           Dial 2 to disable comparison    VERIFICATION OFF  b  Dial    for next SMDA feature     continued on next page           CCOUNT CODE ENTRIES   CATEGORIES       OUN OD   ENABLED  DISAB      VERIFICATION 1        OFF        DEFAULT  VERIFICATION Orr        DEFAULT   3 DIGIT ACCOUNT CODE    Press SPKR to end       580 99 II                                      Oleh    Press             7 46 for base level           Account Codes   continued  6     FEATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PRO    Dial 09 to program the account code maximum   length   MAXACCT  CODE X      Dial 3 6 for number of digits  3 min   6 max      MAXAC
34.   station and place the call over that selection     To program autodlal numbers       Press             1     e Press desired programmable button  Listen for fast  tone bursts        Press specific line button          button       dial 1   4  for line groups  to store line pre selection     e  f no line pre selection is desired  dial 0  system will  choose last line used at calling station      e Dial the number sequence to be stored   Up to  sixteen digits can be stored  Valid digits include 0    9    and          To store a pause if required  press HOLD       To store a hookflash if required  press           To store another number      Press TRANS CONF      Press next programmable button      Make line pre selection if desired      Dial number for storage       Repeat this procedure until all desired numbers are  stored     To end autodlal programming     Press MNTR  SPKR      System Operation        66 083    STATION SPEED          PROGRAMMING  Station speed dial numbers can be stored by the  station user for later redial  The storage locations are  keypad digits 0 through 9 on the station  Before  attempting to program  decide on the following items    1  the number or feature to be stored   2  which  storage location will be used  0   9    3  the circuit that  the call will go over  individual line or intercom      To program numbers     Press               2     Dial a memory location  0 through 9   Listen for fast  tone bursts      Press specific line button        
35.   sus  fea           Roe           4 6  PBWCENTREWCO  Compatibe                2 13  PC Operation  Typical                     4 84  Personalized Ringing Tone             2 13  4 29  5 8  Pooled Line Access                      2 13  Port Reassignment  Line To Line               4 19  Port Reassignment  Station To Station            4 51  Power Failure Transfer                   2 13  3 15  Power Requirements                         8  Prime Line Automatic                     2 13  Prime Line Group Intercom                  4 36  Privacy    Designated Programmable Button          2 14  Privacy  Button              ev   4 43  Privacy Release                       4 38  Privacy Release Brokerage Service              2 14  Private Lines  Access Denied                  2 14  Product   Godes ces sed      ke Sa edits weds 1 9  Programmable Buttons                    2 14    Programmable Direct Station Selection Busy Light Field     2 14             Programming  Assist Button                  5 13  Programming  Autodial                    5 11  Programming  Automatic Redial Button            5 12  Programming  DSS BLF                    5 12  Programming Overlays               4 1  4 91  4 92  Programming  Response Message Button          5 12  Programming  Secure Off Hook Voice Announce   Originate Button                       5 13  Programming  Station Speed dial               5 12  Programming  Station User                  5 11  Programming  System                       4 1  Pro
36.   when the time of    call is recorded for   Dial time in tenths of a minute  001  999   costing  or dial 000 to clear                   Dial    for next SMDA feature     Dial for configuration mode     Answer Time Limit  The system can be   1  Dial 75   SMDA PROGRAMMING     programmed to wait for a period of time   Dial 03 to program answer time     limit   before beginning call cost recording  Thi   ANSWER TIME XXX    time will allow for a call to ring and be   Dial time in tenths of a minute  001   999  answered before being costed  or dialoooto clear    XXX       Dial    for next SMDA feature      Dial       for configuration mode     Press SPKR to end        99097979 II                       uleisAg    5 5    PressITCM    7 4 6  for baselevel     STATION  MESSAGE DETAIL AGAQI JNTING REPORTING    Five different call cost reports can be produced by the system for printing  They are     1  Detailed report of all station   2  Detailed report of all accounts   3  Trunk summary report   4  Department summaryrepon   5  All records   Reports are generated automatically for printing whenever the system detects that the records storage area is ninety five percent full  The reports to  be printed are chosen by programming action and are printed in the order of selection  The system can be programmed for these reports to be   generated automatically for printing at a certain time each day  Programming action can also be taken so that all printed records are then deleted  except for 
37.   y  Dial    for configuration mode     Jisabled on a per station basis        Press SPKR to end                                                   80 99 II               DIRECT INWARD STATION DIALING  DISD     The DISD feature allows an external party to call an intercom station directly without assistance by the attendant  The DISD call must be received         line which has been specially programmed to allow this feature  Any line can be programmed to be a DISD line for both the normal mode of  operation and the night transfer  of ringing  mode of operation     The number of rings which occurs on a DISD line before it is answered is programmable  By setting a large number of rings  time is allowed for a  call to be serviced in a regular manner by stations that have a line appearance for the DISD line  Setting the number of rings to 0 disables the line  tor DISD use  If a line is to be dedicated for DISD use  it is a good practice to set it for one ring  The amount of time allowed for an extension  number to be dialed is programmable as is the DISD assist station that will answer calls that are not completed during this dial time limit     It is recommended that a music source be connected to the system to provide a reassurance to the caller during a camp on situation when the    NSD feature is being used   FEATURE DESCRIPTION    Base Level  The first step in any  yrogramming sequence is to enter the  dase level  Once in this mode  any  Jesired configuration can be set     
38.  17   24   Dial 17     24  or press HOLD then press        8    4  Dial   when all line ports are selected   5  Select station ports to be programmed   e station 1 1  57  Dial 11   57   6  Dial    when all station ports are selected   7  Dial       for next station line ringing feature  or press SPKR to end     Night Transfer  of ringing     1  Dial 54   STA LINE CONFIG   2  Dial 3     NIGHT RING     3  Select line ports     line port 1 14   Dial 01     14 or press            14     line port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or press B1  B2     line port 17     24   Dial 17   24  or press HOLD then press Al   A8    4  Dial   when all line ports are selected   5  Select station ports to be programmed     station 11   57  Dial 11    57     Dial    when all station ports are selected     Dial       for next station line ringing feature  or press SPKR to end     AUTOMATIC TRANSFER OF VOICE MAIL  Option     The programmer can choose the immediate transfer mode for voice mail transfers  However  if  he turns on the screen and or confirm options provided by the ExecuMail system  he must not  choose the immediate transfer mode because it allows the system to transfer a call as soon as it  answers it precluding any screen and confirm action that the ExecuMail can provide                To program this feature  press            7 4 6    then do the following steps     1  Dial 25  V MAIL AUTO  XFER    2  Press Al to toggle between enable and disable  LED On   Enable   or dial 1 to enable  Al LED on
39.  36 __ _____ 52 _ ____  21    ____37 __ _____ 53 J      o   __  4  DEFAULT   NOT ASSIGNED    9 Dial a feature code to select a programming  parameter     A current program setting is indicated by a lighted  LED next to the applicable programming button    When a toggle  ON OFF  action is provided by a  single button  the lighted LED indicates when the  feature is active        If a tone burst sounds three times during    Press    to return to the most previous  programming  it denotes an                input  programming level  Each press returns to the  Programming can be continued after an error next previous programming level    without ending and re entering the programming   mode from base level            Press SPKR to end procedure     4 2    MASTER CLEAR    The entire programming configuration  as discussed in the following programming procedures  can be defaulted to the factory settings at once  using the Master Clear procedure     Not on y does this action return ALL programmed varlables to a known state of  operatlon  It also clears all currently stored autodial and speed dial numbers     FEATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD    Base Level  The first step in any Press        Dial     746         COW G  MODE   jprogramming sequence is to enter the            level  Once in this mode  the   master clear can be performed     Master Clear  Returns entire system Dial 90   MASTER CLEAR    fo default and clears all stored auto Dial 5 1 6 8 
40.  4 31     1  Dial 38     HOLD RELEASE 50        2  Select hold release time for line ports      LED On   50 msec    Line port 1 14   Dial 01   14 or Press Al         Line port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or press B1  B2  Line port 17 24   Dial 17   24   OR   Press HOLD then press Al     8       Dial    for configuration mode       Dial 39   DEPT  CALLING      Select department      NO DEPARTMENT    DEPARTMENT 1    DEPARTMENT 2    DEPARTMENT 3    DEPARTMENT 4     Dial 0 for none    Dial 1 for dept 1   Dial 2 for dept 2   Dial 3 for dept 3   Dial 4 for dept 4       Select line ports to be disabled     LED On   Disabled    Line port    14   Dial 01   14 or Press Al   Al4  Line port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or press B1  B2  Line port 17 24   Dial 17   24   OR   Press HOLD then press Al   A8       Dial    for next department      OR   Dial       for configuration mode       Press SPKR to end                                             580 99 INI    iat    Press             7 4 6 8 for base level         Automatic Privacy  A line can be  yade private or non private  In the  private mode  a station has exclusive  se of a line during a call  Lines are  private unless re programmed making  hem  non private     IOTE  Program a station button to act    as a privacy release button as  detailed on page 4 43     Line To Line Port Re Assignment        programming attributes for a line  hat is connected to a particular line  ort can be m assigned to a different  ne port by this programming action   his
41.  45 l     1  Dial amp for next station feature  ha          o   1461     OR  lis   ____        hMrz        Dialfor configuration mode           321 18411    iz                 49                     134        Jo          fo   151511   bo    36    52      21   174  153           Bs T            55              24   4074 541  J    l5   gg    71       DEFAULT z NONE ASSIGNED             Speakerphone Display of Costed      Dial 63   STATION FEATURES    PORT             PORT ENTRY           ENTRY    alls  When call costing is being     Dial 27     LCD CALL COST 1     1           8 4       imployed with the system  an LCD 3  Select station ports for programming  LLL 4348         ipeakerphonecan be programmedto    Station 10   57  Dial 10 57  H3       145        lisplay the costofacallasitls made   4 Dialxfornext station feature  H4    30      14e             station   OR  il        1471              nel eec         _ _     Dep           1        37     53    bo   he   Ta      3  5751    4     X  56      25                7        DEFAULT   NOT ASSIGNED       Press SPKR to end        uttuuE4DOJd   915  6       80 99 INI                 Press           4 7 4 6    for base level           EATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD     STATION FEATURES      ALARM RECEIVE       9           Alarm Report Station  When       system has been arranged to report  farms  use this programming feature to  nable stations to display the alarm  eports when the station use
42.  9 three way  16 three way    POWER REQUIREMENTS   Fully loaded system     AC POWER  90 a 129 VAC Singlephase       models  0 6A 2 0A 2             135w 150w           190     200        DIMENSIONS  approximate   COMMON EQUIPMENT    WIDTH  inches   16 5 16 5 16 5  HEIGHT  inches   21 3 27 1 27 6  DEPTH  inches   3 8 3 8 4 5  WEIGHT  pounds   17 5 26 30 5  STATIONS  FOOTPRINT  inches   8 625 X 7 658  WEIGHT  pounds   2 5   STATION CABLE REQUIREMENTS  TYPE  P wire  l pair  twisted  non shielded     MAXIMUM LENGTH   SWITCHING   PRINCIPLE     1000 feet with 24 gauge wire    Digital  time division multiplexing  TDM   Provides non blocking  switching with stored program control    1 8    oystem Overview    OPERATING ENVIRONMENT    TEMPERATURE   HUMIDITY     TERMINATIONS  STATION     LINE     STATION MESSAGE DETAIL  RECORDING PORT    FORMAT   PARITY    DATA BITS   STOP BITS   BAUD RATE   HANDSHAKING     CABLE LENGTH     MUSIC INTERFACE    INPUT LEVEL   INPUT IMPEDANCE   CONNECTOR     PA PORT    OUTPUT LEVEL   OUTPUT IMPEDANCE   CONNECTOR     CENTRAL OFFICE LIMITS  LOOP LIMITS     CABLE INSULATION LEAKAGE     INDUSTRY REGULATORY  STANDARDS     MEMORY RETENTION  AFTER POWER LOSS     FCC REGISTRATION NUMBER   KEY SYSTEM   HYBRID SYSTEM                EQUIVALANCE NUMBER     PRODUCT CODES     Common Equipment  CO408    4 Line   8 Station  CO81 6   8 Line  16 Station       632   16 Line  32 Station  CM408     4 Line  8 Station  Expansion Module    IMI 66 083    32 122 degrees F  O 50 degr
43.  Aer oes cane arose D bes                          5 21  Status Indicators And Tone Sequences        5 21             intensity      P RUN  Ve we wu MALE      Deni Gea adi dude Ae                  Vu GRE               t      Eq eges an cet ar xa A  5 21  CHAPTER6 MAINTENANCE                              2    6 1  Technical Assistance And Repair Service  e se i406        ley eee ee eee ees 6 1                              oes           eee shee ene          an Gare antec           ed          UAR 6 1  Inner et        ee            wy See          Bt ore Oe          Bean         ed      Det aged Bae hans 6 1  Station Wall Mounting  lt  lt  s ssh ee eh e e e e ess 6 1    VII    Table Of Contents    Figure    1   Figure   2   igure 1 3    igure 3      gure 3 2   gure 3 3   gure 3 4    gure 3 5    gure 3 6    gure 3 7   igure 3 8   igure 3 9   gure 3  0   gure 3  1   gure 3 12   gure 3 13   gure 3  4   gure 3 1 5   gure 3  6   gure 3  7   Figure 4      Figure 4 2   Figure 4 3   Figure 5      Figure 6 1        II CIE                                                                         Programming    Table 3 1   Table 3 2   Table 3 3   Table 3 4     Table 3 4b   Table 3 5   Table 3 6   Table 4 1   Table 5 1     LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS    Outline Dimensions    Common Equipment 555555555555     Outline Dimensions   Station Equipment       sett tt       Station Images PC XII  Mounting Dimensions                              AC Power Connection And System Grounding        Common Equipm
44.  Dial OR 24 DEFAULT   ALL TABLES AS GND      ALL PORTS  Press HOLD then dial AI   A8   LED On   Lines as gnd to  to receive tables   Dial    and repeat steps 2 4 for next toll table to  line assignment    OR   Dial       for configuration mode  IMI 66    e       ee LEE IE TIU eT    Press SPKR to end           Press             746    for base level     Assign Toll Table To Station    Assign Toll Table to be applied when  system is programmed by the attendant  or night transfer of ringing     1  Dial 73       Dial 74   2  Dial 01   16 for toll tables 1   16 to be as gnd      OR   Press     A14  B1  B2 for tables 1 16    LED On   Selected table       Dial   to finish entry     Select station ports to be programmed     a Station 10   57  Dial 10   57       Dial    for next toll table to station assignment      OR   Dial       for configuration mode        ASSIGN TOLL NITE      OR   Press     A14  B1  B2 for tables 1 16    LED On   Selected table       Dial      finish entry     Select station ports to be programmed        Station 10   57  Dial 10   57         Dial    for next toll table to night answer    assignment    OR   Dial       for configuration mode         ASSIGN TOLL STA     2  Dial 01   16 for toll tables 1 16 to be as gnd to stai      ENTRY   POR    10          11 E    12                     AS GND    Press SPKR to                                   wayskS      80     System Programming           66 083    Toll Restriction Programming Reference Tables    OLL RESTRICTI
45.  Display Number of Free Records    press 9 to Delete Records  After Next Print     press 10 to Start Printing Report     press 11 to Stop Printing Report     press 12 to Return to Previous Menu    DigiTech systems have the following SMDA record storage capacities     50408    800 records  50816   1600 records   1632   1600 records    Oo           Refer to Figure 3 in this Technical Advisory Bulletin  under the Caller ID heading  for an example  of      SMDR printout with Caller ID information for incoming calls     ACCOUNT CODES AND ACCOUNT CODE VERIFICATION   The Account Code feature has been enhanced so that account code entry may be either   forced  or optional for outgoing calls  When account code verification is enabled  the system compares  the account code entered by a station user with the programmed account entries     f the system  does not find a match and the forced account code feature is enabled through class of service  programming  the system prevents further dialing until the user enters a matching account code   For account code verification to work properly  the system programmer must maintain  within the  System  a current list of valid account codes     When a station user activates redial and auto redial features for outgoing calls  the system will  automatically re use the last account entered at that station  Additionally  users may enter an  account code before seizing a line for an outgoing call     ACCOUNT CODE LENGTH  VERIFIED ACCOUNT CODE LENGTH A
46.  ID Records Figure 3  following page  provides an example of an SMDR printout with Caller ID information for       SMDR Printouts incoming calls  preceded by a slash in the  Called or Calling    column      Continued on next                DigiTechSystemSoftware Enhancements TAB 099    zs Date Time Called or  Calling       1  10 15 92 0 1 1234567890123456   2  10 15 92    99736243    3  10 15 92 i 1973 3437    4  10 15 92       1973 3437    5  1 0 15 92    6  1 015 92    7  10 15 92    8  10 15 92       1  2  3  4  5  6  7  8    outgoing call   outgoing call   unanswered incoming call  with caller ID  answered incoming call  with caller ID  unanswered incoming call  without caller ID  answered incoming call  without caller ID    answered incomingDISD call  with caller ID    DEL D NEU EP            5                    unanswered incomingDISDcall  without caller ID    Figure 3  Sample SMDR Printout    COMDIAL    Made tight in the USA    TECHNICAL ADVISORY BULLETIN    Date           1992 Issue  TABO91A    SOFIWARE ENHANCEMENTS FOR  THE DIGITECH DIGITAL TELEPHONE SYSTEM    This bulletin discusses the software enhancements and feature additions for the DigiTech digital telephone system that  are available with software releases 10 and 11 A    Software release 10 provides the following enhancements      Additional dial time for the DISD option     Changed defaulted first choice signalling style for intercom calls     Supports both on hook and off  hook call announcing from speaker
47.  Line port 17   24   Dial 17   24   OR   Press HOLD then press Al   A6        Dial   when     line ports are selected      Select station ports to be programmed      Station 10   57  Dial 10    57      Dial    when all station ports are selected    OR    Dial       for next station line ringing feature    OR    Dial          for configuration mode       Dial 64   STA LINE CONFIG  MARK STATION LINE RECORD      PAGE 4 40      Dial 3   NIGHT RING   DEFAULT z ALL LINES NIGHT RING AT    Select line ports  STATION PORTS 10 AND 17     Line port 1 14   Dial 01     14 or press Al              Line port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or press B1  B2      Line port 17     24   Dial 17   24    OR   Press HOLD then press Al     A8     Dial   when all line ports are selected     5  Select station ports to be programmed     a Station 10   57  Dial 10   57          Dial    when all station ports are selected      OR    Dial       for next station line feature    OR    Dial          for configuration mode     Press SPKR to err i       PAGE 4 40    ATQ H     Dial 54   STALINE CONFIG      UUU 99 HNI                                                4      Press ITCM     7 4 6   for base level      EATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD     rivacy Release  A line can be made  lon private at a particular station while  emaining private at all other stations   tations can be programmed to  iutomatically release privacy while on  ertain lines  With this arrangement   ther stations 
48.  Lines  A line port can 1  Dial 33   C O  LINES        conditioned to serve as a port for a 2  Select line ports to be disabled  standard telephone company supplied  LED On   Disabled                office line  Line port I 14   Dial 01   14 or Press Al         Line port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or press       B2  Line port 17 24   Dial 17    24   OR   Press HOLD then press Al   A6   3  Dial    for configuration mode   Line Names  Lines can be named as 1  Dial 34   INE               PORTIENTRY                      PORTIENTRY   to their function to identify them for use    2  Select line ports to be disabled                     Hr       Names such as WATTS  CO  etc    LED On  lt  Disabled   20                when appearing on the display  make tine port 1 14   Dial 01  14 or Press Al        A    R       12  1      locating a desired line easier for the Line port 15  16  lt  Dial 15  16 or press       B2 5   143    a l  station user to do  Up to five characters Line port 17 24   Dial 17   24 6    14   122      can be used to form a line name   OR  7 l  115   i3      Press HOLD then press Al   A8    8   16            3  Press   to clear current name  DEFAULT z NO LINE NAMES ASSIGNED  4  Dial line name char  codes  5 char  max          See character code chart  Table 4    on Page 4 21   T    Examples     WATTS   Dial 9121 81 81 73       0156   Dial 00  01  05  06 E   Each character must be represented by two digits   3  5  Dial    and repeat last three steps for next line  3         
49.  Modems will automatically  complete data connection     3 29          TELEPHONE JACK  TO CO PBX  LINE                       TYPICAL  COMMON EQUIPMENT  ABINET  LINE CONNECTION        STATION CONNECTION   lt  gt  HEADSET  JACK     SEE NOTE 1               noe         DATA SWITCH   SEE TEXT     TELEPHONE HANDSET   SEE NOTE 1     TYPICAL DATA MODEM    TYPICAL DATA DEVICE  NOTE 1  When the telephone Is equipped with a headset jack  the hone handset   PERSONAL COMPUTER OR VDT  remains            to he                     Is left                lessor  headset Is then connected to the handset a amp  of the data switch  The cable    that 15 supplied with the data switch Is connected between the telephone jack  of the dat   switch and the headset jack of the telephone     Figure 3 17  Data Communicatlons Interconnection Diagram    TYPICAL            SYSTEM    9         TELEPHONE   E  HANDSET JACK   SEE NOTE 1   TYPICAL    00122541    580 99 INI           66 083    Installation    SECTION 6  SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND FAILURE ISOLATION    INITIAL CONDITION    The system operating features are set to default  conditions at initial power up  These conditions  provide a basic operating system with a known set of  parameters  and the system should be initially  checked out with the default conditions in place  At  any time while the system is operating  default  conditions can be reset from station port 10 or 12 per  the instructions provided in Chapter 4  Programming     CHECK OUT  Check the co
50.  OFFCE CODE BANDS   compared to entries in seven different Dial 0 if no band is to    office code band tables  Program the be as gned         BAND    cost values for off ice code band tables in       OR          rate tables 18   25  Dial 1 7 for bands 1 7     BANDX      Dial200 999 to as gn office code      Dial   and repeat step 5 for additional code      Dial    and repeat steps 4 6 to program next band     Dial for next SMDA feature      OR   Dial for configuration mode     Press SPKR to end        MUI GAG  Woy      80 99 IWI              PressITCM      7 4      for base level                           lone Call Band Tables  Long Distance   1  Dial 75   SMDA PROGRAMMING    BAND  AREA  Jalis   Calls that do not match exception  2  Dial 01 to program    CODE  ables are measured for the number of costing bands   COSTING BANDS             dialed  Those calls with numbers   Dial 3 to program DEREN           hat have 10 digits or more  long distance   zone       bands     ZONE BANDS   D   alls  are compared to entries      four   Dial 0 if no zone is  jifferent zone call band tables  Program to be as gned        ZONE        he cost values for zone       band tables                 z     call rate tables 25   28  Dial 1  4 for zones 1 4     ZONEX TOO TTE    Dial 200   999 to assign an area code               5    Dial 200     999 to as gn an office code  5           Dial   and repeat step 7      another office code  ee       Dial    and repeat steps 3 9 to add another area    724
51.  OR    Dial X    for next button mapping feature    OR    Dial          for configuration mode       Dial 56   BUTTON MA PPING     Dial 03   ASSIGN DSS BLF     Select button to be programmed       Press Al     A14  B1               Select station port to be assigned       Station 10     57  Dial 10 57       Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all ports are assigned       Dial       Select station ports to be programmed    with this DSS button assignment      Station 10   57  Dial 10   57       Dial X for further DSS button assignment      OR    Dial       for next button mapping feature   OR    Dial         for configuration mode       Dial 56   BUTTON MAPPING     Dial 04   BLANK AUTODIAL      Select all buttons to be programmed       Press        A14  B1  B8       Dial       Select station ports to be programmed with    this auto dial button assignment      Station 10   57  Dial 10   57       Dial    for further button blanking     Dial       for next button mapping feature    OR   Dial          for configuration mode       SEE CHART ON PAGE 4 49    Press SPKR to end        VUIWILUEJDOJ eg UlgisAS       80 99 IWI    fb b    Press             7 4 6 X for base level      FEATURE DESCRIPTION   ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY      Dial 55     Dial 05     Select button to be programmed     Multiple Intercom Button  Stations can       programmed to provide a second  ntercom button       rivacy Button  Stations        be  yrogrammed to provide a privacy button   4 user engaged      private
52.  SLATE WHITE                  BLUE RED imd PATH  ORANGE RED                                 e e         Somme                 RED SLATE       SLATE RED MEME  BLACK BLUE            n  m    BLACK ORANGE       ORANGE BLACK SPARE  BLACK GREEN Babee PORTS  GREEN BLACK  BLACK BROWN 27                     ia   _                a                             YELLOW BLUE              BLUE YELLOW 6                  JYW ORAN                      OV     36   TRAP   IN FOR HYBR       COMMON                    STATION 17  IBROWN VIOLET   AUDIB  POWER FAIL                        STATION    ion    Table 3 3  J1Station Connections    amp Line  16 Station Base Unit     25 PAIR CABLE        ALLE        STA   CONNECTIONS  STA LOCATION    Sd       BLUE WHITE EE PATH  WHITE ORANGE 27 SIGNAL 11            2 14   PATH  RED    WHITE GREEN   28  5       SIGNAL   GREEN    KEINE AED EE    BROWN WHITE ae PATH             WHITE SLATE te REL   RED      SLATE WHITE  5 __ 10   PATH     EN  BLUE RED      pu mm       RED ORANGE  32 113   SIGNAL GREEN  16    ORANGL ACO   7  14   PATH      RED GREEN e   33  15   SIGMAL     Fs              RED        RED BROWN           17   SIGNAL                        RATH 2        EL  SLATE RED    10  20   PATH  RED       ISLATE RED    FLACICBLUE Carer Ir a    11  22   PATH  ORANGE BLACK                                      12            LOREEN J         ORANGE BLACK  12  24   PATH    BLACK GREEN rz mro x  mA     13  26   PATH  RED      39  27   SIGNAL   GREEN     40  29   SIG
53.  Transfer Recall 1  Dial 11     TRANSFER RECALL     Ime  A transferred call that remains 2  Dial 1  sta xfr recall                  RCL XXX    inanswered after    programmed  OR   angth of time will return to the Dial 2  dept xfr recall    DEPT XFR RCL XXX   ransfening station for answering  3  Choose transfer time      Dial 1 or Press Al     STA        RCL 10     Dial 2 or Press A2   STA XFR RCL 20      Dial 3 or Press A3   STA XFR RCL 25       Dial 4 or Press   4   STA XFR RCL 30      Dial 5 or Press A5   STA XFR RCL 45   DEFAULT   20 sec         Dial 6 or Press                      RCL 60   a    Dial 7 or Press A9   STA XFR RCL 90   3    Dial 8 or Press A10   STA XFR RCL 120   T    Dial 9      Press Al 1   STA XFR RCL 180  8     Dial 0 or Press   12     STA        RCL 400   E  4  Press X for next transfer recall feature  z           5  Press             configuration mode   iib    Press SPKR to end     Press           7 46    for base level     FEATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY      Dial 12    Select time     Recall Flash     line disconnect   recall  or a host system feature  access signal  flash  can be  generated depending upon the  programmed time      Pause Tlme  During auto dials and  speed dials  it is sometimes  necessary to delay the sending of  digits to give switching equipment   time to prepare for receiving them  A  pause is stored whenever the user  presses the HOLD button  The pause  length options are stored in seconds       Dial 1 or Pre
54.  Type 20  RETURN for Assign Second DSS Console to a Station   5  Type 1  RETURN to assign second DSS console to a station   6  7    eo      Type console port number     Type station port number of assigned station     To clear a second console feature   1  Repeat steps 1 through 5 above     2  Type 0  RETURN to clear previous assignment   3  Type console port number     PROGRAMMING CLARIFICATION  The programming clarification is per the following discussion     CLARIFICATION DESCRIPTION    Button Mapping  WithDigiTech  7700S xxLCD  Speakerphones    When programming the button mapping on    DigiTech telephone using a DigiTech 7700S xx LCD  speakerphone as the programming station  press buttons Al       4 and B1        to select those same  buttons on the telephone being mapped  Because the DigiTech 77005      LCD speakerphone does  not provide buttons B4 through B8  dial 103   107 to select buttons B4   B8 on the telephone being  mapped     DigiTech Software Enhancement TAB BO    STATION 10   PROGRAMMING OVERLAY    Cut out along border    it over station faceplate     PROGRAMMING OVERLAY  DD32X       C25 t 041             C40           C21   C37      C20  636 1        c35     C5i     C18   C34                          16   C32 1                 15   C31          e e                                      e   e e             e e   l e               c27                                                       Jos                m eon 5      e     c        PAIRED PORT PAIRED PORT PROG
55.  WarToHiG        1 16    42       isprogrammed with this feature can  gt   Dial 06                             ES                ontrolthe message waiting light atothe   3  Select station ports to be programmed  Ho                 stations      the system    Station 10 57  Dial 10  57  43                 4  Dial for next station feature  46      NOTE  This feature mustbe    OR  5                    designated as a central             1    9    message desk per the           0     procedure  below  D ee mei   2   1a   1i 53       23     19        s       os ___   laa     57                             DEFAULT z NOT ASSIGNED     entralMessage Desk  One station in   1  Dial 63     STATION FEATURES      PORT  ENTRY         SIRO            the system can be designated as the 2  Dial 08  MSG DESK         8    2    entralmessagedeskandbearranged   3  Select station ports to be programmed  Ho   lg     4         exclusive messaging waiting control     Station 10 57  Dial 10 57  43             his station musthave message wait 4  Diabkfornextstationfeature  14   X  30   149       riginateenabledin orderto control  OR  45         ar     nessage waiting light at another station Dialekforconfiguration mode 48  121      j 4      VOTE  This station will also have the       message wait originate feature  p   s l pa              sn                         OTA             e 9      7     e central message des           feature is enabled                  perautT          57       Press SPKR to
56.  When a station is programmed for idle line preference   it will automatically be connected to the first assigned  idle line  The system can be programmed on a per  station basis to enable idle line preference  When idle  line preference is enabled  taking the handset off hook  will automatically connect the station to any assigned  line that is idle and has been arranged for this feature   The line button will not have to be pressed  If this  feature is used in conjunction with prime line  automatic  the user will be given prime line first when  going off hook  An idle line will be given    the prime  line is in use  The station class of service   programming enables this feature on a per station per  line basis     INTERCOM CALL PROGRESS TONES    Intercom call progress is marked by special tones  A  steady tone is provided for dial tone  Ring back tone is  one second on and three seconds off  For tone  signalled intercom calls  a two tone burst is sounded  every four seconds at a called station and returned to  the caller as ring back  For a voice signalled intercom  call  a single tone burst is sounded at a called station   When a called station is busy  a busy signal of one half  second on and one half second off is received at the  calling station  A fast busy tone will be supplied when  the called station is in the do not disturb mode  OPX  ports are only supplied with the regular busy tone   since fast busy tones could interfere with the operation  of some accessories 
57.  access to a line    Line Originate Deny  enable or disable station  ability to originate a call on a line         Line Preference  enable or disable access  to an idle line when station is taken off hook     Block Voice Announce Intercom        Audible Monitoring  audible ringing sounded for    stations with BLF appearance at programmed  station       Selection 6  Ringing assignment  Personal Ringing Tones  One of four different  tones can be chosen  Refer to page 4 29 for  frequencies if required    Direct Delayed Ringing  of each line assigned to  programmed station   Night Ringing  enable or disable night transfer   of ringing  to programmed station for  programmed lines       Selection 7  Button mapping  assign functions to  buttons     Special Note  Although buttons are identified by  Ax and Bx codes as shown      Figure 4 1 on page  449 and on fhe programming overlay supplied  with the system  do not type       A or          before  the            number when identifying it for function  assignment  To do so  causes the system to  interpret the typed entry as a line number choice  instead of a button number choice     Functions that can be assigned are identified per  the following list    To display list  enter      Return to key mapping with Control 2           ita c   Blank   Lxx            Line  1   24                    Station  10     57    DND          Do Not Disturb                     Privacy   IC2            2nd Intercom   SAV sets Save   ACG s Account Code B
58.  activity on non department lines  plus all intercom  call activity    On Duty Time  The on duty time includes a  summation of idle time  department call time   wrap up time  and other call time    Off Duty Time  The time that a station spent in a  do not disturb mode  While in a do notdisturb  condition  a station is not available to receive  calls  The station user sets a do not disturb  mode by pressing DND and repeats the  procedure to clear the do not disturb mode   UnansweredCalls  Total number of calls that  went unanswered at a department    Calls Answered After 36 Seconds  Total  number of calls that waited at least 36 seconds   approximately six rings from the CO  before  being answered    Calls Handled By Overflow Station  Total  number of calls that were answered and  transferred by the overflow station and then  answered and serviced by another station   Calls Terminated At Overflow Station  Total  number of calls that were received by the  overflow station and were either answered but  not transferred or were dropped by the caller  before being answered     Also refer to the discussion titled  Direct Department  Calling with Departments Call Distribution  DCD      DESIGNATED PROGRAMMABLE  BUTTONS    Station programmable buttons can be assigned to  provide one button access to a broad range of  features  There are designated buttons that must be  assigned at each station using station class of service  programming but the auto rediai button and response  message 
59.  along border      Cut out shaded openings      Fit over station faceplate                013 100      4 DIGITECH Al 1   REV   OR HIGHER1  PROGRAMMING   OVERLAY A1 2      13    14    COMDIAL    Made right in the USA    TECHNICAL ADVISORY BULLETIN    Date  July 1991 Issue  TAB080    SOFTWARE ENHANCEMENTS FOR  THE DigiTech DIGITAL TELEPHONE SYSTEM    This bulletin discusses the following software enhancement and programming clarification for the DigiTech digital    telephone system       Support for dual 32 button consoles    Button mapping with a DigiTech 7700S xx LCD speakerphone    Availability of this enhancement is as follows     SYSTEM  COA408  C081 6   CI 632    BASE UNIT PRODUCT CODE SOFTWARE CARTRIDGE PRODUCT CODE  GO408 All Revisions 50408 Rev  9 and later  GO81 6 All Revisions SO81 6 Rev  9 and later  G1632 All Revisions 51632 Rev  9 and later    FEATURE AND BENEFIT  The major feature and benefit of the revision 9 software enhancement is per the following discussion     FEATURE    Dual Console  Feature    BENEFIT    The dual console feature allow users of DigiTech telephone systems to have two 32 button consoles   product code DD32X xx  assigned to one telephone  This feature is especial  useful when used  with a DigiTech Cl632 system that has one or two CM408 expansion modules included with it  The  dual console feature allows a station user to monitor up to 48 stations from one station location    The first 32 button console automatically complements the telephone 
60.  are being forwarded     CALL BACK      Lift handset  Called telephone will ring   NOTE  Call bad   is cancelled if handset is not lifted     To cancel automatic call back before It rings       Press ITCM     Dial   6      Hang up     CALL WAITING    A call waiting tone can be sent to a busy station while  the calling station watts on line for an answer     To activate call walting       Make intercom call and receive busy signal       Dial    0 1   Called and calling parties hear three  short tone bursts 1     e Wait on line for an answer     To cancel call walting     Hang up handset   To answer a call waiting tone       Hear three short tone bursts over existing  conversation       Complete present call or place it on hold     Hang up  Waiting call will begin ringing       Lift handset to answer     5 9    System Operation    IM  66 083    SERVICE OBSERVING    A station can be programmed by system class of  service to allow the user to monitor a conversation at  another station in      un announced and muted  manner    e Press             e Dial   03       Dial extension number of station to be monitored   e Monitor the in progress call     To end observation       Press MNTR  SPKR      EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE    A station can be programmed by system class of  service to allow the user to break into a conversation  at another station                  an intercom call  and hear busy signal       Dial    03  A warning tone will sound at the called  station       Join in progress 
61.  are recipients of call  forwarding  the display will indicate the extension    number or station name for the station from which an  intercom call was forwarded     CALL FORWARDING   PERSONAL    Call forwarding on intercom allows a station user to  designate another station number  or the attendant  station number  to be the recipient of intercom calls  normally directed to that users station  For each  intercom call received while call forward is enabled  a  ring reminder  short tone burst  will be sounded at the  forwarding station to remind the user that the calls are  being forwarded  On LCD speakerphones that are  recipients of call forwarding  the display will indicate  the extension number or station name for the station  from which an intercom call was forwarded     CALL PARK    The call park feature is similar to a manual hold  condition  A call that is parked from    particular  station can be retrieved at any station in the system by  dialing the appropriate access code   Note  the  retrieving station cannot have access denied to the  line on which the call appears   Calls are parked and  retrieved within the system through the use of dialing  codes  The system provides nine parking circuits   orbits   Call park  when used with the paging  features  allows a system attendant to direct calls to  roving personnel  A call that is left in a parking orbit  for preprogrammed length of time automatically  returns to a timed hold recall condition at the station  which ori
62.  as a VDT or a personal  computer equipped with communications software               Hayes compatible modem       A data switch  such as the model PC 787JJ from  Precision Components Telephone  Addison IL   60 10 1  telephone  1 708 543 6400     CONNECTIONS  Refer to Figure 3 1 7  and connect the equipment as  illustrated  Certain digital telephone models include a  headset jack located on the rear housing near the line  jack  This headset jack marking reads            Installing this telephone requires the following  connection changes        The telephone handset remains connected to the  telephone and left on hook        Connect the accessory headset to the handset jack  of the data switch        Connect the telephone jack of the data switch to the  headset jack of the telephone  Do not connect it to  the the handset jack as illustrated  Make this  connection with the modular cable supplied with the  data switch  Make the modem and data device  connections using cabling specified in the literature  accompanying this equipment     The data switch has a compatibility control located on  the bottom of the cabinet  Set this control to match  the telephone equipment being used Change the  settings     2 positions from the specified settings to  provide the quietest data path possible     Use a flat blade screw driver to set the compatibility  control as follows     e With the telephone handset connected to the data  switch as illustrated  set the compatibility control to  posi
63.  automatically turns off during calls   No class of service programming is required to provide  this feature  Also refer to the discussion titled  External  Music Source     BASIC KEY SERVICE  1A2  EMULATION    The system provides all of the basic  1 A2 type  button  service features  These features are  selective line  pickup  common line pickup  muftiline pickup  and  hold  No special class of service programming is  required     BATTERY BACK UP    CHASSIS  CABLE  AND BATTERIES   Battery back up assemblies including chassis  cable   fuses  and batteries are offered as optional kits   available from Comdial   The assemblies are  designed to connect directly to the uninterruptable  power source  UPS  interface located on the common  equipment chassis  No user intervention is required  with this feature  and no class of service programming  is required     BATTERY BACK UP INTERFACE  Provision has been made for attaching a Comdial  provided optional battery back up      to give full  uninterrupted system power in case of an AC power    Description Of System Feat     loss  The switching and charge circuitry are in the  common equipment  while batteries  chassis  and  cable are packaged as a separate option  When  plugged into an active AC power source the common  equipment will constantly charge the attached  batteries  Built in circuitry automatically switches to  battery power when AC power is lost  With batteries at  full charge  a fully loaded system will operate for a  mini
64.  be defaufted by system  line  and station  class of service programming  A master clear will  default the entire system and erase all stored  programmable button information     DEFAULT TOLL RESTRICTION    Two toll restriction tables are defaulted with  pre programmed values and are pre assigned to all  lines  The tables need only be assigned to the stations  by programming action to put them into effect         defaulted tables can be reprogrammed with different  information using the normal programming procedure   Assign toll tables to stations using station class Of  service programming  Reprogram toll tables using toll  restriction table configuration class of service  programming     DELAYED RINGING    Pinging assignments are programmable  A station can  be programmed to provide delayed ringing on some  lines while providing immediate ringing on other lines   Delayed ringing is assigned to certain lines at each  station through station class of service programming     DEPARTMENTAL CALLING  DISTRIBUTION REPORT   The attendant station can request a Departmental  Calling Distribution  DCD  report  The DCD report will  provide a compilation of department call activity  The  Statistics that are reported are based on the  department assignments that are active at the time of  the report and are extracted from the SMDR records  collected by the system  For a report to be generated   a department must exist  All calls that are included in  the DCD report  must meet the followin
65.  button  or dial 1   4  for line groups  to store circuit pre selection           If no circuit pre selection is desired  dial 0  system  will choose last line used at calling station or prime  line if one is assigned to calling station     Dial the number sequence to be stored   Up to  sixteen digits can be stored  Valid digits include 0    9    and          To store a pause if required  press HOLD       To store a hookflash if required  press          Example  Store a telephone number under location    0  The number is 1 804 555 2222  Program as follows                       2  0  Line Button  1  8  0  4  5  5  5  2  2  2  2    To store another number      Press TRANS CONF      Press next speed dial location      Make line pre selection if desired        Dial number for storage      Repeat this procedure until all desired numbers are  stored    To end station speed dial programming    e Press MNTR  SPKR      DIRECT STATION SELECTION BUSY LAMP  FIELD  DSS BLF  PROGRAMMING    One button intercom calling with visual indication of  telephone status can be programmed as  programmable buttons not assigned to lines     To program DSS       Press                        Press programmable button to be programmed as  DSS button       Dial extension number     Repeat last two steps for all desired  numbers     extension    To end DSS programming      Press MNTR  SPKR     NOTE  An autodial number can also be programmed  as a secondary function at every DSS BLF  memory location  See Aut
66.  call can  ress the privacy button to change the  surrent call into a non private one       Dial 55     Dial 05     Select button to be programmed        BUTTON MAPPING         ASSIGN 2ND                Press         14  B1   B8       Select station ports to be programmed    with multiple intercom button      Station 10   57  Dial 10     57       Dial    for further intercom button assignment     OR   Dial       for next button mapping feature    OR    Dial          for configuration mode      BUTTON MAPPING         ASSIGN PRIVACY        Press            14    1  B6       Select station ports to be programmed    with a PRIVACY button      Station 10   57  Dial 10     57       Dial    for further privacy button assignment      OR    Dial       for next button mapping feature    OR    Dial          for configuration mode        REFERENCE RECORD    SEE CHART ON PAGE 4 49      Press SPKR to end         80 99 IWI                            5  6    Press            7 4 6   for base level   FEATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD    Do Not Disturb  DND  Button  Stations   1  Dial 56   BUTTON MAPPING     SEE CHART ON PAGE 4 49         be programmed to provide a do not   2  Dial 07   ASSIGN DND CODE      button prevents other stations from   Press A1   A14  B1   B8     calling the        station  System default   4 select station ports to be programmed  arranges L22 as the DND button  with a DND button       Station 10   57  Dial 10   57   5  Dial    for 
67.  can be set to have a short  RNA time to allow a call to search rapidly through a  department for an answer     When an outside or transferred call is ringing at a  department station  the station user can press the  pre programmed Do Not Disturb          button to  place the station in an off duty condition  While  off duty  all outside and transferred calls skip to the  next department station  This off duty condition  remains set until the DND button is pressed again to  place the station back in service  When the overflow  station is set to DND  all incoming and transferred calls  will return to the department queue     A department station can also be taken out of service  and placed in a wrap up mode to provide the user time  for doing such things as follow up paperwork  While a  station is in a wrap up mode  all outside and  transferred calls skip to the next department station   The station user sets the wrapup mode by pressing  SHIFT DND and presses these buttons again to clear  the wrap up mode     It should be noted that the departments formed for use  with this direct department calling feature are different  from those departments used in SMDA reporting   Assign department transfer recall time  unanswered  call transfer recall time feature  using the system class  of service programming  Assign lines for direct  department calling using the line class of service  programming  Assign department stations  access  codes to departments  flexible numbering feature   a
68.  chart     12 BLK    Blank         Lnn       Line 01   24  Al4 Snn Station 10     57  DND D o not disturb       nni Privacy     Second intercom         Account code  SAV                              Be    10  14                          ZPnzx us Zone page 1 3  B7      oie  All call page  B6 cl 10x14 Monitor Telephone                      Automatic call back  c ASE MAG Call forward   nz chon Call park orbii 1 9  83 TGn                 Line Fu   4                             Voice announce block    2 TGQ          Line group queue                 4     Locatlon Of Buttons On Telephone Faceplate    Press           746    for base level       FEATURE DESCRIPTION           Sitatlon to Statlon Port Reasslgnment     The extension number and all other  programmable attributes of a station that  are initially assigned to a particular port         be reassigned to a different port by  programming action  This feature allows  adds  moves  and changes to be made  without relocating the station wiring     NOTE  Refer     automatic station  relocation      page 4  10 and  the station connections  discussion found on page 3 6   Remember  the station 10  to station port 10 assignment  cannot be  reassigned     Block Programming     configuration  assigned to a particular station can be   assigned to one other station or to an  entire block of stations with one  programming   action     ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY      Dial 57 to re assign station to port      ASSIGN STA PORT       Dial s
69.  connection  The line select indicator will  turn off to indicate an idle line after a call on that line  hasbeenabandoned     ACCESS DENIED  Access to particular lines can be denied at certain  stations in the system through system programming   A station user cannot select a denied line for use   This feature is programmable on a per line per station  basis in station class of service programming     ACCOUNT CODE BUTTON  Station class of service programming can be used to  assign an Account Code button to any programmable  button location at a station as part of the button  mapping procedure  With this Account Code button  available  the user can press it and then dial the  account code without interrupting the call  Only the  user of the Account Code button will hear the DTMF  tones when the code is dialed  The distant on line  party will not hear the DTMF tones  and the line will  not be placed on hold  The distant on line party can be  heard while the account code is being dialed     ACCOUNT CODES WITH   POSITIVE VERIFICATION  Specific account codes can be assigned by station  users to specific types of calls  The account codes  are used by the system to identify calls by category  or  special grouping  for call recording purposes  All calls  with the same account code will be reported together  by the station message detail accounting feature   The system may be programmed to verify the user  entered account code and sound an          tone if it is  incorrect  The syste
70.  cruor ect e        dte cepe To qt qu du etx e ce nagd od  3 18  External Paging Interface         Port                                            3 19  Data    Device Connections  sis 50    Te uS           date ie ee ete tus te Ga reo a Ye Us ga edu            md vs  3 20  M  sic  Interface  aie at EXER                                                hee ee         3 22   SECTION 3 ADD ON EXPANSION MODULES                                3 23                            ca ck et nae    each            aS Ra aa eg a ea ak a a te ea ties ae          ta                  3 23  Installation       A AA                                         3 26   SECTION 4 SOFTWARE CARTRIDGE                                     3 27  Introduction    sm te Al RA S dois                               d        eR  3 27  Installation    aute              ob ce rage        egt a att ettet             Hg ed MO  EUR CS             ads                3 27   SECTION 5 DATA COMMUNICATIONS WITH THE DIGITALTELEPHONE SYSTEM            3 29  Equipment  Required   31399 wx nt auc e             are Ee cfe  3 29  Connections           D  3 29  Communications Procedures                                                3 29   SECTION 6 SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND FAILURE ISOLATION            fede es        3 31  Initial Candian  nia easdem m        Ee e Ren ede e nea                      od                 dedere  3 31  Checkout  o nhe xta estes nte n                aes a            de us etes ted             3 3 1  Resistance  
71.  device through the auxiliary jack  The auxiliary jack is an source of audio  output from the telephone and is not designed to receive signals or power from an external device  or a telephone line  Do not connect the output of an external device or the tip and ring leads of a  telephone line to the auxiliary jack       not connect any devices other than those mentioned in  the telephone users guide to the auxiliary jack     With this software release  the DigiTech digital telephone system provides support for the  Comdial proprietary single line digital telephone  product code     7701X      The system  automatically recognizes the 7701 X    telephone when the installer connects it to a station          This means that the system programmer does not have to take any special programming steps to  allow the 7701X    telephone to operate  He or she can use any of the station programming  described in the system manual provided with the telephone system to adjust the parameters of   the station port as they are needed  Publication GCA70 232  Proprietary Single Line Telephone  Users Guide provides complete instructions for using the 7701       telephone            91    FEATURE     upport for   xecuMall voice  processing system    BENEFIT    With software release 1 la  the  DigiTech digital telephone system supports the use of the   ExecuMail voice processing system connected to the system   s station ports through the Comdial  ATI D analog terminal interface  The ATI D is a multi
72.  device unless the  line has been programmed to be non private     AUXILIARY RINGER INTERFACE  The auxiliary ringer interface provides    dry contact     relay closures which track the ringing pattern    2 2    1  166 083    activated when station        17 rings or when ringing is  sent to the paging port     When programmed for station port 1 7 ringing  an  external device is often used to provide loud ringing   When programmed for paging port ringing  an external  paging amplifier is usually employed  The system  supplies ringing tones to the paging port along with the  relay closures  The ringing tones can be sent to the  input of an external paging amplifier  The relay   closures can be employed to energize the paging  amplifier while the ringing tone is being sent to it     System class of service programming is used to  choose either the paging port  or station port 17 for the  ringing port relay control  System class of service also  determines the type of ringing sent to the paging port   Station class of service programming determines the  type of ringing sent to station port 17  Also refer to the  discussions titled  Common Audible Ringer Interface  and External Paging Interface     BACKGROUND MUSIC EXTERNAL  MUSIC SOURCE RE6 UIRED    If an external music source is provided  background  music can be            on and off at individual stations   The loudness of the background music is adjusted with  the call monitor speaker volume control  and the  background music
73.  dial the last Caller ID number displayed at a station   by using a preprogrammed SAVE recovery button  Because you can store the local area code   and up to 100 local office codes  ten digit Caller ID numbers can automatically be transformed   into a dialable format  seven   eight  and eleven digit Caller ID numbers are already     dialable and  do not need to be transformed          TAB 099 DigiTech System Software Enhancements    FEATURE BENEFITS       ler ID  cont   INSTALLATION NOTES  All Caller ID features require the delivery of Caller ID data to the input Port B  This port must be  configured to match the output of the Caller ID decoder device  The recommended configuration  is 9600 baud  with eight data bits and one stop bit  You can configure the port either from the  terminal Class of Service programming menus  or from station 10 or 12     You have the option to provide Caller ID Distribution through the RS 232 port  Port B   over which  SMDR information is delivered  Caller ID Distribution is in the form of messages which specify    the Caller ID data for lines with incoming calls  and identify the stations answering such lines   The data is in ASCII  formatted for use with PC based application programs     Figure 1 shows system configuration  Figure 2 illustrates the Printer to Port B connection     To C  0            Cross Connects           Lines to Common  Equipment                 Modular Cord    To 120V AC Customer   Outlet Supplied  Cable DigiTech  CommonEq
74.  e NETES                     j 1         2  L    13 OPTIONAL NON KEY  a      SYSTEM TELEPHONE   ICE OR DATA  DEVICE   NO A LEAD  CONTROL REQUIRED         Figure 3 8  Auxiliary Interface Connections    3 16           66 083    COMMON AUDIBLE AND AUXILIARY  RINGINGINTERFACE    Relay closure dry contact points are available for controlling  external audible equipment  These contact closures track  the pattern of the ringing   The contacts are closed during  the ringing period and are open during the silent period  A    Installa     Selected Ports    The station 17 audible terminals provide a dry contact relay  closure whenever ringing is sent to a programmable  destination  Class of service programming is used to  choose either the paging port or station port 17 as the  ringing destination  Refer to page 4 13 for details     lypical common audible connection is illustrated on Figure  3 9 below  When programmed      station port 17 ringing  an external  device is often used to provide loud ringing similar to the  CAUTION common audible arrangement shown in Figure 3 8     Do not exceed a 1 amp at 24 volts  0 5 amp at 48  volts  load on these control terminals  If the  load requirements exceed this limit  connect the  load through an external slave                      CONNECT THESE CONTROL TERMINALS    DIRECTLY TO THE 117VAC LINE   Outside Lines    e              audible terminals provide    dry contact closure  whenever any of the outside lines that are connected to  the common e
75.  end          0110121004 Wa SAS    280 99 INI     2       Press            7 4 6   for base level                                              RingingLinePreference  A ringing line   1  Dial 53   STATION FEATURES  Pont               PORT  ENTRY PORT ENTRY  Will automatically be answered when a  2  Dial O9   RING LINE PREF           station is taken off hook  3  Select station ports to be programmed  Ho       28        L         Station 10   57  Dial 10 e 57          a9           l      4  Dial    for next station feature            29               TAS e   a                1                   13            bo   ____ 36     152       bi     ix    Ja       23               5          og               25   14 1    i      EFAULT z NOT ASSIGNED    J                                       Service Observing  Selected stations   Assign Service Observing PORT   ENTRY   POR NTH    OF NTH  can be given the capability to monitor  in   1  Dial 53   STATION FEATURES          L    e m m F e R O  an un announced manner  an active call   2  Dial 10   SERVICE OBSERVE   Ho      do    44       at another station  Selected stations can   3  Select station ports to be programmed  H3            4   X    150 be arranged so that they cannot be     Station 10   57  Dial 10 57  HA    301        I                 observed  4  Dial    for next station feature  is                  Executive over j aid i         COTE           424  is automaticaly   28                            mode  uc ue ccm   I  enabled
76.  feature allows all software   ttributes for a line to be automatically  xchanged with those assigned to  mother line at a different line port  vithout physically re locating the lines  Y reprogramming any line attributes     VOTE  refer to page 3 4 for additional  discussion     3lock Programming  Features that  are assigned to a particular line can be  assigned to another line or to an entire           of lines with one programming  action       Select lines to match model line      Dial    and repeat steps 2 and 3 for next model line                     1  Dial 40   PRIVACY RELEASE    PORT  ENTRY   PORT  2  Select ie  ports to be non private 2 6     8                   119      Line port 1 14   Dial 01   14 or Press                11          Line port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or press B1  B2 5   1421 l  h    Line port 17 24   Dial 17   24 b           2     OR  z       hs   J23    Press HOLD then press Al     AS     1     116 24       Dial    for configuration mode   DEFAULT   ALL LINES PRIVATE                   Dial 41   ASSIGN LOGICAL PHYS      Select currently assigned line port number      PHYS LATCH         Line port 1 14   Dial 01     14 or Press     gt  Al4  Line port 15  18   Dial 15  16 or press B1  B2  Line port 17 24   Dial 17    24   OR   Press HOLD then press Al     8          Dial new line port number  01   24   line 1   24       LOG CAL LINE             Dial   to make assignment     Repeat steps 2  4 for another assignment      OR       Dial    for configuration
77.  features   System automatically returns to base level     Line Defautt         line configuration  features  described in the following  procedures  can be defaulted to a  standard set of values  These values  will provide satisfactory system  performance in a broad range of site  applications     1  Dial 31   DISABLE LINES    2  Select line ports to be disabled    LED On   Disabled     Line port 1 14   Dial 01   14 orPress Al   Al 4    Line port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or press B1  B2   Line port 17 24   Dial 17   24    OR   Press HOLD then press Al     A8     3  Dial       for configuration mode     LI ne Disable  A line port can be taken  out of service because of defect or   other reason  Retum the line to service    with the central office lines   programming   procedure          EFAULT   NO LINES DISABLED    Press SPKR to end     WL GA Us         580 99 INI    Cl b                                               Press ITCM     7 4 6   for base level         3      Co  Auxillary Lines  A line port can be 1  Dial 32   AUXILIARY LINES               1            PORTIENTRY                        sonditioned to serve as a port for an 2  Select line ports to be disabled      xternal paging amplifier   LED On   Disabled   2   1   119    H9    Line port I 14   Dial 01   14 or Press Al        4    Line port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or press B1  B2 5    Line port 17 24   Dial 17   24 6     OR  z  Press HOLD then press Al     6   lg    3  Dial    for configuration mode  D  Central Off Ice
78.  from the calling  telephone  Only one DISD line is serviced at a time   therefore  an incoming call could ring for more than the  programmed number of rings if a DISD call is being  serviced when a second DISD call is received     When a valid extension number is dialed  a   confirmation tone is sounded  the system attempts a  transfer  and the called station rings if it is idle  If a  called station does not answer within the transfer recall  timeout period  the call is returned to DISD dial tone  If  the called station has the call forward feature set  the  forwarded station rings  If a called station is busy  the  call is placed on hold and camped on at the busy  station  If the camp cm is not answered within the  transfer recall timeout period  a busy tone is given  followed by DISD dial tone  The system will return the  caller to DISD dial tone two additional times and then  drop the line  a total of three attempts are made      NOTE  If the busy called station is part of a hunt group   the DISD call is muted to an idle station in the hunt  group     no idle stations are found  the call is  camped on at the dialed station  The hunt group is  not followed in the case of a ring no answer  RNA      If an invalid extension number is dialed  an error tone is  sounded before the DISD dial tone is returned        mistake in dialing is made  the caller can dial a S for a  new DISD dial tone  The system will retum the caller to  DISD dial tone two additional times and then drop 
79.  line groups 1   4     Dial     0 2     Dial 01     99 to chose storage location         Press        for intercom line     Dial  to clear current entry        y 6  Dial the number to be stored  32 digits maximum                         Choose line to be used          Press HOLD to store pause     required      Dial 90 for no line assignment  system will    choose last line used at calling station or prime     Press        to store flash  if required    line if one is assigned to calling station   7  Press TRANS CONF to save number     ee buttons              for lines 1 14 or dial 01   8  Repeat steps 3   7 to store next number     9  Press MNTR  SPKR  to end     NIGHT TRANSFER  of ringing     The day  or normal  ringing assignments of incoming 3  Press Al  top  left hand programmable button  to  lines can be transferred to a particular station or toggle feature on or off  Associated light will turn  stations  these line station ringing assignments are on when night transfer is active and turn off when it  chosen through class of service programming  for is inactive    off hour or special purpose answering  Additionally  OR   stations can be arranged through class of service     Dial 1 to enable  Al LED turns          programming  to be able to answer any ringing outside   Dial 2 to disable  Al LED turns off      line  This line answer from any station action  is also  enabled with the night transfer  of ringing        HIR  SFR i             1  Press         NOTE     this fe
80.  line to department     Selectlon 10  Exclusive hold       Selection 11  Voice mail line ID  Specifies  identification number of a particular line to the voice  mail accessory for personalized call coverage       Selection 12  DISD assignment  Assigns DISD to  lines and specifies calling characteristics of them     tation C O 5  Programming     Set Up a Station  Using a Model Station     Assign Name to Station     Assign Station to Department     Assign Station to SOHVA Group     Line  Intercom Features     Ringing Assignment      Button Mapping  Toll Restriction Administration    Automatic Busy  RNA Call Forwarding  Miscellaneous Feature Programming    Return To Previous Menu    Enter Selection     STATION COS MENU SELECTION    In each station COS menu selection  after choosing  the feature  enter a station port number which is to be  assigned to it and enter line port    numbers where    prompted  Multiple station number entries are allowed      for some features as prompted       Selectlon 1  Set up a station  Using a model  station   program a group of stations to match the  programming of a model station        System Programming        Selectlon 2  Assign name to station    Selection 3  Assign station 10 department    Selectlon 4  Assign station to SOHVA groups       Selectlon 5  Line Intercom features    Prime Line  assign prime line  prime group   prime intercom  or clear all   Ringing Line Preference  enable or disable     Line Access Deny  enable or disable station 
81.  mode          BLOCKFD LINES      Dial 42   ELK PROGRAMMING      Select model line port  MODEL LINE XX               Line port 1 1 4   Press       Al 4    Line port 15  16   Press        B2    Line port 17 24   Press HOLD then press Al                          press buttons as detailed above                         Ul91SAS     OR   Dial       for configuration mode     Continued on next page  Press SPKR to em                 JJ            Press           7 46 x for base level    Press ITCM    7 4 6    for base level     FEATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD    Block Programming    continued  iu 42   BLK PROGRAMMING        Select model line port with keypad    MODEL LINE XX       Select line ports to be disabled   Line port 1   14   Press Al          Line Port 15  16   Press B1  B2   Line Port 17   24   Press HOLD then   press Al             Dial first line port in block  dial code as above      Dial       Dial last line port In block  dial code as above      Dial       Dial    for next model line     OR    Dial       for configuration mode     02 4      NOTE  The first  last and af fines    between will be block  programmed like the model line  To block program       individual line  select the first fine and last Hine     be  the same number  For example  01  024  02   programs line 02 he same as line 01 is programmed          Press SPKR to end             80 99 IINI    Table 4 1  CHARACTER DIALING CODES CHART      CHARI cope   CHAR   cope 1 C
82.  mode   DEFAULT   TONE 1    Press SPKR to end          JJ ir                                           DUIU    Afia    Press             746    for base level       roup Call Pickup  If a call rings to any  tation in a prearranged group  it can be  inswered at another station in that group  vhen that user dials a group pickup code     ntercom Hunt Group  Stations can be  inked together to form an intercom hunt  jroup  Calls to a busy station in a hunt  jroup will search the group for an idle  station to ring               1  Dial 53   STATION FEATURES   2  Dial 16     GRP  CALL PICKUP       0      3  Dial 0 for no group  a   OR                   4  Dial 1  4forgp  1  4  GROUP X      1  5  Select station ports to be programmed  15            Station 10   57  Dial 10    57  H6        6  Dial    for next group     OF hg        Dial    3    for next station feature  20         OR  o1   J   Dial          for configuration mode  22           NOTE  To remove station from group  assign it to group 0  2    25 _ ___ 41 __       1  Dial 53     STATION FEATURES      ENTRY         2  Dial 18          HUNT LINK   3  Select first linking station     Station 10   57  Dial 10   57   4  Select second linking station    Station 10   57  Dial 10 57   5  Disable a link  if desired  by linking  a station to itself   6  Dial    for another link   Example A  17 to 16  18 to 16 and 19 to 16   Example     16 to 17  17 to 18  and 18 to 16     OR   7  Dial       for next station feature    OR   Dial    
83.  not   disturb mode     all back busy feature on    System is awaiting  memory dial number   or key mapping entry  after location is specified    Override feature on     Warning tone    OHVA tone  ISD ringback tone    150 dial tone    MSD confirmation tone    NSD busy error tone    Three 80 msec  tone bursts  sounded once    140 msec tone burst  sounded twice every  1 5 sec     260 msec  tone burst  sounded once    80 msec  tone bursts sounded  continuously    Six 100 msec tone bursts  sounded for 1 5 sec     Dual 440 480 Hz tone  sounded 1 sec on 1 sec off    381 Hz tone sounded  continuously    Two 125 sec  bursts  of 381 Hz tone sounded once    Three 500 msec  bursts  of 381 Hz tone sounded once       LINE SELECT LIGHTS    Ringing         use your station       use other station    On hold your station    On hold other station    Exclusive hold    Steady off    Continuous flash   560 msec  on    560 msec  off     Steady on with wink off   2 3 sec  on 70 msec  off     Steady on    Winking with repeative off periods   winking rate    560 msec  off     Continuous winking   490 msec  on   70 msec  off     Steady on       do     eld call timeout your  station Flutter with repeative off periods     flutter rate   560 msec  off     Held call timeout other Continuous flutter  station  70 msec  on   70 msec  off     MESSAGE WAITING LIGHT        ontinuous msec  on    Message  Wafting as    560 msec  off     INTERCOM LIGHT        use your station Steady on with wink off   2 3 sec    
84.  office code band table  zone call band table or area code band   table are matched against entries in any call rate tables 2    33 and costed accordingly  This is the third priority level of costing for local calls and the  vel of for long distance calls  Call rate tables are also used to cost any calls that require special or extraordinary rates such as   i 800 555 1 212 or 1 900 976 nnnn  If a matching call rate table can not be found  calls are costed by call rate table 1  the table of last resort for   costing all calls          A maximum of 16 digits can be programmed into each call rate table          n programming a call rate table  select digits so that a particular dialed number or number group will be matched to a particular rate table  The  table with the best match to a dialed number is used by the system to cost the call        Since a dialed number must match all of the digits that are programmed into a table to be considered a match  a   character can be programmed  into the table In place of a specific character to serve as a    match anything  digit              dialed number does not match all of the digits programmed into any call rate table  the system costs the call with the values programmed into  the call rate table of last resort  table 1      6  DISCARD DIGITS    When the digital telephone system is installed behind a host system such as a PBX or CENTREX  access codes must be dialed before obtaining an  outside line dial tone  These access codes shou
85.  on at a telephone  Background music  when volume control     supplied  automatically turns off during calls  To tui music  off    Press ITCM      Press           e Dial  1  MNTR  SPKR  light will turn off     Dial    1  MNTR  SPKR  light will tum on     To turn music on     5 8           66 083    System Operation      CALL FORWARD    A station user can designate another station to be the  recipient of just the intercom calls and prime line calls  that are directed to the user s station or the recipient of  all calls that are directed to the user s station     CALL FORWARD  PERSONAL    To forward Intercom calls and prime line to  another telephone       Press ITCM       Dial    05       Dial extension number of telephone to which calls  are to be forwarded     To cancel intercom call and prime line forwarding       Press ITCM   e Dial   05     AUTOMATIC    To arrange for the system to call back when a  busy telephone becomes Idle       Make intercom call  Hear busy signal       Dial   6       Hang up  Calling telephone will ring when called  telephone becomes idle     To answer call back ring     CALL FORWARD  ALL    To forward all calls to another telephone   Press ITCM     Dial    5     Dial extension number of station to which calls are to  be forwarded     To cancel all call forward   Press ITCM     Dial  5     NOTE  For each intercom call received during call  forward  a ring reminder  short tone burst  will  be heard at the called station to remind the  user that calls
86.  ons on n  Tone       40424 40 4      Power Failure Transfer wo 9 9 3 9 5 5 3 4 4 4 4 3 4 4 4 s   s   s   s                  3 3 3 3 3    3           s            s   s   3       Prime Line Automatic 4 44 4 440404040404 4404044        404040474  O            Privacy    Designated Programmable Button _    e         Privacy Release Brokerage Service   s oor ee  Private Lines  Access Denied  474440 440404040404 4040440  4  40 4404 E 3 3 5  Programmable Direct Station Selection Busy Light Field         Programmable Buttons      eene  Pulse Tone Switchable mom om om      9 om s   9 o   n n n s   4404    1 3 1       4404    3    4 4 4    4                           1 5 1  Response Messaging      3       3               4 4 4 4 4 4           Remote Programming And Administration DID PTUS NC RE TENE REL ES ERES IQ INESSE aise UE 2  Ringing Line Preference         3    s 3 3 94                                                       s          s                                                Saved Number Redial                 Secure Off Hook Voice Announce    8    9                                                                                           s s s s s                           Off Hook Voice Announce Button    A MC MM EE ECCE ER ERIR RIRI EE RE PE EC  Secure Off Hook Voice Announce Groups DOE EM CREE        E MCA ETE E EE Et                 Self Diagnostics      Service Observing    Speakerphone Support Wr wound olas            Ter cas           Tun cus          caca  Vas 
87.  parameter set up     4  When computer screen displays a prompt for            ine  Repone         password  type     7 4 6  amp then press ENTER   If remote programming is being employed  the data na van main COS programming menu 10 be  parameters of the PC must match the modem            connected to it  The modem connected to the 5  From main menu  type 1 then press ENTER  This  common equipment must match the data causes system COS programming menu to be  parameters of it as well  displayed    NOTE  Remember  8 bit data is required for XMODEM 6  From system menu  make all selections necessary  protocol   f the common equipment is not now to perform class of service programming then  programmed to provide 8 bit         it will have retum to the main menu   to be re programmed from station 10  see 7        the main  meni  t                     4 then press ENTER   page      for details  before dala This causes load save menu to be displayed   communications can take place  The baud  rate to match the modem or the      should be 8  From load save menu  down load COS data from    set at the same time   Set the data communication parameters as follows       Press ALT P        Type 11 the press ENTER  This action selects  a baud rate of 9600 baud        Type 17 then press ENTER  This action selects  8 bit data        Type 18 the press ENTER  This action selects  one stop bit        Type 24 then press ENTER  This action saves  the data parameters     3  Set the terminal paramete
88.  print all records     Dial 7     delete SMDA records       Dial 0   for Departmental Call Distribution  DCD   report       Dial 8 to obtain the number of free records  remaining in the system       Dial 9 to abort printing   4  Press MNTR  SPKR  to end     SYSTEM ALARM REPORTING    The attendant can command the system to present  alarm codes on the station display  This feature is  available to any LCD speakerphone when provided for  by class of service programming     To display alarm codes       Press and hold    for 5 seconds  The following  status reports will be displayed      Station disconnected from station port for more  than five minutes  Month  day  station port  number  and station extension number are  shown    Display shows   Mo Da Pxx                   Communications difficulty between a station and  the common              The number of parity  errors  up to 256  and the affected station port  are shown    Display shows            PAR N Pxx        Data printer off  line   Display shows   PRINTER OFF LINE     After the information has been shown on the  display  the    disappears until another alarm  occurs     DIRECT INWARD STATION DIALING    The direct inward station dialing  DISD  feature allows  an external party to call an intercom station directly  without assistance by the attendant if the call is made  over a line programmed for that purpose     To make a DISD call from an outside telephone   1  Call is made on DISD line  Hear ringback tone     2  If c
89.  programmable autodial feature  Grouping can reserve  certain lines for certain clusters of stations as in a  tenant service arrangement  The assignment of line  groups frees station buttons normally used for line  selection thus making these buttons available for use  with a feature such as personal DSS BLF with  station to station messaging  Lines are placed in line  groups with the line class of service programming     LINE PRESELECTION    A line can be manually selected before lifting the  handset  for handsfree dialing  or after the handset is  lifted     LINE AND LINE GROUP QUEUING  With the line queuing feature  the station user can take  action that will place a station in a queue where it  awaits the availability of a line or line group  The  station is automatically signalled with five tone bursts  when the line is available to it for use  Each station can  queue one line at a time     MANUAL HOLD    A button activated feature at each station will place an  outside line on hold  Pressing the HOLD button holds  the call  provides a distinctive flash rate of the line  button indicator  and allows the user to access other  station features  The holding station or any other  station that has access to the line can retrieve the held  call     MEET ME ANSWER PAGE    Any station user can dial a special code number in  response to an all call or zone page and be connected  to the paging party in a private conversation      All call or  zone paging is provided to the station
90.  records  remaining in system   FREE RECS XXXXX       Dial 9 to abort printout   ABORT PRINT    3  Dial    for configuration mode        FAULT   NONE ASSIGNED    Press SPKR to end            66 083    SECTIO    System Programming    N 3    VIDEO DISPLAY TERMINAL PROGRAMMING    INTRODUCTION    The class of service can be programmed from a video  display terminal  VDT  instead of from the   programming station  The VDT that is used must be a  serial data  RS 232 type  asynchronous device      keyboard send receive  KSR  hard copy printer can be  used instead of a VDT if preferred     A personal computer  PC  can be employed if it will  run a communications software program which allows  it to emulate a data terminal device  DTE equipment    Many effective communications software programs  are available for this purpose  Any that can be   arranged to match the following data communications   parameters can be used      Full Duplex     XMODEM communication protocol  8 bit data  required     Regardless of the type of programming terminal  employed  it is connected to the common equipment  data port A  Refer to the Chapter 3  Section 2  paragraph tiled  DATA DEVICE CONNECTIONS for  complete connection details     VDT PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE  INTRODUCTION    The programming procedure is menu driven        A list of selections are presented for consideration  which differ in content and required response        Each selection  when responded to  either causes a  further breakdown of se
91.  replace any that may be assigned to the  station during normal  or day mode  operation  For  example  A station that has no other toll restriction  table assigned to it can be programmed to receive a  toll restriction table which will restrict everything but    2 17              Of System Features IMI66 083    local calls and will only take effect when the system is  placed in the night transfer  of ringing  mode    Therefore  even though toll calls can be made from this  station during daytime operation  no toll calls can be  made from it when the attendant programs the system  for nighttime operation using the night transfer of   ringing feature     NOTE This night mode toll restriction table  assignment should nor be confused with the  night transfer  of ringing  feature     Toll restriction class of service programming is used to  program the night mode toll restriction tables and to  assign them to the stations     TONE OR VOICE  SIGNALLING  INTERCOM   Intercom calls can be tone signalled or voice signalled  as desired     Programming determines the signalling method  employed as the primary method when an intercom  cal is made  The alternate method is available through  user action at the station  Intercom call progress is  marked by special tone signals  Also refer to the  paragraph titled  Intercom Call Progress Tones          system class of service programming determines  which type of intercom signalling is first option  signalling for the system     TRANSFER CONF
92.  when the service           e ee  observing feature is enabled        2        rvin o1        l                                               1  Dial 53     STAT ON FEATURES                             55         2 Dial29    UNOBSERVABLE  104 7        159     3  Select station ports to be programmed  25   hM      lx           Station 10   57  Dial 10    57   4  Dial    for next station feature    OR   Dial       for configuration          DEFAULT   NOT ASSIGNED         Press SPKR to end     o   lt   Q  M  3                 25    0  3        gt   5  a    Ad     Press             7 4 6    for base level   FEATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD    Automatic Hold  With this feature  nabled  pressing another line button  vhile already on a line call will  iutomatically place this existing call on  told        Automatic Hold For Intercom  With this  feature enabled  pressing another  intercom button or line button while  already on an intercom call will  automatical place this existing call on  hold     1  Dial 53     STATION FEATURES               ENTRY   PORT   ENTRY   PORT  ENTRY  TU          soto     3  Select station ports to be programmed  Hcet pea     Station 10   57  Dial 10   57        29    45       4  Dial    for next station feature  HA    30   141    OR  45            4             TO      i       H2          H8           8   134    041     H9    3   1511         13   i5       2             3 _ ____   o3   _  isa    J          z NOT ASSIG
93. 083    SUBDUED RINGING    When a station is busy on a call and another call  comes to the same station  the ringing of the second  call will automatically be subdued to a lower volume     SYSTEM ALARM REPORTS  The system can be arranged to report alarm and status  conditions to a particular station or stations that have  been enabled to receive them  The station must be an  LCD speakerphone for this feature to be used  When  enabled to receive alarms  the station user can take  appropriate action to cause the alarm codes to be  presented on the LCD display  System and station  class of service programming are used to enable this  feature     SYSTEM SPEED DIAL   Ninety nine system wide speed dial numbers are  provided  The system speed dial numbers can be up  to thirty two digits in length  and can include numbers     5  55  pauses  and flash signals  System speed dial  numbers are programmed at station 10 or 12 for use at  every station in the system  No class of service is  required     TANDEM ATTENDANT    When the tandem attendant feature is enabled  a recall  from an unanswered call transfer or a timed hold recall  will ring at the normal attendant station  station 10  that  set the transfer or hold condition  and also at the  tandem attendant station  station 12   System class of  service programming is used to enable the tandem  attendant mode     TAP  FLASH  RECALL    When host system custom calling features are  available via a hookflash signal  the system can be  prog
94. 10    57      When assigning extension numbers  enter station port  or department number then make extension number  entry     e Selection 3   System timing  system timing  requirements     Recall          Time      Pause Time      Timed Hold Recall Time     Transfer Recall Time           Park Recall Time     Extended DTMF Dialing Tones    4 87           66 083    Selection 4  Load Save COS         on cassette  tape and the transfer of this data through remote  programming     Selection 5   Serial communication parameters  for  data port A and data port B     Selection 6  COS data printout  Selection 7  Set clock date time     Selection 8  SMDA programming  Configures the  Station Message Detailed Accounting feature  Also  refer to page 4 59 for an explaination of call costing  and SMDA reporting    Assign Area Codes   Prefixes to Bands  Enter band number O 7  enter 0 for no band  or  enter area codes or prefixes as 200 999   Set Dial Time Limit  non costed time allowed for  dialing to take place in    0 min   Set Answer Time Limlt  non costed time allowed  for call to ring and be answered in      0 min   Define Department Numbers  Calls can be  costed on a department basis by department  basis    Assign Stations to Departments  for costing by  department   Set Account Codes  Calls can be identified by  account code for costing by catagory      Clear Account Codes    Enable Account Codes Wiih Verify  User  account code entry is compared with  programmed account code      Enab
95. 10   57  Dial 10    57   8  Dial    to program next department termination  station     OR   Dial       for next station feature    OR   Dial          for configuration mode     1  Dial 53   STATION FEATURES   2  Dial 20   AUDIBLE MONITOR    3  Dial 1 for no audible monitoring     NONE    4  Dial 2 for direct ring   monitoring   DIRECT RING    5  Dial 3 for delayed ring   monitoring   DELAYED RING    6  Select stations for programming        Station 10   57  Dial 10   57   7  Dial    next monitoring condition     OR    Dial       for next station feature     OR    Dial          for configuration mode     REFERENCE RECORD    Press SPKR to end        580 99 INI                       ue1sAS              Press ITCM     7 46    for base level   FEATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFEREN       all Forward On Busy Ring     No 1  Dial 53   STATION FEATURES             PORT   ENTRY  Answer  RNA   Call forwarding of busy    2  Dial 21   CALL FWD RNA    and ring no answer calls to a particular 13  Dial O   9 for 0    9 rings before forwarding    Station can be automatic  As such  it  RING  X    Sends those calls to any idle station 4  Select stations for which calls will be    associated either by intercom hunt group   forwarded after selected number of rings   or by department with the called station    Station 10   57  Dial 10   57     se this jest        calls    5  Dial         additional station ring assigments   Cycle rapidly through such associated OR     statio
96. 100         10      4 DIGITECH A11   REV   OR HIGHER     PROGRAMMING    5 OVERLAY Al2    A13    B4           66 083    System Operation                  5  SYSTEMOPERATINGPROCEDURES    SECTION 1  STATION OPERATION    ANSWERING CALLS    ANSWERING OUTSIDE CALLS  If the ringing line appears at your telephone       Press line button of ringing line  line button with  flashing light      Lift handset     NOTE  If a prime line is assigned and is ringing  or if  ringing line preference is enabled  pressing the  line button of the ringing line is nut necessary     ANSWERING INTERCOM CALLS    To answer a voice call      Speak toward the telephone      Lii handset if privacy is desired    NOTE  Voice calling can be blocked  See the  discussion titled  Voice Announce Blocking for  details    To answer a tone call      Lift handset to talk     To respond in a non verbal manner       Press preprogrammed response message  programmable button to cause a set message to  appear in display of announcing station  if it is an  LCD speakerphone   This action also disconnects  the announcing station     CALL PICKUP ANSWERING   DIRECT   To answer a call that Is ringing at another  telephone      Lii handset      Press ITCM        Dial   4      Dial extension number of ringing telephone     GROUP    To answer a call that Isringing at anystationin  your pick up group      Lii handset      Press ITCM        Dial  4     STATION MONITORING   With station monitoring enabled  a call ringing at a  monitore
97. 14      Enter Y to prompt    Change Deletes All Verify Account Codes      Are you sure you want to do this  Y N        Enter account code length to verify  3     16 digits    this number must be less than or  equal 10 maximum account code length    set emergency numbers  which will not require account codes for dialing      Enter 1 5  If there are already three emergency numbers stored  system will respond   Table    Full     in which case you will need to clear emergency numbers before  entering a new number    see below       Type in the emergency number  1     12 digits     clear previously stored emergency numbers     Enter 1 6  If there are no emergency numbers already stored  system will respond   Table 15 Empty        Type in the emergency number to be cleared  1   12 digits     DigiTech System Software Enhancements TAB 099    FEATURE BENEFITS  Account VDT COS PROGRAMMING  cont      Codes  cont      To display a list of stored emergency numbers     Enter 1 7  if there are no emergency numbers already stored  the system will respond     Table is Empty        To return to the previous menu during programming     Enter 18    To print out all information pertaining to account code programming     Enter COS programming    Enter 1 for System COS      Enter 6 for COS Data Printout    Enter 7 for Toll Restriction Data Printout  the system will print the status of the  following   parameters     Verified Non Verified   Account Code Length   Verified Account Code Length   Accoun
98. 14  5 16  7 1819                     0 RINGS    190 Incoming Ring   Continued    2150 Ass st Statlon  When extension  lumber dialing is not completed within       programmed dial time limit  the call  s routed to the DISD assist station     Dial   then assign line pork to ring number   Line port 1  14   Dial 01 14 or Press                Line port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or Press       B2  Line port 17   24   Dial 17   24   OR   Press HOLD then press Al   A8      Press    and repeat steps 2 and 3    for further DISD ring assignment    OR   Press 3k 3  for configuration mode       Dial 46   DISD ASSIST      Choose operating mode to be programmed      Dial   or press         normal mode    OR     Dial    2 or press   2   night transfer   of ringing  mode   DISD ASSIST NITE     Select assist station     Dial 00 for no station  line drops after timeout     OR      Dial IO     67 to select DISD assist station     LED On   lines assigned to assist station       Dial   then assign line ports to assist station   Line port 1     14   Dial 01 14 or Press Al         Line port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or Press B1  B2  Line port 17    24   Dial 17   24    OR   Press HOLD then press Al     8    Press    and repeat steps 2 and 3  for further assist station programming    OR   Press       for configuration mode      DISD ASSIST DAY X        Press SPKR to end                              ueis  s       80 99 INI               ANALOGTERMINALINTERFACE    he Analog Terminal Interface         device is a
99. 14 on the next page  available at two modular jacks  When facing the jack    openings  lines 1 and 2 are provided by the jack on    Th faul j f th li  B  MPH eae or Me pangad Mies      the right and lines 3 and 4 are provided by the jack on    stations begin with the next higher line or station port    number from that provided by the host base unit  The the left  Line connections are detailed in Table 3 5   numbering continues sequentially from top module to below    bottom module if two modules are installed  For The station connections are available at a 50 pin  example  The defaulted 8 line  16 station base unit connector  Table 3 6 detail these station connections     Table 3 5  Line Connections    408 Expansion Module         INE JACK  PIN         CONNECTION TELEPHONE NUMBER  Line 2M           EON                2 2     2          e 53    3                  4                        5 ___                      1j    6   NoConnection ___         J         1  Noc                     a  _ 3 ___                   a be fe    5      E         Line 4M TIP  Line 3M TIP  Line 3M RING             3 23    Installation IMI 66 083       4 LINE   amp STATION BASE UNIT 24 PORT SYSTEM   amp LINES AND 16 STATIONS   BASE UNIT PLUS ONE EXPANSION MODULE     36          SYSTEM  12 LINES AND PI STATIONS   BASE UNIT PLUS ONE EXPANSION MODULE         amp LINE  I amp STATION BASE UNIT    48 PORT SYSTEM  16 LINES AND 32 STATIONS     BASE UNIT PLUS  TWO EXPENSION MODULES     naossngs ODBDD  oo     
100. 4           66 083             Line Connections                  3 5  3 6  3 12  Line Connections   408 Expansion Module          3 23  Line COS Menu Selections                  4 88  Line Default                         4 4  Line Disable       i rm sce                      4 14  Line  Group  Access les sese Hoan  5 2  Line Group Button                       4 47  Line Group Queue Button                   4 48  bine        sau                Re Rees 2 12  4 16  Line Monitoring                          5 6  Line               oss a Vane      4 15                                 ouo ere               2 12  Line  Selects Lights    nn                      tah 5 25  Line To Line Port Reassignment               4 19  Location Of Keys On Telephone Faceplate          449  M  Main Menu Selections                     4 87  aiftenance                eue qui   6 1  aking                               er ska che  5 2  anal Hold                         2 12  5 4  anual  Scope 2            RR i 2  apping           ic ek eee    ae ke 4 44  aster   leat                                      4 3  eet Me Answer Page                   2 12  5 7  emory Retention Without Batteries      0   2 12  enu Descriptions                      4 87  essage                                        4 26  essage                                2 12  essage Waiting Control                   5 5  essage Waiting 10402                   5 26  554010090            ihe Sv arid             5 5  essaging  LCD              
101. 4 to clear the entire system  System  and speed dial numbers  returns to normal operation mode automatically        580 99 INI                           Ul9 SAS    dd    SYSTEM DEFAULTS    e Mark the desired selections in the charts to record programming needs     e Dial the feature code and then dial the selection code or press the programming button to program the selection   NOTE  A current program setting is indicated by a lighted LE D next to the programming button for that selection  When a toggle  on off  action    is provided by a sing e button  the lighted LED indicates an active feature     FEATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD    Base Level  The first step in any  programming sequence is to enter the  base level  Once in this mode  any  desired configuration can be set     System Default  The system  configuration features can be  defaulted to factory settings  These  values will provide satisfactory system  performance in a broad range of site  applications     Line Default  The line configuration  features can be defaulted to factory  settings  These values will provide  satisfactory system performance in a  broad range of site applications     Statlon Default  The station  configuration features can be  defaulted to factory settings  These  values will provide satisfactory system  performance in a broad range of site  applications     Press        Dial     746      CONFIG  MODE      Dial 10     SYSTEM DEFAULT     Press   to defaul
102. 44   data port B  on station connector block   SIG  PORT A PORT B  TD  TERMINAL 37 TERMINAL 41  RD  TERMINAL 38 TERMINAL 42  CTS   TERMINAL 39 TERMINAL 43  SG  TERMINAL 40 TERMINAL 44    16 Line  32 Station Base Unit    Q Special modular jacks are available as data ports  SIG JACK CONN   None  CTS  RD    3 20           E  5  03033N SY 391A30 01 3100H                                   2 303 WNOIS S12              539I A30 VIVO INOS 72                      JO        H3H113 LY SW310N 32NVISIQ                                 SAINVISIO 530071  1333 008 01    QALIWI ATWOIIdAL LOA HO H3lNIHd        1    18  2     1N3MdInb3 NONNOD                 391510               I                  SUNG         Y1YG  IYOldAL         f       2  95       vivi                              ae              77      NM              7   LIN    NOLIVIS 91                    LINN S5VE_NOLLVLS 8                                                     121041 721 6 e1nD14       SLHOd VIVO XOCH YOLIGNNOD NOTIVIS    Qooo                                           51  NOI LO3NNO2 ON     SXOYr 30        1             12    89   2   95    mw    v 1404        8 1  04 Viva        5         5       LINN 3Sv8   011  15 2    3N1 1 90    4404 VIVO NOV  Hv INGOW                                   H03 NMOHS                   1                01            WoIldAL    TIYNINYAL                           000006900006066       IMI 66 083             32vau3iN                        Viva TWOIdAL       1009 Vivo        5   OL    33v 3
103. 57     code to same zone or to program next zone  Le  10  Dial       for next SMDA feature      OR   Dial          for configuration mode            Area Code Band Table  Long Distance   1  Dial 75   SMDA PROGRAMMING      Calls   Long distance calls that do not   Dial 0110 program      match entries in zone       band tables an costing bands     COSTING BANDS   E  matched against seven different area   Dial 2 to program E   code band tables  Program the cost area code bands   AREA CODE BANDS         values for area code band tables in call   Dial 0 if no band is         rate tables 11   17        5    Dial 1     7 for bands 1   7   BAND X      Dial 200   999 to as   gn area code     Dial   and repeat step 8 for additional code     Dial    and repeat steps 3 6 to program next band    Dial       for next SMDA feature      OR   Dial         for configuration mode       Press SPKR to end          80 99 INI                         WAISAS    07         Press            7 4 6   for base level                      2           Sa    Call Costing Tables  Local And Long   1  Dial 76   CALL COST        CALL COSTING RECORDING TABLES  Distance Calls   Local calls and long 2  Dial table number  01   33   SHOWN ON NEXT PAGES   distance calls that do not match entries ir  CALL COST TBL XX    any exception table  office code band 3  Dial 1 to enter matching digits  EXAMPLE TABLE         zone call band table or area code                     cua o           table are matched against entries ir N
104. 7       Dial    when all station ports are selected      OR   Dial      for next station line feature    OR    Dial          for configuration mode     530 99                   STATION LINE RECORD ON PAGE 4 40  EFAULT z NONE ASSIGNED                         Wa SAS    Press SPKR to                   66 083    System Programming    STATION LINE CONFIGURATION RECORD     Write applicable        port numbers for each station feature           92u919j91g  eur              pejueg                                  jo                            Bubuy                                               woa                                       l b t    Press ITCM    7 46    for base level        EATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLA REFERENCE RECORD    Jon Square System  Every SEE CHART ON PAGE 4  49                         buttons at each digital  tations can be assigned individually  mapped  to select any line assigned to  hat station or to provide other functions   These buttons can be assigned as direct  station select  DSS  buttons to provide         access to system stations or  issigned as idle to provide autodial  duttons for station the user  Idle buttons  31  B2  and B3 or A14  A15 and A16  serve as dynamic line buttons  These  duttons allow the system to temporarily  assign a line appearance to a station  vhich normally does not have that line  assigned to it  That line will appear at a  dynamic line button  While the line is in  appearance there  any normal call  Yand
105. 7   4  Press SPKR to end     AUTOMATIC ATTENDANT  Optlon     With the automatic attendant feature  the ExecuMail system automatically answers any line that is  ringing at a voice mail port  As a default  the system automatically enables ringing line   preference for any port the programmer identifies as voice mail ports  The programmer must  choose a ringing assignment for the lines assigned to the voice mail port before the ExecuMail  system can provide the automatic attendant feature     To program this feature  press             7 4 6  then do the following steps     Direct Ringing    1  Dial 64   STALINE CONFIG   2  Dial 1   DIRECT RING    3  Select line ports for direct ringing     line port 1 14   Dial 01  140rpressAl   A14     line port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or press B1  B2     line port 17    24   Dial 17    24        press HOLD then press Al           4  Dial   when all line ports are selected     Continued on next                FEATURE    Support for  ExecuMall volce  processing system     continued          091                    5  Select station ports to be programmed   station 1 1 57   dial 11   57    6  Dial    when all station ports are selected    7  Dial       for next station line ringing assignment  or press SPKR to end     Delayed Ringing    1  Dial 54   STALINE CONFIG    2  Dial 2     DELAY RING    3  Select line ports for delayed ringing     line port 1 14   Dial 01   14 or press      A14   s line port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or press B1  B2      line port
106. ABLE 1 Deny  TABLE 2  Allow   11 1 1800    2 978       2 911  3 411 3  4    These values will provide satisfactory  System performance in a broad range of  site applications     REFERENCE RECORD       Press SPKR to end     280 99 IWI                         uiels  g                 746   for base level        EATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD       oll Table Entry  1  Dial 71     TOLL TABLE    TOLL        RECORD iNcLUDbED AT END     2  Dial 01   16 or Press       A14  B1  B2                     for toll table 1     16   XXXXX TABLE Y      Dial 5 or Press Al to establish an allow toll table      LED on   allow   ALLOW TABLE Y     OR   Dial 6 or Press   2 to establish a deny toll table    A2 LED on   deny   DENY TABLE Y      Dial 1 4 or Press   8  A9  A10       for entry  number 1   4                   Dial      clear current entry     Dial keypad digits  0   9     to enter numbers    XXXXXX        Dial    for next entry and repeat steps 4   6 until  all table restrictions are entered     Dial       for next table and repeat steps 2     7  until all tables are entered     Dial 3k       for configuration mode                  Rsslgn Toll Table To Line  1  Dial 72     ASSIGN TOLL LINE     2   Dial 01   16 or Press Al   A14  B1  B2  for toll table 1   16   3  Dial   to finish entry and display lines   4  Select line ports     Line port 1 1 8   Dial 01   14 or Press Al   Al 4    Line port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or Press B1  B2      Line port 17 24  
107. BUTTONS    Through class of service programming  certain idle line  buttons can be arranged to serve as dynamic line  buttons  This feature allows the system to temporarily  assign a line to a station that normally does not have  the line assigned to it  and have that line appear on a  dynamic line button  While the call is appearing on the  dynamic line button  LED on   any normal call handling    2 9              Of System Features IMI66 083    operations can be performed  Station class of service  programming allows certain buttons to be  programmed as dynamic line buttons    END TO END SIGNALLING  ON INTERCOM  After an intercom call has been established  the system  can continue to send dialing signals  DTMF tones   through the intercom path  This feature can be  performed from every station in the system  and is    used by peripherals such as voice mail equipment     END TO END SIGNALLING  ON LINES    After an outside call has been established  the system  can continue to send dialing signals  DTMF tones   through the telco network and have them received at  the distant end for inward call completion  bank by  phone  etc   This conventional  off hook dialing  feature can be performed from every station in the  system     EXCLUSIVE HOLD  Exclusive hold prohibits a held call from being  retrieved by any other station  The exclusive hold  condition also links the held call to the timed hold  recall timeout feature  After timeout  audible and visual  signalling will occur an
108. COMDIAL    DIGIT ECH    Digital Telephone System       System Manual           010 004 12           66 083 01  1 91       An    TABLE OF CONTENTS    CHAPTER 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW                                  SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION                                           SECTION 2 PUBLICATIONS                                                        Manual          ERE  RI ECT  Related  PubliGations       De sos eon      E RO                                                        doe    ROr x wo    SECTION 3 HARDWARE SUMMARY                                        Common Equipment Description                                              Station  Description A ri  devi dud Gadde AEA EAN                               Tete bei sd    SECTION 4 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS                                      CHAPTER 2 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMFEATURES                      Abandoned          Release  r i suom Rmo cec ce Rm ECKE ER RE            SM e Y             do  Access    Denied   e Ren x ours X o nec XS x                    Ye       Account    Code  Button                iis uS REA bg        UE osos der ed eee d bes  Account Codes Positive Verification                                              All Call Paging              AB eS cose Ga aa ete      ee                          eS  Area  PagingInt  riace                                  qe      qus te ewe eae                  ASSiSt BUON                        curd                  NIRE               tO ces cde ot  Automatic  Call Back 
109. CT  CODE X       Dial    for next SMDA feature    Account Code Display  As a feature for  users of LCD speakerphones aremindei   2   message can be programmed 10 appear  onthe station display to promptthe user  to enter an account code duringincominr  and or outgoing calls  The message  display time is programmable      OR   Dial       for configuration mode       Dial 75   SMDA PROGRAMMING     Dial 10   DISPLAY TIME XX       Dial 01 20 to display time in seconds     DISPLAY TIME YY        Dial for next SMDA feature       Dial 11 to program message disable    on incoming calls     XXXXXXX INCOMING         PressAlto toggle between enable and disable   LED On   Enabled     OR     Dial 1 to enable   ENABLE INCOMING     AI LED on      Dial 2 to disable    DISABLE INCOMING         Dial for next SMDA feature       Dial 12 to program message disable    on outgoing calls     XXXXXXX OUTGOING        PressAlto toggle between enable and disable   LED On   Enabled     OR     Dial 1 to enable     ENABLE OUTGOING     AI LED On       Dial 2 to disable   DISABLE OUTGOING       Dial    for next SMDA feature      OR   Dialxexforconfiguration mode           IVING CA NAR  DEFAULT   BOTH DISPLAYS  ENABLED FOR 5 SEC     Press SPKR to end           04121001                    80 99 IWI            PressiTCM     7 4            base Ever    EATURE                   DESCRIPTION     MR ODE AND PROMPTING DISPLA REFERENCE RECORD    itatlon Message Detall Accounting  SMDA  Printout  Call cost reports   wod
110. DO NOT DISTURB INHIBI  station can be set to a DND condition 2  Press Al to toggle between Enable and disable  which cannot be overridden by a  LED On   Enable   ake ENABLED  caller unless calling station is  OR     programmed for DND override  The Dial 1 to Enable  OND ENABLED    DND feature can be disabled by this  Al LED ON    programming  Dial 2 to Disable   DND DISABLED    NOTE  Also program a button as the         DND button  See page 4 44  3  Dial    for configuration mode        Press SPKR to  end                                                       80 99 INI          Press ITCM    7 4 6   for base level       EATURE DESCRIPTION   DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD    3tatlon Monitoring  The DSS BLF at   Dial 20     MONITOR                    i station provides idle  busy and line   Press Al to toggle between enable and disable Cg uon   inging status of monitored stations  If  LED On   Enable     he flashing BLF lights associated with          DEFAULT   DISABLED      fisual ring indication are deemed Dial 1 to Enable    MONITOR ENABLED      distracting  this visual indication can  Al LED ON          disabled system wide  Dial 2 to Disable   MONITOR DISABLED       Dial    for configuration mode     Call Park Recall Time  A call that is   Dial 22          RECALL X   CALL PARK RECAL  left in a parking orbit for a   Select recall time  1 1213        516               programmed length of time Program button LED On  lt  Selected Time  automatica
111. Dial 17   24   OR   Press HOLD then press Al             Dial  to clear current ID     Dial ID number  8 digit maximum      Dial    for further ID assignment      OR   Dial       for configuration mode        Press SPKR to end     530 99 INI    DULUWIEIDOY                 Press            7 4 6    for base level        EATURE DESCRIPTION     oice Mall Transfer on Busy  When   xecuMail is included with the system   a busy station may need to be alerted if  he ExecuMail system is attempting a         transfer to it instead of having the        automatically routed to a voice mail        This program feature allows     station  usually the attendant station  to       programmed for this option     Thru Dlaling ATh Connect external  telephony equipment to a station port  through the Analog Terminal Interface   ATI  device    With this programming feature enabled   DTMF signalling tones  generated by  the external equipment  pass through  the ATI device  the common equipment  and any line connection  This feature  is automatically enabled when the ATI  device is connected to the station port   It is used by connected equipment  such as the ExecuMail system or a  model 2500  industry standard  telephone  Disable this feature for  equipment such as rotary dial  telephones     ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY      Dial 53   STATION FEATURES          Dial 31   VMAIL XFR ON BSY      Select station ports to be programmed    Station ports 10   57  Dial 10   57    Dial    for next feature
112. Dial Time Limit  When extension  number dialing is not completed within  the programmed dial time limit     DISD         is routed to the assist station if one  is programmed  otherwise  the line is  dropped     DISD Incoming Rings  The number of  rings which occurs on a DISD line  before it is answered is programmable   Setting a large number of rings allows  time for a call to be serviced in a  regular manner by stations that have  line appearance for the DISD line if  such action is desired       Dial 44   DISD DIAL TIME X     Press program button to select dial time limit        Dial 1 or press       6 sec     Dial 2 or press A2  lt  9 sec   e Dial 3 or press        12 sec       Dial 4 or press A4   15 sec     3  Press    for configuration mode       Dial 45   DISD RINGS      Press program button to choose operating mode      Dial 1 or press Al    normal mode     Dial 2 or press A2   night transfer   of ringing  mode   DISD RNGS NITE X      DISD RINGS DAY X        Select rings to occur before line is answered       Dial 0 for no rings  This disables DISD for line      OR     Dial 1  9   rings 1   9   LED On   lines assigned to number of rings      Continued    ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD    Press        Dial     746       Hee           DEFAULT a 12 SEC          80 99 INI    UUIGIUJEJDOJg                 A     Press           746    for base level      EATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD    D INCOMING  RINGS _    oli 3
113. E  CONFIGURATION   A system can be programmed to be square or  non square as desired  In a square system  the line 1  buttons of all telephone stations select line 1  the line 2  buttons select line 2  etc  In a non square system   each line select button at every station may be  assigned individually to select any line  Button  mapping for line appearance can be performed on  each station using the station class of service  programming     STATION BY STATION PRIVACY  See the discussion titled  Automatic Privacy     STATION MESSAGE DETAIL  ACCOUNTING  SMDA     See the discussion titled  Call Costing and SMDA  Reporting     STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING   SMDR     The SMDR feature generates a call record for printing  as soon as the record is collected by the system  The  call record is presented at      W 232 level as ASCII  transmit data in      80 column format at the data port  available for that purpose  Refer to the discussion  titled        Costing and SMDA Reporting     STATION MONITORING WITH  DSS CALL PICKUP  The busy lamp field  BLF  of a station can provide  visual indication of the idle  busy  and ringing status of  monitored stations  Audible indication of direct and  delayed ringing can also be provided if visual ring  indication is enabled     A one button pickup of a ringing call at a monitored  station can be made at the monitoring station by  pressing the direct station selection  DSS  button  associated with the ringing station     The flashing BLF light
114. ERENCE BUTTON  A fixed button is provided that gives quick  easy  transferring and conferencing     UNANSWERED CALL   TRANSFER RECALL TIMING  A transferred call that is unanswered after a  pre programmed length of time will return to the  station that transferred ft  The system will return the  call to both attendant stations when the tandem  attendant feature is enabled  When LCD  speakerphones are employed  the display will show  the station number or name as well as the line number  that is being recalled  The system class of service    programming determines the recall time for an  unanswered call transfer  Refer to the discussion  tiled  Tandem Attendant     VOICE ANNOUNCE BLOCKING  This feature allows station users to block voice  announced intercom signalling by pressing a  programmable button programmed for that purpose   The programmable button used to block voice  signalling is enabled by station class of service  programming     VOICE MAIL TRANSFER ON BUSY    When using ExecuMail  a busy station may desire to  be alerted if ExecuMail is attempting to transfer a call  to that station  This feature allows a station to be  programmed for this option  With this option  when  ExecuMail tries to transfer a call to a station that is  busy on a        outside or intercom call  and the station  has an available intercom line  stations can be  programmed to have a second intercom   the intercom  will ring subdued  The call can be picked up by  pressing the button of the ring
115. G  ASSOCIATED  CALL RATE     TABLES  11 17          COST COST    COMPUTED COMPUTED   USING CAU USING ANY  RATETABLEOF MATCHED  LAST RESORT CALL RATE    TABLE 1    TABLE 2   33       Figure4 2 CallCostingDiagram  4 67    89 7    FEATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD    3ase Level  The first step in any Press            7 46     yogrammingsequence is to enter the           level  Once in this mode  any    Jesiredconfigurationcanbeset         xception Tables  Calls are first 1  Dial 78   EXCEPTION TBL     omparedto entries in the call cost 2  Dial 1  4for entry 1  4   ENTRYX         sxceptiontables to determine if a match   3  Dial 1 to assign the call rate table  So    E eR ru             anbe          ALL COST                    4  Dialo1  33forcall rate table number  LA d      tie         01       5  Dial x      8  Dial 2 to assign matching digits                                        7          clear currententry    8  Dial matching digits  16 max      match anything                                        9  Dial   for next entry  and repeat steps 2 9 unti   all entries are made   10  Dial for configuration mode     Offlce Code Band Tables  Local Calls    1  Dial 75   SMDA PROGRAMMING     Calls that do not match exception tables   Dial 01 to program   are measured for the number of digits costing bands     COSTING BANDS    dialed  Calls with numbersthatarehave   3  Dial 1 to program   less thantO digits  local calls  are office code bands    
116. Gheck  22 22 2222                                         n e      oy Eo            3 31  Voltage Check                        PEE             ad ama         09 31  General    Check                   Pee usn aoe GR doe  Be a he           3 31                      18                                               ele           me Rom RD                                          Ya       3 31   SECTION 7        RULES AND REGULATIONS                pub eee RUE        eae E 3 32   CHAPTER 4 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING              4 1   SECTION 1GENERAL INFORMATION                                     4     Programming Overlays                                                   4 1   SECTION 2 CLASS OF SERVICE PROGRAMMING                               4 2                                       ata Sect                 GS no uh        4 3  System Detaults              eoe eate                  adh       Ge            a        4 4  Systerm  Gonfig  rali  n                        esee dre me pupa Gea beso er aeg 4 5  Ling  C  nfiguration  o fede us Ve ose chew oh rnit    Rd dnd  4 14  Station  Configuration  isi Aa tcn                e                    ope      err pee doy Se e ec ay ec       4 22  Direct Inward Station Dialing                                                4 53  Analog Terminal Interface                                                  4 55  Toll Restriction Table Configuration                                             4 58  Data  Printer Service  ease e                     
117. HAR            I       i  NIN          Q          e                  LO        e o    9 i    STATION CONFIGURATION    lark the desired selections in the charts to record programming needs   Make copies of the pages to provide additional records if needed    Mditional records may be needed when add on expansion modules are employed to extend the station capacity of a base unit   Dial the feature         and then dial the selection code or press the programming button to program the selection    NOTE  A current program setting is indicated by a lighted LED next to the programming button for that selection    When a toggle  on off  action is    provided by    sing e button  the lighted LED indicates an active feature  When programming without    console  repeat the procedure to disable     fealure at a keypad selected station     Station port selection is made by dialing a selection number on the keypad per the following reference chart     STA KEYPAD BUTTONS  10 57 10 57    FEATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD    Base Level  The first step In any Press        Dial     746     programming sequence is to enter the   base level  Once in this mode  any   desired configuration can be set     Statlon Default  The station 1  Dial 50     STATION DEFAULT    configuration features  described in the 2  Dial 00 to default station ports system wide   following procedures  can be defaulted to  OR    a standard set of values  These values  3  Select station po
118. ION    A plug in module is required with the common  equipment base unit to provide the following functions        Operating System Software Control     Default Functional Program        Call Cost Storage For System Collected Records    Installing the software cartridge provides the operating  system software control of the digital telephone  system     All class of service data that is programmed into the  system is stored in the common equipment memory  and not in the software cartridge  therefore  no current  class of service programming is lost if the software  cartridge is replaced  Call cost records  however  are  stored in the software cartridge  If a new software  cartridge is exchanged for the one currently installed  in the common equipment cabinet  all call cost records  that are stored in the installed cartridge are lost   Because of this  be sure to obtain a print out of all call  cost records and then delete them from memory  before exchanging a new cartridge for the currently  installed one     INSTALLATION    The software cartridge plugs into the common  equipment base unit housing as shown in Figure 3 16     CAUTION  To avoid any chance of electrostatic  discharge damage to the software  cartridge  avoid touching the connector  with your fingers while handling it     Be sure to disconnect the AC power to the  base unit  also disconnect battery backup  power if it Is connected  before installing  or removing a software cartridge     To install a cartridge     
119. M     7 4 6    for base level        EATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD     MARK STATION LINE RECORD ON PAGE 4 40  DEFAULT        ORIG  RESTRICTIONS    zall Orlginatlon Denled  The ability to              calls on certain lines can be  denied to individual stations  The ability     answer incoming calls on these lines  5 still allowed     Idle Line Preference  With idle line  reference enabled  taking a station   gt ff hook will automatically connect it to  any assigned and idle line programmed       this purpose     1   2   3     4   5     6     Dial 54   STA LINE CONFIG    Dial 6     ORIGINATION DENY     Select line ports       Line port 1 14   Dial 01   14 or press Al         a Line port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or press B1  B2     Line port 17    24   Dial 17    24           Press HOLD then press Al     8   Dial   when all line ports are selected    Select station ports to be programmed     Station 10   57  Dial 10   57    Dial    when all station ports are selected     OR    Dial 3    for next station line feature     OR    Dial          for configuration mode       Dial 64   STALINE CONFIG      Dial 7   IDL E LINE PREF      Select line ports       Line port  14   Dial 01   14 or press Al              Line port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or press B1  B2       Line port 17   24   Dial 17   24   OR   Press HOLD then press Al   A8      Dial   when all line ports are selected     Select station ports to be programmed       Station 10   57  Dial 10   5
120. MKT 1  J Smith     Station Message Detall Accounting     SMDA  Printout  The attendant can  command the system to print several  different types of SMDA reports and to  delete all stored SMDA records     NOTE  The departmental call  distribution report reflects statistics  based on current departmental station  assignments  Before c ass of service  programming is used to reassign  Stations to different departments  it is a  good practice to   1  print the  departmental call report and any other  desired SMDA reports   2  make any  desired reassignements   3  delete all  SMDA records        Dial 06   STATION NAMES    2  Select station        to be programmed    XXXXXX       Station 10   57  Dial 10   57       Dial   to clear current station name     Refer to Table 4    page 4 21    and compose station name  7 digits max       Dial     two digit codes necessary to enter       new station name                  YYYYYYY     Dial    for next station and repeat steps 2 5     Dial       for configuration mode          Dial 07   SMDA REPORTS      Choose report for printout     Dial 1   for station     STATION REPORT        Dial 2   for trunk  TRUNK REPORT     Dial 3   for SMDA dept   DEPT  REPORT      Dial 4   for          cod amp  ACCOUNT REPORT      Dial 5   for auto              AUTO REPORT          Dial 6   for all records     PRINT RECORDS         Dial 7   to delete SMDA records    DELETE RECORDS        Dial 0   for DCD report  DCD REPORT       Dial 8 to obtain the number of free
121. Message Waiting ITCM   3  Ext   Cancel From Idle            3  Ext                  HOLD  Night Transfer ITCM     03           Attendant Station   on ITCM x  03 T    Personal Set Tone 1    4 ITCM     4  1   4   Ringing Tones    Pulse Tone Switching      __  ___ ___   1                              Programmed Buren    Redial   Programmed    Buttoni    Service Observing          03  Ext  Speed Dial                                           Sm       0   Redial  Last Dialed Number  C  Voice Announce  Bock    2    Block Unbbok 2 2    Zone Page  Zonet                  85           66 083              66 083    RINGER VOLUME CONTROL   Each station has a ringer volume control  Depending  upon the model  the ringer control is located on the  front edge  rear edge  or bottom of the telephone   Adjust the control lever to OFF  LOW or HIGH volume  as desired     STATUS INDICATORS AND TONE  SEQUENCES   The following pages describe the light and ring  patterns associated with system operation     NOTE  The values shown are typica  They are  provided for illustration purposes on y     System Operatisn  gt     DISPLAY INTENSITY   The intensity  brightness and contrast  of the liquid  crystal display readout  included on some digital  telephones  can be adjusted to a desired operating  level at any time that the telephone is idle and on hook     To adjust the display Intensity       Press and hold the MUTE button until the desired  intensity is achieved     5 21           66 083    System Ope
122. NAL   GREEN      15  30   PATH  RED    NELLOWBLUE   16               SIGNAL  GREEN          BLUE YELLOW  en            Q AT  ATE VIOLET    3 8    IM  66 083           66 083 Install    Table 34a  J1 Staion Connections   16 Line  32 Station Base Unit      25 PAIR CABLE CONNECTIONS   2          CONNECTIONS   STA  CONNECTIONS                                  BN Du      WHITE BLUE     26  1   SIGNAL   GREEN    1   2 PATH       2  9        SIGNAL   GREEN     ORANGE WHITE 4 PATH RED    WHITE GREEN       74 16 PATH                 aoa SIGNAL   GREEN              RED ORANGE  ORANGE RED       Fs  i   PATH RED   E     34  17   SIGNAL   GREEN   MEE  LBROWN RED                             735   19   SIGNAL   GREEN     BLACK BLUE 11    36   21 i  SIGNAL   GREEN    20   BLUE BLACK t 11 122   PATH   RED       BLACK ORANGE     37  23   SIGNAL   GREEN      ORANGE BLACK       12  24   PATH   RED      38  25   SIGNAL   GREEN      13  26   PATH  RED      39  27   SIGNAL   GREEN    FEROWWLACK    aa  128             RED    40 29    SIGNAL GREEN      SLATE BLACK __           BLUE YELLOW ___                     18 36      44  37      19  38       45  99         20  40       46  41   SPARE     21  42 _ PORTS   EET MEER E     48  45     CEE   denen        BROWN VIOLET    HEMOS     25         don    Table 3 46  J2 Statlon Connections   16 Line  32 Station Base Unit     STA  CONNECTIONS                      PA eris  Pam  Mi 5    LOCATON   WHITE BLUE 1   I        GREEN         BLUE WHITE  2   PATH       
123. ND   VALID ACCOUNT CODES   Account Code Length defines the number of digits that a user must enter before the system       accept the code  Account code length can range from 3 to 16 digits but may never be set lower  than the current Verified Account Code Length     Verified Account Code Length defines the number of digits that will be verified before a verified  account code will be accepted  As well  Verified Account Code Length defines the number of    2           099    FEATURE                  Jes  cont      DigiTech System Software Enhancements    BENEFITS    valid account codes that can be stored  as shown in the following table   Be aware that when you  change the Verified Account Code Length  the list of Valid Account Codes is emptied        ACCOUNT CODE MESSAGE DISPLAY TIME   When account codes are enabled  LCD telephones will prompt users with an  account code   message  which is cleared at the end of the programmable display time  If the account codes  are forced and the call is outgoing  then the line is dropped at the end of the display time if a valid  account code is not entered  Valid range for the display time is 1 to 20 seconds  If display  duration is ever set for zero seconds  time out for account code entry prior to the line being  dropped defaults to 5 seconds     ACCOUNT CODES AND EMERGENCY NUMBERS   When the Forced Account Codes feature is enabled  emergency numbers may be dialed without  account code entry  You may define up to three programmable em
124. NED      oR       gt                                                         1  Dial 53   STATION FEATURES     2  Dial 12   ITCM AUTO HOLD   3  Select station ports to be programmed       Station 10   57  Dial 10    57   4  Dial    for next station feature     OR    Dial 3k    for configuration mode              Press SPKR to end                                   CI     Press              7 4 6    for base level        EATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD               ieadset Interface  A station port can be   1  Dial 53     STATION FEATURES     Xnabled to allow headset operation  2  Dial 13     HEADSET MODE    3  Select station ports to be programmed       Station 10   57  Dial 10   57   4  Dial    for next station feature    OR    Dial       for configuration mode           Personal Ringing Tones  A station can   1  Dial 53   STATION FEATURES        programmed to ring in one of four 2  Dial 14   RINGING TONE    distinctive tones  3  Select ringing tone    1  666 571Hz   16 Hz warble   Dial 1 for tone 1     RINGING TONE 1   2  1000 800 Hz   18 Hz warble   Dial 2 for tone 2     RINGING          2    3  666 571Hz   23 Hz warble Dial 3 for tone 3     RINGING TONE 3      4 1000 800 Hz   23 Hz warble   Dial 4 for tone 4     RINGING TONE 4      4  Select station ports to be programmed      Station 10   57  Dial 10   57   5  Dial    for next ringing tone assignment    OR   Press       for next station feature    OR   Press          for configuration
125. NG TONE    This feature allows a station user to choose one of four  diierent ring tones to aid in distinguishing one ringing  station from another     POOLED LINE ACCESS   GROUP LINE ACCESS   Users can dial a special access code instead of  pushing a line button to access one of up to four  different groups of lines  Lines are arranged into  groups with the line class of service programming     POWER FAILURE TRANSFER  A power failure line connection is available for  connecting industry standard telephones such as     Comdial model 2500  The power fail telephone is  automatically connected directly to a certain line  whenever there is an AC power failure  Normal  origination and reception of calls on    power fail  station is possible during the power failure condition   The power fail stations will automatically disconnect as  soon as power is restored     PRIME LINE AUTOMATIC  If a station is programmed for prime line automatic  the  designated outside line  intercom line or line group will  be automatically selected when the handset is taken     uon Of System Features IMI66 083    off hook  Prime line pickup may be pre empted by   preselecting another line before lifting the handset  If  the prime line is ringing  it is automatically answered by  lifting the handset Prime line automatic is assigned tO  a station through station class of service programming     PRIVACY    DESIGNATED   PROGRAMMABLE BUTTON  Stations can be programmed to provide a privacy  button  If a line i
126. NOTE  Before installing a software cartridge into a  base unit  be sure the product code matches  the product code of the base unit  i e   place an  50408 cartridge into    GO408 base unit  place  an 50816 cartridge into     2081 6 base unit   and place an 51632 cartridge into    G 1632  base unit     1  Orient the cartidge so that the connector end is  toward the base unit opening and the removal  notch  located at the top rear of the cartridge  is  toward the front of the base unit     2  Insert the cartridge into the base unit cabinet with a  steady gentle pressure until it seats into place   Then  press the cartridge into place firmly to fully  mate the connections     To remove a cartridge     1  Place the bit of a flat blade screwdriver into the  removal notch  Lift up on the cartridge with the  screwdriver to un mate the connections     2  Slide the cartridge out of the base unit     3 27    1    66 083    Installation       TYPICAL  COMMON EQUIPMENT    BASE UNIT         SOFTWARE  CARTRIDGE   PUSH IN TO INSTALL          TYPICAL   COMMON EQUIPMENT   BASE UNIT SOFTWARE  CARTRIDGE   LIFT OUT TO REMOVE     Figure 3 16  Software Cartridge Installatlon and Removal    3 28           66 083    installtion    SECTION 5  DATA COMMUNICATIONS WITH THE  DIGITAL TELEPHONE SYSTEM    Arrange both station to trunk        station to station  data communications through the system stations   using a data device  a modem  and a data switch     EQUIPMENT REQUIRED      Any data device  such
127. ON   PROGRAMMABILITY OF FEATURES  Most digital communication system features can be  made available at programmable buttons by  programming the specific access codes necessary for  dialing the features  Programmable features include  those that can utilize lamp  on off  supervision     0    call park orbits   All feature access codes can be  stored  except for those requiring TRANS CONF  button action  Continuous strings of digits can be  stored  including         button presses  up to the  maximum amount of storable digits allowed in an  autodial entry  16      HANDSFREE ANSWER INHIBIT    The MUTE button on a station can be used to block all  handsfree answerback response  This arrangement  will prevent a station user from monitoring another  station site using the monitoring ability of the voice  announce feature  When the button is pressed  all  handsfree answerback is disabled thus inhibiting any  off site monitoring  The MNTR  SPKR  light will flash to  indicate that this feature is active  Also refer to the  discussion titled  Mute        HOLD AND I USE INDICATIONS    The light associated with a line button provides    visual  indication of the status of that line  When a station user  has a line in use or on hold at a station  the light  indication provided at that station is of a diierent flash  rate than the indication provided at the other stations   in the system  No class of service programming is  required     Description Of System Feat    IDLE LINE PREFERENCE   
128. ON TABLE  1                                                                               ____   218  2                    o            zs  sis  ss     E  S E IE E           RE           DE IS                                             RENNE             4  TABLE ASSIGNMENT  LINE                 STATIONS              n            ON  VD    OW DENY  ENTRY NUMBER  16 MAXIMUM     2     4                        12  vo 1418                                                                                    VE                      Lg gd d   TABLE ASSIGNMENT LINES STATIONS                                   7    ENTRY ENTRY NUMBER  16 MAXIMUM        TABLE ASSIGNMENT  LINES STATIONS    TOLL RESTRICTION TABLE 8  TYPE  ALLOW DENY    ENTRY ENTRY NUMBER  16 MAXIMUM               66 083    System Programming      Toll Restriction Programming Reference Tables   continued    OLL RESTRICTION TABLE  9  TYPE  ALLOW DENY    TABLE ASSIGNMENT  LINES STATIONS       TOLL RESTRICTION TABLE 10            ALLOW           ENTRY   ENTRY NUMBER 116 MAXIMUM             TOLLRESTRICTIONTABLE         1                 ALLOW                                  ENTRY     ENTRYNUMBER ISMAXMUM                                   porn                _ ENTRY NUMBER       4           7                     12 13 1  5 1  LL TIT                              EE           pps  CEF                                        m     5    TABLE ASSIGNMENT  LINE          FTOLERESTRICTIONTABLE         39     1           ALLOW DENY o     
129. OTE  Cal Cost Table 1 will not accept matching digits            rate tables 2     10 and 29   33 and 4  Dial  to clear previous digits ee E edo   sosted accordingly  Call rate tables are ea      7                   __                      also  us  d                         5  Dial matching digits for costed number  32 max  9          RATE           12051 20         ini   11 TIER 2RATE    the office code band tables  zone call     match anything digit      XXXXXXXX Ha SURCHARGE    band tables  area code band tables  and 6  Dial    to end matching digits   any calls that require special or 7  Dial 2 then dial 01    99 for Tier 1 time in    extraordinary rates  If a matching call tenths of minutes   TIER 1 TIME XX     rate table can not be found  calls are 8  Dial X    costed by call rate table 1  the table of 9  Dial 3 then dial 001    999 for Tier 1 rate in cents    last resort for costing all calls      TIER 1 RATE           10  Dial       11  Dial 4 then dial 001   999 for Tier 2 rate in cents    TIER 2 RATE XXX      Office code band tables z call rate tables 18   25   Zone        band tables   call rate tables 25     28   Area code band table   11   17     12  Dial       NOTE   Dialing    00 or a 000 as an entry   13  Dial 5 then dial 001  999 for surcharge rate in   in steps 7  9  11  and 13 will clear the cents     SURCHARGE XXX     current entry for those steps  14  Dial       to program next call cost table and  repeat steps 2 14 until all tables are entered    15  Di
130. OW table   5  Press the   button in place of a particular digit to condense a range of numbers into one entry  The   character is       match anything    digit  and can  be included in an entry in either a DENY table or an ALLOW table     Example A  If 357  377  387  and 397 dialing is to be prohibited  list one entry of 3 7 on    DENY table to cover them all      Example B  Since area codes typically have a 1 or a 0 as a middle digit  prevent long distance calls to those area codes by entering 1 1  and 1 0   in an DENY table   8  Since it is important that emergency numbers never be restricted  always create an allow table with entries of 911 and 1911 to override any DENY      tables that have been created     7   f the system is installed behind a PBX  include an access code as part of every table entry     RC b    FEATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY oda          AND PROMPTING DISPLAY    Base Level  The first step in any   ITCM Dial    7 4 6 X                                        is to enter the            level  Once in this mode  any   Jesiredconfiguration canbe set     System Default  Two toll restriction 1  Dial 70     DEFAULT TOLL    ables are defaulted with 2  Press      default toll tables   dre programmedvalues and            re assignedto the lines  They need   only to be assigned to the stations to put   them into effect  The defaulted tables   sanbere programmedwithdifferent   nformationusingthenormal   2rogramming procedure     Thepreprogrammedvaluesareas   follows    T
131. RAMMED ce        CONSOLE CONSOLE  SPARE  DUAL CONSOLE       32 BUTTON DSS BLF  CONSOLE  DD32X xx    
132. SPLAY    2  m  T  m  2  m     O  m  2  m  Q      2                     Announce Blocking  This feature   f  Dial 53     STATION FEATURES    PORT   ENTRY   PORT  ENTRY   FORT  ENTRY  illows a station user to block voice 2  Dial 04     VOICE BLOCK   uc Sud d  innounced intercom signalling  3  Select station ports to be programmed  827118114112    Station 10     57  Dial 10    57  43    29        4s        4  Dial    for next station feature            60   OR  4                  Ho     35    57       0    ae     dis      24    a ________ 53  ____  23         ________ 55     24     40   56    125                             Dial       for configuration mode     System Speed Dlal Toll Restriction    t  Dial 53  STATION FEATURES    PORT  ENTRY    When this feature is enabled  previously 2  Dial Q5   SYS SPD TOLL RST        0  programmed toll restriction tables that 3  Select station ports 10 be programmed  42   Joep   l         are assigned to a station are applied to   Station 10 57  Dial 10 57  H3   191 151     system speed dial calls when they are  4 Dial sk for next station feature  14    30    ae      made from the station   OR    5             _____  47    48   148                                                             il    DEFAULT a NOT ASSIGNED      Press SPKR to end     COV JJ         m4    Press             7 4 6    for base level                 Message Walt Orlglnate  A station that  1  Dial 53  PORT              PORT  ENTRY  PORT              ith thi    Dial  c 
133. STATION OPERATION    When a station is within a departmental group of  stations  the station user can place the station in either  an off duty or a wrap up mode  In either mode the  station will refuse an outside or transferred call  The  call will then skip to the next station in the department     To p ace station      off duty mode  press        button   Calls ring at another departmental station     To retum to on duty mode  press DND again     To p ace station      wrap up mode  press SHIFT         buttons  Calls ring at another departmental station     To return to on duty mode  press SHIFT DND again     STATION USER PROGRAMMING    AUTODIAL PROGRAMMING   Autodial numbers can be programmed at any  programmable button locations that do not have a line  assigned to them  They can also be programmed as a  secondary function at every DSS BLF memory  location  Typical autodial numbers are  frequently  dialed telephone numbers or extension numbers  or  frequently used host system or button system feature  codes  When programming an autodial number  first  decide over which line the call must be made  Then   determine the digits which normally have to be  manually dialed to reach the called party or feature   This line selection and digit sequence can be stored  as an autodial for later one or two button access  If  line pre selection is not programmed  the system will  automatically pick the prime line assigned to the  telephone  if enabled   or pick the last used line at that
134. Software version number  identifies  the software release version of the system          C O S  Programming  1  Line Type  2  Line Group Assignment  reads    Reserved    if no  hybrid strap is installed   strap installed     Line Dialing Mode    Line Privacy Release    Line Toll Restriction Table Assignments    Line Abandoned Hold Release Time      Set Up a Line   Using a Model Line      Assign Name to Line    Assign Line to Department    Exclusive Hold  Voice Mail Line 1 0   D  S D  Assignments             To Previous Menu    LINE COS MENU SELECTIONS   In each line COS menu selection  after choosing the  feature  enter all line port numbers which are to be  assigned to it       Selection 1        type  specifies the characteristics    of the line port     Disabled    Auxiliary  Configures port for installation of  external paging amplifier      CO PABX  Typical line connection            66 083      Selection 2  Line group assignment  assigns line to  line groups  will be reserved   the hybrii strap is not  installed       Selection 3  Line dialing mode  pulse or tone to  match the connected line       Selection 4  Line privacy release  releases privacy  on a line        Selectlon 5  Line toll restriction table assignment    Selection 6  Line abandoned hold release time      Selection 7  Set up a line  Using a model line    provides a means of programming a group of lines  to match the programming of a model line       Selection 8  Assign name to line     Selection 9  Assign
135. T  This section describes the major features and benefits of this software enhancement  including programming information     FEATURE    SMDA Reporting  Through VDT   Programming and  Per Station SMDA    BENEFIT    A menu selection has been added so that SMDA reports can now be requested from VDT  programming and can be sent to either port A or port B  This feature can be used remotely to  capture SMDA reports  as well  SMDA station reports can now be requested per station  Note   however  that only one station report can be requested at a time  The Class of Service  programming requirements for SMDA reporting are   5 follows     STATION 10 PROGRAMMING  1  Press           746    to enter COS programming    2  Dial 07 for SMDA reports  3  Dial 1 for station reports    4       station number and then press    or press   for all stations    DigiTech System Software Enhancements TAB 099    FEATURE    SMDA Reports   cont      SMDA Record  Storage Capacity    SMDA Reports with  Caller ID Information    Forced Account  Code Option    BENEFITS    Enter COS programming  1  Enter 1 for  System COS     2  Enter 8 for    SMDA Programming   3  Enter 11 for    SM DA Reports     4  Enter selection for desired report       press 1 for Selected Station Reports     press 2 for Station Reports     press 3 for Account Reports     press 4 for Line Reports     press 5 for Departmental Reports     press 6 for All Detail Records     press 7 for Departmental Calling Distribution Reports    press 8 to
136. TING    4  Dial    for configuration mode   To program for SMDR printout   1  Dial 77   2  Dial 2    SMDR PRINT XXX   3  Press Al to toggle between enable and disable   AI LED On   Enabled    OR     Dial 1 to enableprinting SMDR PRINT ON     AI LED on      Dial 2 to disable printing  SMDR PRINT OFF     4  Dial    for configuration mode                                   ATION REPOR Raub  Q REPOR                      72 24        IN    2     HIN A a                                     D           DEFAULT   NONE AS GND     cosrnePonriNa   ENABLED   DISABLED   ENABLED  DISABLED           PHINIO NAE    DEFAULT   NO COST REPORTED  DEFAULT  PRINTOUT ENABLED    Press SPKR to end     9907797 INI                                       Ql b      ATTENDANT CONFIGURATION    Mark the desired selections in the charts to record programming needs   Dial the feature code and then dial the selection code or press the programming button to program the selection     OTE  A current program setting is indicated by a lighted LED next to fhe programming button for       selection  When a toggle  on off  action  is provided by a single button  the lighted LED indicates when the feature is active       EATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD    3ase Level  The first step in any  wogramming sequence is to enter the  ase level  Once in this mode   ittendant programming              Wormed     system Clock  The system clock  naintains current date and time  nformation  This inf
137. TTON MAPPING    button programmed as the call park orbit   2  Dial 12   ASSIGN CALL PK    button will automatically park an active   Select button to be programmed   call in orbit    Press A1   A14  B1   B8     Dial 1   9 for parking orbit 1   9    ASSIGN CALL PK X     Select station ports to be programmed  with ORBIT button     Station 10   57  Dial 10   57     Dial   for next call park orbit button assignment    OR   Dial      for next button mapping feature    OR   Dial          for configuration mode        Press SPKR to end                               5       580 99 INI    4       Press            7 46    for base level   FEATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY    Line Group Button  One button access   1  Dial 56   BUTTON MAPPING    to a trunk group is provided by a button   2  Dial 13   ASSIGN LINE GRP    programmed as the line group button   3  Select button to be programmed     Press A1   A14  B1   B8   4  Dial 1   4 for line group 1   4    ASSIGN LINE GRP      5  Select station ports to be programmed  with GROUP button     Station 10   57  Dial 10   57   6  Dial    for next line group button assignment    OR   Dial       for next button mapping feature    OR   Dial          for configuration mode       Dial 56   BUTTON MAPPING    2  Dial 14   ASSIGN V  A  B     3  Select button to be programmed    Press   1   A14  B1   B8   4  Select station ports to be programmed  with           BLOCK button     Station 10   57  Dial 10   57   5  Dial    for next voic
138. The ability to  receive and originate all call paging at a station is  enabled by station class of service programming  Also  see the discussion titled  Zone Paging     AREA PAGING INTERFACE    Refer to the discussion titled  External Paging  Interface     ASSIST BUTTON    This feature allows a station user to program a button  to be used for sending a message to an LCD  speakerphone  Once programmed  the station user  can press the ASSIST button at anytime and then  press a DSS button to sound a tone burst at the called  station and present a preprogrammed message in the  station display  A message can be sent while on a call  without alerting the distant party  This feature is useful  for requesting assistance while engaging on a call  For  example  a customer service representative could  request assistance from a supervisor while talking to a  problem caller  The supervisor  upon receiving the  tone and noting the display message  could perform  an executive override or service observing action to  join the call or monitor it     AUTOMATIC CALLBACK  If a busy tone is encountered after an intercom station  is called  a special code number can be dialed that will  cause the system to automatically ring the calling and  called stations when the called station becomes idle             iption Of System Features    No class of service programming is required to enable  this feature     AUTOMATIC DIALING    The system supports up to 22 auto dial positions per  station  Autodial 
139. UPS  The ability of a station port to originate an amp or receive  SOHVA calls can be arranged by class of service  programming with the assignment of SOHVA calling  groups to station ports  This means that certain station  ports can be arranged together for SOHVA calling  between one another while other station ports in the  system are excluded from this group     Eight different SOHVA groups are provided by the  System  They are fixed into a variety of SOHVA  receive originate configurations  One SOHVA group  can be assigned to each station port to allow or to  deny SOHVA receive and or originate capability to        By properly assigning SOHVA groups to station ports     SOHVA paths between stations can be opened or    Description Of System Feat    blocked    Thesystem is defaulted with no SOHV Agroups  assigned  When a station port does not have a  SOHVA group assigned to       can originate   SOHVA Calls to any station port and receive SOHVA  calis from any station port     SOHVA groups are fixed by the system into the  following   configurations                        Example 1  Allow station port 10 to originate SOHVA  messages to all stations in the system and allow those  stations the ability to originate SOHVA messages to  each other but not to station port 10  Assign group 1  to station port 10 and assign group 2 to all other  station ports     Example 2  Allow station ports 14 and 15 to receive  and originate SOHVA calls between each other but  deny both receive a
140. accurate volt ohm  meter and a copy of this manual     REPAIR SERVICE      your common equipment cabinet or an individual  station needs repair  it may be returned to Comdial   Comdial will  at their option  either repair the defective  equipment or replace it with a remanufactured unit   This repair will be done for a fixed charge  For  information on this charge  please call or write to the  address given below     Comdiai   P O  Box 7266   Charlottesville  VA 22906   Attention  Repair Department   Telephone   804  978 2400  1 800 877 4448    When returning equipment for repair  pack it carefully  to prevent damage  Any damages during shipment  will be the responsibility of the purchaser  The  equipment should be shipped freight or postage  prepaid  The shipping address is     Comdiai   1180 Seminole Trail  Charlottesville  VA 22901  Attention  Repair Department    FUSE LOCATION    The system is protected against short circuit damage  by a slow blow fuse located on the right side of the  common equipment cabinet  Always replace the fuse  with one of the same value and type  otherwise   equipment damage could result     e 4 Line  8 Station Base Unit   1     250V Slow Blow     8 Line  16 Station Base Unit          250V Slow Blow    e 1 B Line  32 Station Base Unit         250V Slow Blow    WIRING    Refer to Chapter 3  Sectlon 4  Checkout and Failure  Isolation  for instructions for testing the system wiring  and components for possible failure     STATION WALL MOUNTING   No 
141. al          for configuration mode          Press SPKR to end                                     580 99 INI            LAST  RESORT  TABLE         80 99 INI                         uieis  S    47            BJ    OC fat    Press ITCM    7 4 6    for base level            ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD    JiscardDigits  When the telephone 1  Dial 75   SMDA PROGRAMMING     systemis installed behind a hostsystem   2  Dial 01 to program  such as a PBX or CENTREX  access costing bands     COSTING BANDS    ties must be dialed before obtaining ar   3  Dial 4 to program  utsida line dial tone  These access discard digits   DISCARD DIGITS    sodes should be removed                               Dial 1 6 to select entry 1 6     ENTRY X    xostedso that they        costed based on           ust the actual telephone numbers dialed  5 Dial   for no discard digits      Jp to six different access codes entries  oR      EFAULT z NO DISCARD  nithup to eight digits per entry can be Dial up to 6 discard digits DIGITS ASSIGNED  3rogrammed  then dial                        6  Dial    and repeat steps 4 5 to  program next discard digit entry   7                     next SMDA feature    OR   Dial  for configuration mode     Dial Time Limit  The amount of time tha   1  Dial 75   SMDA PROGRAMMING                     the system ignores for dialing purposes 1  2  Dial 02 to program dial time limit     DEFAULT  lt  0 SEC   programmable  Dialing time is                 DIAL TIME XXX  
142. al        3 26  Speaker light                         5 27  Speakerphone Operation                   5 11  Speakerphone Support                    2 16  Special Mounting Consideration                13     Speed Dialing                          5 3  Square Non Square Configuration              2 16  Standard installaion Details                      3 1  Station 10 Programming                    2 5  Station By Station Privacy                   2 16  Station Configuration                     4 22  Station connections          3 5  3 7  3 8  3 9  3 10  3 13  Station Connections  406 Expansion Module        3 25  Station COS Menu Selections                 4 89  Station Default                              station Deseription                       13  Station Disable                         4 62  Station Images                            7  Station Message Detail Accounting              2 16  Station Message Detail Accounting Department Numbers 4 74  Station Message Detail Accounting Departments        4 32  Station Message Detail Accounting Printout          482  Station Message Detail Accounting Printout 4 77 5 17  Station Message Detail Accounting Records    Delete By Attendant                       4 8  Station Message Detail Accounting Reporting         4 74  Station Message Detail Accounting Reports  can Costing   2 3  Station Message Detail Recording              2 16  Station Message Detail Reporting Printout           4 77  Station Message Detail Report Port            
143. al station types         Comdial Digital Multiline Telephone  e Comdial Digital LCD Speakerphone    3 5    Installs    Connections between the common equipment and the  stations are typically via type 66        connector blocks  which are cable connected to the common equipmert  50 pin male connector  The connector block is  in   turn  wired to modular jacks which the stations   connect to through the line cord  The maximum  distance allowed from the common equipment to the  stations is 1000 feet using  24 gauge  twisted pair  cable     If spare conductors exist in the cables that are run  between the 66M xx connector blocks and the station  jacks  it is a good practice to connect them to earth  ground  as a preventative measure against radio  frequency and or      interference     Only one station should be connected to a station port   Do not bridge two stations to a single modular jack     Table 3 2 shows the station connection details   Figure 3 5 illustrates typical station connections     The extension number and all other programmable  attributes of a station that are initially assigned to a  particular port can be re assigned to a different port by  programming action  This feature allows adds  moves  and changes to be made without re locating the  station wiring  Refer to the automatic station relocation  programming procedure found on page 4 10 and the  station to station programming procedure found       page 4 50     NOTE  The station 10 to station port 10 assignm
144. all is answered  ask for transfer to desired  station  If ringing stops and dial tone sounds again   dial station extension number       called station is id e  confirmation tone is  sounded and called station rings if called station  does not answer within transfer recall timeout  period  call is returned to DISD dial tone    If called station has call forward feature set   forward station rings    If called station is busy  call is placed on hold and  camped on at busy station        camp on is not answered within transfer recall    timeout period  busy tone is given followed by  DISD dial tone     NOTE  The system will return the caller to DISD dial  tone two additional times and then drop the line     If busy called station is part of hunt group  DISD call is   routed to idle station in hunt group if available    otherwise  call is camped on at dialed station  Hunt   group not followed in case of RNA    If invalid extension number is dialed  error tone is   sounded before DISD dial tone is returned    If mistake in dialing is made  caller can dial    for new   DISD dial tone    NOTE  The system will return the caller to DISD dial  tone two additional times and then        the line        extension number dialing is not completed within   programmed dial time limit  call is routed to DISD   assist station if available  otherwise  line is dropped            66 083              ration      Ringer  Volume Control Volume Control  Handset     Programmable  Buttons  Speaker     
145. aracters from the response line as they are being  typed        CONTROL        Causes the current response line to     be echoed for review        CONTROL D   Causes the current response line to  be deleted        CONTROL S   Causes printing or display action  stop     e CONTROL 8   Causes the printing or display to  resume    There are two system acknowledgement messages to   a response line       COMMAND ACCEPTED   Response accepted     e    COMMAND REJECTED          Response not  accepted  The terminal bells also sounded     4 83    System Programmin IMI 66 083    PROCEDURE    1  Determine the system programming parameters   and record them for future reference     2  Tum on the AC power to the system and the VDT     3  Press the RETURN  ENTER  key  The system  enters an approximate 20 second timeout cycle   Step 4 must be performed within this timeout period  or the programming sequence will be aborted     4  Type the password    3 7 4 6     and press  RETURN  ENTER   The VDT will display the main  programming menu  The system enters an  approximate 3 minute timeout cycle  A selection or  response must be entered within this timeout  period  otherwise  the programming sequence is  aborted     5  Execute the programming procedures by  responding to the prompts listed in first the main  menu and then in subsequent menus     REMOTE PROGRAMMING    The telephone system can be programmed remotely  using the following equipment      A VDT or a PC and appropriate software program
146. assign Ext no     ASSIGN EXT  NUM      3  Select station number   EXT  xxxx   Station 10   57   Dialt0 57  4  Dial new ext  number   HT  xxxx YYYY    NO773 Extension number can be max  of four digits   If fess than four digits  leading zeros must be  dialed before number   Example  For ext  no  15  dial 0015    5  Select next station number and assign ext  no    OR   Dial    for configuration mode     1  Dial 52   2  Dial 2 to assign access codes 10 depts    DEPT  CALLING    3  Dial 1   4 for dept  1     4   DEPTX YYYY    4  Dial new access code   DEPT X YYYY 2222  NOTE  New code can be max  of four digits      less than four digits  leading zeros must  be dialed before number  Code cannot  conflict with station extension numbers   5  Dial next department number and program  access code    OR   Dial    for next access code feature            Dial       for configuration mode      ACCESS CODE         3 80  DEFAULT    NOT AS GND       Press SPKR to end     9977979 II                         UlelsAS     gt        Press ITCM     7 4 6    for base level               FEATURE DESCRIPTION zNTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY       m  T  m  2                 2          o  2  5                   Eixecutlve  Overrlde  Selected stations    Dial 53  STATION FEATURES  PORT   ENTRY   PORT   ENTRY   PORT   ENTRY  i     ie      Dial 02   EXEC  OVERRIDE  10 1  5    J      an be provided with busy override  This   2  Dial 02              11       lez                    atureallowsthestationto over
147. at the port that is logic paired  with the port that the console occupies  Install the second 32 button console at any station port and   using COS programming  assign it as a second console to the same station port that is paired with   the first console  The dual console should not be placed at station ports 10 or 11     DigiTech station ports are logic paired asfollows   10 11 26 27 42 43  12 13 28   29 44 45    14 15 30 31 46 47 Station ports are as follows    16 17 32 33 48 49 Potts 10 through 17 on 4 line    station base unit  18   19 34 35  0 51 Potts 10 through 25      8 line  16 station base unit  20 21 36 37 52   53 Ports 10 through 47 on 16 line  32 station base unit  22   23 38 39 54     55 Ports 42 through 57      16 line  32 station base unit       24 25  40  41 56 57 with two 4 line  g station expansion modules    Continued on next page         DigiTech Software   Enhancement       080    FEATURE BENEFIT    1  Console  Feature    continued    Typical DigiTech Telephone   installed    The first console  the one installed at the logic paired port  extends the     autodial buttons of the paired  telephone by 32 and provides DSS BLF coverage for station ports 10 through 41  Additionally  the  first console provides COS programming buttons CIO through C41 when needed  Refer to the  programming overlay that is included at the end of this publication     The second console  the one installed at the programmed station port  provides DSS BLF coverage  as follows       O
148. ature is       the ITCM light will  2  Dial     0 3            66 083    System Operation      MUSIC ON HOLD    Music that is provided to outside lines while they are    on hold can be disabled and enabled by attendant  action     1  Press ITCM   2  Dial      0 4     3  Press Al  top  left hand programmable button  to  toggle feature on and off  Associated light will turn    on when music on hold is provided and turn off  when it is disabled    OR     Dial 1 to enable     LED turns           Dial 2 to disable  Al LED turns off    4  Press MNTR  SPKR  to end     LCD MESSAGING    A message can be set at any station in the system to  be displayed by any calling LCD speakerphone  Two  standard messages are provided at locations 1 and 2  by system default  The attendant can create up to ten  Custom messages  or eight plus the default  messages  as needed  If a non verbal response to an  intercom call or to a secure off hook voice announce   SOHVA  is to be provided for station use  one or  more LCD messages can be stored as appropriate  response messages     1  Press ITCM      Dial     0 5   Dial 1    0 for message number   Dial sto clear current message     Refer to Table 5 1  and compose the  message  16 digits maximum                  n    STATION    Stations can be assigned individual names or category  names which will be displayed by a calling LCD  speakerphone  Typical names could be TECH SV   SALES 1  J  Smith  etc     1  Press ITCM   2  Dial    06    3  Select station to 
149. be programmed by dialing station  port number 10   67     6  Dial all two digit codes necessary to enter the  message     7  Dial    and repeat steps 3   7   Examples     For message    I am busy     Dial 34 43 12 24 64 12 25 85 76 96         For message          Back Later      Dial4  232456561222242655125324  843575          If default locations 1 and 2 have been cleared   return to default messages as follows    Dial 10 to obtain default message    BACK          Dial 20 to obtain default message  CALL      Press MNTR  SPKR  to end     Make list of stored messages and location  numbers to station users      lt  gt                        4  Dial      clear current name     5  Refer    Table 5 1  and compose station  name  7 digits maximum      6  Dial all two digit codes necessary for new station  name         Dial    for next station and repeat steps 3   7   8 Press MNTR  SPKR  to end     System Operation IMI 66 083    Table 5 1  Character Codes    CODE   CHAR   CODE   CHAR   CODE     24                12              66 083    System Operation      STATION MESSAGE DETAIL ACCOUNTING  SMDA  PRINTOUT    The attendant can command the system to print  several different types of reports and to delete all  stored SMDA records     1  Press ITCM   2  Dial    07   3  Choose report to be printed     Dial 1   for station report     Dial 2   for line report     Dial 3  for SMDA department report     Dial 4  for account code                  Dial 5  for automatic reports     Dial 6     
150. bel button     pU Ed PROGRAMMING SECURE OFF HOOK VOICE               ANNOUNCE ORIGINATE BUTTON  e Dial 0    9 to choose preprogrammed message  See   attendant for list of messages    Press              1     OR    Press desired programmable button    e Dial    to choose system provided message  Dial 8    System message is   ASSIST  plus name             extension number of station          message  Press MNTR  SPKR  to end    Name or extension is automaticaly added by   Label button    System      e    one particular station must always receive  message  dial extension number of that station     System Operation IMI 66 083    SECTION 2  ATTENDANT STATION OPERATION    The attendant station provides additional operating features that are not available from other stations in the  System     SYSTEM CLOCK    The system clock can be programmed to maintain 4  Dial two digits  01 12  for mo   current date and time information   This information is   m     Dial 1 81  f    provided to the LCD speakerphone for display  5    we dts           1  Press         6  Dial two digits ied for hr   2  Dial 80 1      Dial two digits     for min    3  Dial two digits  00 99  for yr                   SYSTEM SPEED           PROGRAMMING    A special system wide list of numbers can be   Press buttons B1  B2 for lines 15  16 or dial 15   programmed for automatic dialing by all users  16   1  Press ITCM   Press HOLD then press buttons Al          for    lines 17   24 or dial 17    24   e Dial 91   94 for
151. button are designated programmable  buttons that can assigned by the station user     DIAL 0 FOR SYSTEM Al I ENDANT    The system attendant station  station 10  is signalled  whenever the digit 0 is dialed on the intercom line     DIRECT DEPARTMENT CALLING  WITH DEPARTMENTAL CALL  DISTRIBUTION  DCD   Direct department calling has been enhanced with  departmental call distribution  DCD  and provides a  means by which outside lines can be assigned to one  of four different departments  Calls received on  department lines and calls that are transferred to a  department from within the system search for      idle  station in that department  Department calls are  distributed evenly throughout the department stations    Description Of System Feat    for answering with individual stations having the ability  to be taken out of service as necessary  Calls received  on department lines and calls that are transferred to a  department from within the system are placed in a  queue for servicing  New calls  transferred calls  and  held calls are all assigned a time stamp by the system  so that they will be serviced in the order of their arrival     Up to four departments can be formed with up to 16  stations  plus one overflow station  allowed in each  one  A station can be assigned to more than one  department  if desired  Since a station can be  assigned to more than one department  the attendant  station can be added to serve as the overflow station  for all departments if desired  Se
152. buttons can store up to 16 digits plus  an intercom or line selection  Stored digits include  9 0     and    A pause is stored at any point where the  HOLD button is pressed  and a hookflash is stored at  any point where the TAP button is pressed  Automatic  dialing can be used to provide one button access to  System features  No class of service    programming is required to enable autodialing  Also  refer to discussions titled  Automatic Pause Insertion   Station Speed Dial  and Programmable DSS BLF     AUTOMATIC HOLD FOR INTERCOM  If the second intercom line is selected while a call is  active on the first intercom line  this feature causes the  first intercom call to be automatically placed on hold   Station class of service programming is required to  enable this feature     AUTOMATIC HOLD   TRANSFER TO  INTERCOM  ANSWER HOLD   If the intercom line is selected while an outside line        is active  this system feature causes the outside        to be automatically placed on hold  No class of  service programming is required to enable this feature     AUTOMATIC HOLD    TRANSFER TO LINE  This system feature is made available through  programming to selected stations  When enabled   pressing any line button will cause an active line to  automatically go on hold  This feature allows a user to  move from line to line without having to press the  HOLD button to place any current calls on hold    Station class of service programming is used to   enable this feature at the desir
153. call     ACCOUNT CODE OPERATION    Account codes are assigned by SMDA class of service  programming and are used by the system to identify  calls by category  or special grouping  for SMDA call  reporting purposes  Enter an account code while on  line either before an outgoing call is dialed  after the  distant party has hung up  or during a call  Account  code entry is voluntary  If it is not entered  an  outgoing call will still go through or an incoming one  can still be completed  To enter an account code  first  either dial the entry code or press an ACCOUNT  CODE button  if one is assigned by class of service  programming   After doing this  dial the account code  number     OUTGOING CALL  WITHOUT ACCOUNT CODE BUTTON    e Select line  Display on LCD speakerphone will  prompt for account code entry if feature is active     e Press          0 4  Line is automatically placed on  hold     e Dial account code  Listen for dial tone  If error tone  sounds or error message shows on LCD  check  account code for validly and re enter correct code     e Dial number to be called   WITH ACCOUNT CODE BUTTON        Select line  Display on LCD speakerphone will  prompt for account code entry if feature is active         Press ACCOUNT CODE button  Associated LED  will flash while system awaits account code entry  lt    will turn off when account code is entered       will  also turn off after 10 seconds with no account code  entry or if button is pressed a second time  to void  entry req
154. can join that particular  tation whenever it is on the privacy  elease line     Access Denied  Access to particular  ines can be denied to certain stations  A  station user cannot select a denied line         Dial 54   STALINE CONFIG        Line port 1 14   Dial 01  140rpressAl  A14     Line port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or press B1  B2     Line port 17   24   Dial 17   24   OR   Press HOLD then press Al   A6      Dial   when all line ports are selected     Select station ports to be programmed        Station 10     57  Dial 10    57       Dial    when all station ports are selected      OR   Dial       for next station line feature    OR    Dial          for configuration mode       Dial 64                 CONFIG        Dial 5   ACCESS DENY     Select line ports        Line port 1 14   Dial 01      or press                 Line port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or press B1  B2     Line port 17   24   Dial 17    24   OR   Press HOLD then press Al             Dial   when all line ports are selected     Select station ports to be programmed       Station 10   57  Dial 10    57       Dial    when all station ports are selected      OR    Dial        for next station line feature    OR    Dial          for configuration mode        MARK STATION LINE RECORD ON PAGE 4 40    T4 PRIVACY RELEASE  DEFAULT   ALL LINES PRIVATE  gt         Select line ports        IN    IDEFAULT   NO ACCESS RESTRICTIONS    Press SPKR to end                                               80 99 INI             Press ITC
155. ce while idle or on a  call   e Press  s button          f extension number of assisting station is not  programmed  press DSS button for it  If assisting  station is idle  tone burst sounds and message  appears on display  If it is busy  message appears  when it becomes idle     STATION TO STATION MESSAGING  If a station has BLF appearance at another station      call back message indication can be left at that station     To activate messaging       Make intercom call and hear ring back tone       Dial  7  BLF light at called station flutters     To cancel messaging     Press ITCM     Dial   7       Dial extension number of station at which message  call back indication was left     To answer messaging     Press DSS button associated with lighted BLF light     VOICE ANNOUNCE BLOCKING    To block voice calls       Press ITCM     Dial   2     Tounblockvolcecalls       Press            Dial   2     LINE MONITORING    Toactivate while on a call       Press MNTR  SPKR   Monitor light will turn on      Hang up handset    NOTE  If a distant party places the call on hold  the  station user can monitor in a handsfree  manner until the party returns  and then lift the  station handset to resume the call     To cancel         Lii handset to resume conversation  R     Press MNTR  SPKR  to disconnect  Monitor light  will turn off           66 083    System Operation      RECALL FLASH    FLASH    PBX  CENTREX and custom calling services may  require this feature     If a system has been 
156. ceives a tone alerting them that  they are making a SOHVA call  Response to the  announcement can be verbal or non verbal  Verbal  response is effected by pressing and holding the  MUTE button and speaking into the handset   Non verbal response is effected by pressing a  pre programmed programmable button to send a  message to be shown on the display of the   announcing station  if it is      LCD speakerphone   The  announcing station is automatically disconnected after  the message is delivered to it  and displayed if an LCD  speakerphone   Stations that have the voice announce  blocking feature turned on cannot receive    SOHVA  Station class of service programming is used to  disable the SOHVA feature at a station port if desired     SECURE OFF HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE  ORIGINATE BUTTON   This feature allows a telephone user to program a  button at their station that must be pressed to enable  the delivery of a SOHVA call  This SOHVA enabled  button allows the caller  after hearing a busy signal  to  decide whether the called party should be interrupted  in    SOHVA manner  If they should  the button can be  pressed and    SOHVA call completed  This button   along with SOHVA groups allows system users greater  control of the callers that are allowed to make a  SOHVA call and of the situations that SOHVA calls are  allowed  Refer to the discussions titled  Secure  Off Hook Voice Announce  and Secure Off Hook Voice  Announce Groups     SECURE OFF HOOK VOICE   ANNOUNCE  SOHVA  GRO
157. codes 445 and 456  lt also contains area code 412 with office code 508  Zone 2 contains area  code 203 with office code 545  Zone 2 also contains area code 412 with office code 654  Zone 1 is costed at one rate and zone 2 is costed at another  rate     call made to 1 203 445 nnnn  1 203 456 nnnn        1 41 2 508 nnnn is costed at a different rate than    call made      1 203 545 nnnn or    41 2 654 nnnn     99    4  AREA CODE BAND TABLE  LONG DISTANCE CALLS     Long distance calls that do not match entries in zone call band tables are matched against area code band tables  Area code band tables are the third  of for long distance calls  Area code band tables 1   7 are associated with call rate costing tables 11  17  Use area code band   tables to cost calls based upon the area code of the called number  Assign any or all area codes nnn  200 999    one of seven different bands    Group area codes into bands based on frequently called areas  distance from the caller  or any other desired category     Example  Assign area codes 703 and 804 to area code band table 1  Assign area code 415 to area code band table 7  Calls made to numbers such  as 1 703 nnn nnnn        1 804 nnn nnnn are costed with values assigned to call rate table 11  calls made to numbers such as 1 41     5 nnn nnnn are  costed with values assigned to call rate table 17     5  CALL RATE TABLES  LOCAL AND LONG DISTANCE CALLS    Local calls and long distance calls that do not match entries in any exception table 
158. conflgured for flash       Press        to generate a timed flash signal     RECALL  This feature provides disconnect and dial tone recall     If a system has been configured for recall       Press        to disconnect current call and receive     new dial tone for another call   NOTE  A system can be configured for either flash or  recall but not for both     PAGING    EXTERNAL PAGING   Requires external paging unit      Lift handset      Press        then dial 89    OR     e Press programmable button programmed for paging  access       Make paging announcement and hang up   ALL CALL AND ZONE PAGING  To page      Lii handset      Press ITCM     e Dial zone number    84  85  86  or 87 for all call      Make announcement     Hang up handset or wait on line for an answer     MEET ME PAGE  Answerback of Page   To answer all call or zone page from any  telephone      Lii handset      Press ITCM      Dial 88    e Meet paging party on line for private conversation     DO NOT DISTURB    Toactivate sllencestatlon ringerand appear busy  to Intercom calls        Press programmable button pre programmed for  this purpose   Associated light will tum on      NOTE  The calling party will hear two quick tone  bursts every 1 5 seconds         feature cannot  be overridden by the calling party     To cancel       Press programmable button again   light will turn off        Associated    Through class of service programming  a statlon  can be allowed to override a do not disturb  DND   conditi
159. conversion is required to prepare a digital  telephone to be hung on the wall Two keyhole  shaped slots are available on the bottom housing  which enable a digital telephone to be either mounted  directly on a wall using two   10  panhead screws   obtained locally  or mount on a wall jack cover plate   if mounted using    wail jack cover plate  an AT amp T  type 6308 wail plate is recommended for best  results     1  If  10 screws are used  thread them into the wall  within 1 8 inch of the surface  Refer to Figure 6   for the spacing dimensions     2  Turn the telephone over and remove the plastic tab  that is molded into the housing  It is located at the  lower right hand comer of the housing     3  Position the keyhole shaped holes in the bottom of  the station over the  10 screws or the cover plate  studs  Slide the station down until a slight click is  felt     4 Insert the plastic tab that was removed from the  lower housing in step 2 into the handset cavity   This tab provides a secure retention for the handset  when it is hung up     5  To remove the station  lift up to unsnap both screws  or studs from the bottom housing  and iii the  station away from the wall     Maintenance        66 083    Wall Plate     Or     10 Screws      NOTE  AT amp T 630B Wall Plate is Recommended  For Secure Mount                          3 15 16                    Figure 6 1  Station Wall Mounting Details           66 083             PUBLICATION INDEX   A C  Abandoned Hold Release        
160. d accessories needed for proper  installation and operation     If    backboard is required at the mounting location   attach it securely to provide a stable mounting  surface for the equipment     Refer to Figure 3 1 for the locating dimensions  required for the three mounting screws  and mark  their locations on the mounting surface       Drill holes in the mounting surface of a proper size    to accommodate the hardware being used  If  necessary  prepare these holes with inserts   anchors or other attachment devices as dictated by  the type of mounting surface       Insert the two top screws into the mounting surface    and tighten them to within approximately  of the surface     Hang the cabinet on the top screws using the  mounting holes located on the rear of the cabinet   Note that these holes are elongated with an  enlargement at one end  This feature allows the  cabinet to snap down on the screws to secure the  mounting when the cabinet is hung on them     1 8 inch    Insert a third screw through the mounting tab  located on the lower edge of the cabinet and into  the mounting surface  and tighten it into place     Place the individual telephone stations as desired  and in keeping with accepted industry and off ice  standards  A telephone station can be wall  mounted if necessary as they are desk wall  reversible  Refer to Chapter 6  Maintenance  for  instructions in preparing a desk wall reversible  station for wall mounting          4uon            4 Line  8 Statio
161. d station can be answered at a monitoring  station       See flashing BLF light  then press DSS button  Light  tums off and call is answered     To return to call from hold or an unanswered  transfer       Press TAP button     LINE ANSWER FROM ANY STATION   When the attendant station has enabled the night  transfer  of ringing  feature  denoted by a fluttering  ITCM light at stations 10 and 12   an outside call can  be answered from any station in the system        Hear ringing  loud ringer  night transfer station  etc       Lift handset      Press ITCM      Dial 80     Answer call     SECURE OFF HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE   SOHVA    While a station is off hook and busy on a call  a secure  off hook voice announcement  SOHVA  may be  sounded through the handset receiver of the  telephone if it is programmed to allow SOHVA     To respond to a SOHVA announcement        Hear tone alert and announcement in handset  receiver  Distant party cannot hear announcement     Voice Response    Press and hold MUTE button  and reply by speaking  into handset transmitter  Distant party cannot hear  response     Press and release MUTE button to return to distant  party     Press preprogrammed response message  programmable button to cause a set message to  appear in display of announcing station  if it is an  LCD speakerphone   This action also disconnect   the announcing station     System Operation 66083    MAKING CALLS    OUTSIDE LINE CALLING      Press line button to select line   NOTE  Selectin
162. d the exclusive hold condition  will revert to a normal line hold condition     EXCLUSIVE HOLD SYSTEM WIDE  ENABLE DISABLE  This feature allow systems that do not require  exclusive hold capability to have it turned off  system wide through programming  System class of  service programming is used to enable or disable  exclusive hold     EXECUTIVE ATTENDANT OVERRIDE    This feature allows the user of a station  upon  encountering a busy signal at another station     dial a  code that will override the busy signal of a call  sound  a warning tone  and allow access to the existing  conversation  This feature is enabled through station  class of service programming     EXTERNAL PAGING INTERFACE    A dedicated paging port or a spare line port can be  interfaced with an external paging amplifier  The  paging amplifier can then be dial accessed by stations  in the system  DTMF tones can be dialed through the  line port to provide zone selection if provided by the  external paging amplifier  The dedicated paging         does not support any    talk back    capability even if such  a feature is provided by the external equipment  The    line class of service programming arranges a line port  for external paging interface     FEATURE INHIBIT  A large array of individual features can be disabled  system wide to provide a basic telephone system  A  basic telephone system is useful for installation  environments where a large proportion of the stations  are accessible to unauthorized use
163. direct ringing    appearance at a station  Immediate          Line port 1 14   Dial 01 14 or press Al  Al4   direct  ringing can be assigned to some   Line port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or press B1  B2    lines and delayed ringing to others    Line port 17  24   py    24   NOTE  Do not program direct ringing   Press HOLD then press Al         for lines that are assigned to 4  Dial   when all line ports are selected       n 5  Select station ports to be programmed           calling    Station 10   57  Dial 10    57     6  Dial    when all station ports are selected    OR   Dial       for next station line ringing assignment   OR   Dial         for configuration mode               Continued on next page Press SPKR to end       UuluuulEJUOJc                    80 99 IWI            ontinued       light Transfer  of ringing           ittendant can place the system into the  light transfer  of ringing  mode of  iperation  While in this mode of  iperation  special line station ringing  issignments are active  These  issignments are programmed per this  yrocedure     VOTE  Also refer to night transfer     of ringing  on page 4 75     Press ITCM     7 4 6    for base level   FEATURE DESCRIPTION zNTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD    Flexible Ringing Assignments           Delayed Ringing               2  Dial 2     DELAY RING      3  Select line ports for delayed ringing     Line port 1 14   Dial 01   14 or press Al         Line        15  16   Dial 15  16 or press B1  B2    
164. ditions as detailed      Chapter 4 until class of  service programming is performed     3  Once the basic system is verified as operational   perform the class of service programming as  described in Chapter 4     FAILURE ISOLATION  SYSTEM STATUS INDICATOR    A red LED located on the common equipment cabinet  near the music port is the system status indicator   This indicator is turned on steady when power is  applied to the system  f the indicator flashes after  power up  it could be indicating a processor failure   Unplug and reconnect the AC power to the power  supply and observe the LED indication  If it still shows  a flashing indication  equipment replacement may be  necessary     STATION SELF TEST    The multiline stations can be self tested for proper  operation per the following instructions     1  Disconnect line cord at station base     2  Press and hold MUTE and reconnect line cord to  station connector  Station will automatically  perform self test routine     3  Release MUTE as soon as test begins  Sequence  of test is as follows     e Indicators will light in sequence       Ringer will sound   be sure volume is set to low  or high    e Indicators and ringer will then turn off at the  same time    4  Replace any station that does not pass the self test     3 31    Installation    IMI 66 083    SECTION 7    INSTALLER USER    INFORMATION    REGARDING FCC RULES AND REGULATIONS    This electronic key system complies with Federal  Communications Commission  FCC  Rule
165. e ATI device is  replaced with    multiline  telephone at the programmed  station port     ATI Distinctive Ringing  Intercom 1  Dial 53     STATION FEATURES      m  is ring 1      connected 2  os 33    La       di    N      through anATldevicehaveadifferent   Press AI to toggle between enable and disable AU   cadence than outside calls have   LED On a Enable  DEFAULTS                 Intercom ring cadence is  1 sec  on  0 5  OR    sec  off  1 sec  on  3 5 sec  off  4  Dial 1 to Enable   DIST  RING ON     Outside callringcadence 15  2 sec  on   Al LED on    4 sec  off  Disable this distinctive  Dial 2 to Disable   DIST  RING OFF    tinging feature to make the intercom 5  Dial  fornextfeature    ring cadence the same as that for  OR     outside calls  Dial         for configuration mode        Press SPKR to end        80 99                              uleis  S    84     TOLL RESTRICTION TABLE CONFIGURATION    Before programming the toll restriction configuration  enter the toll restriction requirements on the programming reference tables found at the end of this  procedure     In order for toll restriction to take effect  the following three fold process must occur  9  3  e One or more toll tables must be entered 5  e Toll tables must be assigned to         appropriate lines   e Toll tables must be assigned to all appropriate stations   After the toll tables are programmed  they must then be assigned to both a line and a station using that line before any programmed toll restr
166. e announce block button  assignment    OR   Dial      for next button mapping feature    OR   Dial       for configuration mode     REFERENCE RECORD    SEE CHART ON PAGE 4 49                                                     Volce Announce Block Button  Voice  announced intercom calls and station  paging can be blocked when the station  user presses a button programmed as  the voice announce block button          Press SPKR to end     580 99 IWI                                 45               Press             7 46 x for base level     FEATURE DESCRIPTION          DESCRIPTION  ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY      Dial 66     BUTTON MAPPING      Dial 15     ASSIGN LINE GRP Q       Select button to be programmed             Group Queue Button  A station  iser can queue for a busy line by  yessing a button that is programmed as  he line group queue button     Account Code Button  Press the  account code button and then dial an  account code to record a call into a                 catagory without interrupting  the call      Press Al   AM  B1  B8       Select station ports to be programmed    with QUEUE button     Station 10   57  Dial 10   57       Dial    for next line group queue    button assignment     OR    Dial       for next button mapping feature   OR    Dial          for configuration mode        Dial 66   BUTTON MAPPING     Dial 17   ASSIGN ACCT KEY      Select button to be programmed       Press     A14  B1            Select station ports to be programmed        S
167. e base unit and  optional expansion module are per the following chart     MODEL CO PBX STATION  NO  CAPACITY CAPACITY  C0408 4 8   60816 8 16        632 16 32       408 4 8    The digital telephone system is full featured  and  supports the digital telephone models     The digital system is expandable in both line and  station capacity with the addition of add on expansion  modules  Refer to Figure 3 14 on page 3 24 for an  illustration of the expansion configurations     COMMON EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION    The common equipment base unit is a fully electronic  device  It is essentially a special purpose computer  system acting as a communications controller   between central off ice  CO   private branch exchange   PBX   or CENTREX supplied lines and the proprietary  digital telephone stations  The software architecture  of the common equipment provides complete system  support and great flexibility of operation     The system is fully digital and is ISDN up gradable  with two usable time slots available for each station   The digital information passes over time division  multiplexing  TDM  highways  The digital information  is an encoded version of the voice transmission and  control signals that are translated into computer  language  The TDM highway can transmit several  signals over a single pair of wires at the same time   The signals are governed by a system clock  This  clock creates an overall point of reference against  which the TCM information is synchronized and  par
168. e port 15  16 z Dial 15  16 or press B1  B2          JTMF  for accessing special circuits Line port 17 24   Dial 17   24   equiring DTMF tones such as banking  OR    nachines        Line port dialing must Press HOLD then press Al     8        programmed as pulse for rotary dial  OR           ine interfacing or tone for DTMF line Dial 00 to default all lines to pulse dial   nteifacing    Dial    for configuration mode          Dial 37             DIAL      Select tone dial line ports  LED On   Tone    Line port 1 14   Dial 01   14 or Press Al     4  Line port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or press       B2    Line port 17 24   Dial 17    24   OR   Press HOLD then press Al            Dial 00 to default all lines to tone dial  Press SPKR to end     Dial    for configuration mode      OR        80 99 IWI                                                  PressITCM    7 4           base level     FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE RECORD    Abandoned Hold Release  When a  Jistant party abandons a hold condition  ind disconnects  the central office will  send a forward disconnect signal to the  system  The signal can be either 50  nsec  or 350 msec  in length  Program  he system to match the central off ice  ime     Direct Departmental Calling  Outside    ines can be assigned to one of four  Jifferent departments  Calls received       line assigned to    department will  hunt for any idle station in that  department to ring     NOTE  Assign stations to these  departments per the procedure  on page
169. e signalled  The first choice in signalling is    first choice signalling programmable  however  previous software defaulted the choice to voice first signalling  This  style for Intercom software release changes the default setting to the tone first choice     calls          09 1    FEATURE   upports both    BENEFIT    With previous software  users were required to lift the handset of a speakerphone before they     n hook and off hook could make a voice signalled intercom call  This software release allows a station user to perform    call announcing from  speakerphones    Enhanced secure  off hook voice  announce operation    Expanded personal  ring tone choice    Simplified hybrid  operation    Enhanced                                  Support for DigiTech  telephones with a  revision letter of   or  later    either a on hook or an off hook call announce from a speakerphone     This software enhancement makes it possible for a station user to make a secure off hook voice  announcement  SOHVA  to a station that he or she is currently service observing    Although     programmer can disable the SOHVA feature when necessary  every DigiTech telephone can  send and receive SOHVA calls as a system default  he or she must enable the service observe  feature before a user can make use of it     The system provides a group of distinctive tones for station ringing  A station user can choose a  tone from this group to provide a distinctive ring at his or her telephone  Often when sev
170. e system and an  rxtemal data device  must be                     to match the  equirements of the data device        VOTE  if XMODEM protocol is to be  used for data transfer between  a VDT and the common  equipment  8 bit data is  required     1  Dial 14   2  Select time     Dial 1 or Press           Dial 2 or Press   2     Dial 3 or Press            Dial 4 or Press   4     Dial 5 or Press   5       Dial 6      Press            Dial 7 or              9      Dial 8 or Press A10       Dial 9 or Press          Dial 0 or Press A12      HOLD RECALL XXXX      HOLD RECALL 30       HOLD RECALL 60       HOLD RECALL 90       HOLD RECALL 120       HOLD RECALL 180       HOLD RECALL 240       HOLD RECALL 300       HOLD RECALL 360       HOLD RECALL 420            HOLD RECALL      3  Dial    for configuration mode     1  Dial 15    2  Dial 1 for data port A    OR   Dial 2 for data port B   3  Choose baud rate   Dial 01 or Press Al   Dial 02 or Press   2   Dial 03 or Press        Dial 04 or Press   4   Dial 05 or Press A5   Dial 06 or Press A8   Dial 07 or Press   9   Dial 08 or Press   10     Dial 09 or Press Al 1        BAUD RATE       W nD nS 110    W nD nS 150      W nD nS 300    W nD nS 600    W nD nS 1200      W nD      2400      W nD nS 4800    W nD nS 9600      W nD nS 19200          Dial 10 or Press A7 for 7  data bits and 2 stop bits   Dial 11 or Press      for 8  data bits and 1 stop bit    4  Dial    for next data port   5  Dial       for configuration mode        W 7D 25 22227
171. ed stations     AUTOMATIC PAUSE INSERTION    When the system stores a dialed number for later  redial  it automatically stores a pause whenever the  user watts between digits for at least two seconds   The automatic pause is inserted in the stored number  sequence at the point where the manual pause in  dialing occurred  The length of the pause is fixed at  two seconds by the system     AUTOMATIC PRIVACY  A line can be made private or non private through  programming  In the private mode  a station has  exclusive use of the line during a call  No other Station  can access that line unless it is included through the    IMI 66 083    use of the add on conference feature  In the  non private mode  another station with that line  appearance can gain access at the same time   sometimes known as common line pickup   A line is  specified as private or non private through the line  class of service programming  Through station class  of service programming  a line can be made  non private at a particular station  Also see the  discussions titled  Conference    Add On and Privacy  Release     AUTOMATIC REDIAL  OF BUSY   NUMBER OR UNANSWERED CALL   A busy number or unanswered call can be  automaticaly redialed by activating this feature  Once  automatic redial is activated  the station will select the  line  automatically dial the number  and wait for a  response  It will do this once a minute for  approximately 10 minutes unless deactivated because  that button or another button is pr
172. ees      90 percent relative  non condensing    Standard 50 pin male connectors for connection 10 external  distribution field   Standard  G conductor mini jack  USOC 14C     Serial  pseudo RS 232C   None   7 or 8  programmable    1 or 2  programmable   Programmable in class of service  Xon           Hardware    CTS   500 Feet maximum    3 Volts peak to peak maximum  Approximately 500 Ohms  RCA phono jack    400 Millivolts peak to peak  typical speech   Approximately 500 Ohms  RCA phono jack    1900 Ohms maximum loop  15 000 Ohms minimum    FCC Certified  part 15  Class A    FCC registered  fully protected    LISTED by OSHA accredited  nationally recognized  test laboratory  EIA RS478   Bell publication 48002 guidance   Hearing aid compatible handset    60 hours minimum    CVWUSA 61535 KF E   CVWUSA 61536 MF E   1 38   Telephones Software Cartridge  7714     1 OX14 Image Monitor SO408   7714     1 OX14 Image Speakerphone 50816   77005   5X14 Image LCD Speakerphone 51632    1 9           66 083        DESCRIPTION    ABANDONED HOLD RELEASE  If an on hold party hangs up at the CO PBX end of a  connection  causing an interruption in the line current   the system will drop the line from the hold condition  and return it to service  The time interval between  hang up and line drop is programmable in line class of    service programming with choices of either 50 msec or    350 msec  This feature is usually dependent upon   special arrangements that must be made at the CO  end of the
173. endant Override                                               2 10  External Paging Interface                     2 55                           2 10  Feature  Inhibit     cones nen nose                 ow                      ev ed     2 10  Flexible Ringing Assignments   5  5                          4 4 4           2 10  Flexible Ringing Assignments Of PA Port                                          2 10  Flexible Station And Line Class Of Service Control    lt     lt  s os  2 11  Flexible  Station Numbering Plan                                                2 10  Full Button Programmability Of Features  lt   lt   eo  2 10  Handsfree Answer Inhibit                                       2 11    Hold And   Use Indications                                                 2 11                   Preference               nemini weicher ala oe outa pda ae Sa bs Seu ic iwi  2 11  Intercom Call Progress Tones 04 setae aor E RU PECORE eg Oe MUS IBS    2 11  Intercom         GrOUp  uro deae ee addet ptt                                                     2 11  Intercom Line Timeout                                                    2 11  Last  Number                e ER Ga eR x EXE a   be c      X e 2 11  LCD Messaging P tay gina  OA  MICE Tp CIC  2 12  LCD                 4c               SOE ea    EE                           ACE UTR IDE      teca a           2 12  Line Access Restriction   lt      lt  e o o e e sss  2 12  Line Answer From Any Station  Night Mode                  
174. ent  Station And Line Connections              Typical Line Connections  tt tte  Typical Station Connections      Key Hybrid Configuration            2          dc vl da          AR etal  Al ey           Power                  eed or acid  Auxiliary Interface Connections 555555555555     Typical Common Audible Interface Wiring        Typical External Paging Connection            Typical External Paging Connection     Line             Typical Data Device Connections            Music           Oe      oe oe So      Pee ate ease sees           Add On Expansion Module Configuration    Expansion Module Installation         Software Cartridge Installation and Removal                Data Communications Interconnection Diagram     Location Of Keys On Telephone Faceplate          Call Costing Diagram                                    Remote Programming Block Diagram     Controls and Indicators   s s sss ee  Station Wall Mounting Details                       Overlays                     4 lcs    Line Connections                  Ger Ser oa      a  dns                DNA          Qr feste des p tunc uh     Be Aa       Station Connections  4 Line  E Station        Station Connections  E Line  16 Station                                                       Station Connections  16 Line  32 Station                                      nones  Station Connections  16 Line  32 Station                Line Connections   408 Expansion Module                      Station Connections   408 Expan
175. ent  can nor      relocated     Add on expansion modules are available to expand  station capacity  Refer to Section 3 for complete  details     CABLE CLIPS    Each cabinet mounted 50      male connector is  equipped with a retaining clip  This clip is designed to  secure the mated connection once it is made  The clip  does this by snapping into a slot on the cable mounted  connector when it is pressed together with the  cabinet mounted connector  This retaining clip must  be pulled back slightly to unsnap it before the  connectors can be separated                 6    Table 3 1 Line Connectlons    OMMON EQUIPMEN LJNE JACK   PIN NO    CONN ON PHONE NUMBER    Line 3 RING    Line 4 RING    4 Line  8 Sta  Base Unit  8 Line  16 Sta  Base Unit  16 Lhr  32 Sta Base Unit             Auxiliary 2  Line 4  RING    No Connectlon  Line 6 TIP  Line 5 RING _           10                 B Line  16 Sta  Base Unit  16 Line  32 Sta  Base Unit             Ine 9 RING  Ine 10 RING  No Connectlon             5            a  79    6 Line  32 Sta  Base Unlt    No Connection       Line 11 TIP              66 083 Install     Table 3 2  J l Statlon Connections   4 Line   amp Station Base Unit     25 PAIR CABLE TH PAR                     CONNECTIONS STA  CONNECTIONS    WIRE WIRE COLOR       ES LOCATION  BLUE WHITE            BLUE WHITE esr     PATH  omwaEWHTE      2040   PATH                         5  5                        pam  Reo      BROWN WHITE                           SLATE WHITE Em        _ 
176. ent  on page 4 51     System Alarm Reporting  Special   codes which convey certain system   alarm conditions can be sent to a   station where they will show on the   LCD display    NOTE  Also  choose the alarm  reporting stations  See page  4 35     1  Dial 24   TANDEM ATTN XXX    2  Press Al to toggle between enable and disable   LED On   Enable     OR   Dial 1 to enable   Dial 2 to disable        LED is on    TANDEM ATTN ON    3  Dial    for configuration mode        TANDEM ATTN OFF       1  Dial 27  AUTO STA RELOCAT   2  Press Al to toggle between enable and disable   LED On   Enable    OR   Dial 1 to Enable  Al LED On   Dial 2 to Disable    Dial    for configuration mode       Dial 28     ALARM REPORTS      Press Al to toggle between enable and disable    LED On   Enable    OR   Dial 1 to enable   Dial 2 to disable   3  Dial    for configuration mode     REFERENCE RECORD                 ATTENDANT    ENABLE           DISABLE          DEFAULT   DISABLE    DISABLE           DEFAULT   DISABLE    ALARM REPORT    DEFAULT   DISABLE    Press SPKR to end        Y    DUlUJUEJUOJc                     80 99 INI      Press              7 4 6    for base level           eature Inhibit Programming    Dial 29   FEATURE INHIBIT                features can be disabled   Select feature    ystem wide to provide a basic     Dial 01 to disable Line Group 1    3lephone system for use in   Dial 02 to disable Line Group 2     istallations where a large proportion   Dial 03 to disable Line Group 3
177. environment  Shielded cable may be  required at some sites for long runs  For longer  distances  a limited distance modem must be used to  relay the data communications between the common  equipment and the data device     When preparing a cable for connection to a data  device  refer to the manufacturer   s manual for the  equipment being interfaced and make the following  wiring connections        Wire the common equipment RD  data from device  to common equipment  connection to the device TD   transmit data  connection     e Wire the common equipment TD  data to device  from common equipment  connection to the device  RD  receive data  connection        Wire the common equipment SG  signal ground   connection to the device SG  signal ground   connection           required for proper operation  wire the common  equipment CTS  clear to send status from device to    IMI 66 083    common equipment  connection to the device RTS   request to send  connection     NOTE  The common equipment requires    positive  voltage  with respect to signal ground  in order  to send data     The default data format is as follows  Configure the  data device to match this data format for initial  operation       7 bit data with 2 stop bits and no parity     Baud rate of 300 baud    The Data Ports are located as follows and are  connected as illustrated in Figure 3 12 on the next    page   4 Line   amp Station And 8 Line  16 Station Base Units       Clip terminals 37     40  data port A  and 41   
178. ept line attributes and the master clear   This procedure is usually employed by on site  personnel whenever system needs dictate     Attendant Programming  The attendant  programming is limited to those features which may    need reprogramming by the system attendant  such as     e System clock setting   e System speed dial   e Night transfer of ringing  e Music on hold    e LCD messages    e Station names    e SMDA reports    Alternately  programming can be performed from any  customer provided Video Display Terminal  VDT  with       RS 232 compatible  serial interface  VDT  programming is completely menu driven and easy to  follow  It is arranged somewhat differently from station  port programming categories to facilitate menu usage   VDT programming is discussed in Section 4 of this  chapter     Prior to taking any programming action  determine the  desired parameters and requirements  Record this  data on the programming reference tables provided for  this purpose along side the station programming  procedures in the following sections     Block programming can be performed after a  configuration has been programmed for a_ particular  line or station  Block programming will program a  group of lines or stations to have the same  configuration as the programmed one  This feature  eliminates the need to individually program every line  or station that requires the same configuration     PROGRAMMING OVERLAYS    A programming overlay is included with each system  for use in 
179. eral  telephones are located close to each other  each user chooses a different personal ring tone   Previous software provided four different tone choices  This software enhancement increases the  distinctive ring choices to six  The personal ring tone choices now provided include the following  distinctive tones    1  666 571 Hz   16 Hz warble 4  1000 800 Hz   23 Hz warble   2  1000 800 Hz   16 Hz warble 5  500 444 Hz   16 Hz warble   3  666 571 Hz   23 Hz warble 6  500 444 Hz   23 Hz warble    In the past  the Federal Communications Commission  FCC  has required that telephone system  manufacturers provide a hardware strap that installers could move to distinguish between hybrid  system and key system operation  The DigiTech system provided this strap at either the Jt  station connector or at a special terminal strip  depending upon the system model   The installer  strapped two terminals together at either the 66        station connector block or at the special  terminal strip to select the hybrid mode  Recent rulings by the FCC have eliminated the need for  the hardware strap  With this software release  whenever the programmer assigns lines to line  groups the DigiTech system automatically assumes the hybrid mode  The hybrid system mode  may still incur a higher monthly tariff to the telephone company  therefore  the FCC still requires  that the installer report the equipment type category designation number  KF for key system  MF  for hybrid system  to the telephone co
180. ergency numbers  Minimum  length of an emergency number is 1 digit  maximum length is 12 digits  Users may dial  emergency numbers manually  or through system speed dial  personal speed dial  last number  redial  or automatic redial    with or without account code entry     ACCOUNT CODE ENTRY   Users may enter account codes after they select a line  or they may enter the code without  selecting a line at all  When a code is entered without line selection  the code will apply to any  line subsequently selected at that station for the next call attempted manually or through  automatic redial  system speed dial  personal speed dial  or last number redial     If an Account Code button is programmed at the telephone  the user can press this button for  automatic account code entry  If no such button is programmed  the user must press          and  then dial    0 4  The prompt    Account Code    will appear on the top line of the telephone s LCD   The user then enters account code digits to be verified  followed by any additional digits   necessary to make up the required length of the account code     If the system is set for Verified Account Codes  a verification attempt will be made after the entire  code has been entered  Failure by the system to verify the code will cause  Error  to display in  the LCD  The user may re enter account code digits at this point  If the verification attempt is  successful  or if the system does not require that the code be verified   the LCD will 
181. ermining call costing  making it is possible to apply reasonable rates for the  entire country     The system is arranged to automatically provide a  report whenever the costed call storage reaches 95  percent of capacity  Additionally  programming can be  effected that causes these reports to be printed  automatically at a specific time of day     There are five different SMDA reports which can be  produced     2 3    aan        Of System Features IMI 66 083        Detailed report sorted by stations   e Detailed report sorted by account codes  e Line summary report       Department summary report        general output of all records    Upon completion of report printing  all records used for  the reports can be deleted  Any call records created  between the time the report printout was started and  completed will not be deleted  If the reports are        deleted after they are printed  a later command to  delete records will delete all records at that point and  not just the ones that were printed in the previously  generated reports  Programming action can be taken  to always delete the records after they have been  printed  The attendant has the ability to request  particular reports to be printed at any time they are  required     Account codes can be established to allow system  users to identify calls by category or by any other  desired grouping so that costing by that category or  grouping can be reported  Department numbers can  be defined and stations assigned to di
182. essed or the handset  is lifted  The feature cycle is timed and does not have  busy detection circuitry  Because of this  if operating  handsfree when the called party answers  the handset  must be taken off hook to prevent the caller from  being cut off by the timing cycle  Automatic redial is a  designated programmable button position and must be  programmed by the user to be active but no class of  service programming is required     AUTOMATIC STATION RELOCATION  With this feature  the system will automatically  recognize a particular station should that station be  relocated to    new station port  When installed at the  new port location  the station will continue to provide  the same class of service parameters and respond to  the same extension numbers as it did at the original  station port  This system feature is enabled with  system class of service programming     AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT INTERFACE    A non key system telephone device or a data device  can be connected to a line ahead of the common  equipment by using the auxiliary equipment interface   The system can detect an off hook condition in the  device connected to the auxiliary equipment interface   and turn on the status light for that line at the button  system telephones   t does this to indicate that the  line is busy and not available for station use  Auxiliary  equipment interface connections provide connections  to lines 2 and 4  Pressing the line button on a system  station cannot interrupt an external
183. fferent  departments so that call cost reports can be produced  on a department by department basis     Feature programming is provided in call costing and  SMDA Reporting class of service programming   Stations are assigned to specific SMDA departments  through station class of service programming  The  LCD speakerphone display of costed calls is also  enabled through station class of service programming     CALL FORWARDING ON ALL CALLS    This feature allows a station user to designate another  station or the attendant station as the recipient of all  calls normally directed to ring at the user s station  If  enabled when night transfer of ringing is activated  the  night ringing assignment of the station is also  forwarded  Calls that are forwarded to a recipient  station can be forwarded again from that station to  another station  Thus  two levels of call forwarding on  all calls can occur  first  from station A to station B  and then  from station B to station C  For each  intercom call that is received while calls are forwarded   a short tone burst will occur at the user s station as     reminder that call forwarding is enabled  When a  programmable button is programmed to serve as a  call forward button  the associated LED will turn on  when the button is pressed to indicate that the feature  is enabled  If the call forward button is programmed as  a second level to a DSS BLF button  the LED  indication is always reserved for BLF indication  On  LCD speakerphones that
184. first orioritv level of costing  The tables are  searched on a first match basis  This means that the first programmed entry that matches the call is the one that is used  A search is not made for the  best possible match  Matched calls are costed with values programmed into the call rate tables that are assigned to the exception tables  Use   exception tables to provide very specific exceptions to a bracket of calls similar to the following example     Example  With all calls to area code 804 costed per a particular rate  make an exception for 804 555 1212 by programing exception table 1 with that    number  Since exception table entries are the highest priority  the values in the call rate table assigned to exception table 1 are applied to all calls  made to the 804 555  212 number     2  OFFICE CODE BAND TABLES  LOCAL CALLS     Calls that do not match exception tables are measured for the number of digits dialed  Calls with numbers that are have less than 10 digits  local calls   are compared to entries in office code banding tables  Office code band tables are the second     priority level of costing for local calls  They provide a  means of assigning local office codes into different bands and applying a separate call costing rate table to each band  Bands 1   7 are associated  with call rate tables 18   24 respectively  Use office code band tables to cost calls made within a specific area code but to sites located at different  geographic distances from the calling loca
185. further        button assignment   OR   Dial      for next button mapping feature    OR     Dial        k for configuration mode     Save Button  The SAVE button is 1  Dial 56   BUTTON MAPPING    pressed to store the last dialed number   2  Dial 08   ASSIGN SAVE    for later re dial  Any idle button can be   3  Select button to be programmed   programmed to serve as the SAVE   Press A1   A14  B1   B8   button  4  Select station ports to be programmed  with a SAVE button     Station 10   57  Dial 10   57   5  Dial    for further Save button assignment   OR   Dial       for next button mapping feature    OR   Dial         for configuration mode     NOTE  Also refer to DND inhibit on  page 4 8 and DND override on  page 4 24     Press SPKR to end                                                80 99 INI    Sr v      call back button  When a user presses    Press            7 4 6    for base level   FEATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD    Zone Page All Call Button  A button 1  Dial 56   BUTTON MAPPING     SEE CHART ON PAGE 4 49           be programmed to provide a station   2  Dial 09   ASSIGN ZONE    with one button access to all call and 3  Select button to be programmed   zone paging    Press   1   A14  B1   B8   4  Dial 1  3forzone1 3   ASSIGN ZONE X     OR   Dial 4 for all call   ASSIGN ALL CALL      Select station ports to be programmed     Station 10   57  Dial 10   57   6  Dial   for further paging button assignment    OR   Dial       for ne
186. g a line is not necessary if     e A priority line has been assigned to a telephone  prime       feature enabled      e The telephone automatically picks an          line for use  when the handset is lifted  idle line preference feature  enabled      e Listen for dial tone     Dial number    When party answers     Lii handset    To end call      Hang up handset     LINE GROUP ACCESS  If the system provides line groups       Press ITCM       Dial line group access code  9   line group 1    81   82     83   line group 4    Listen for dial tone      Dial number     LINE AND LINE GROUP QUEUING  When a line or line group is busy  a station can be  placed in a queue to await the availability of it     line group 2    line group 3    To queue for a busy line      Press HOLD      Press line button of busy line     short tone burst  will sound  When line is free  station will sound  several quick tone bursts    To queue for a busy line group      Press ITCM      Dial line group access code  9  81  82  83       Hear busy tone     Dial    8 and hang up  When line group is free   station will sound several quick tone bursts     e Lii handset  hear line dial tone  and place call   To cancel queuing    Press ITCM    e Dial  8  and hang up     INTERCOMCALLING   Intercom calls may be manually dialed or  automatically dialed using a preprogrammed Direct  Station Selection  DSS  button     VOICE CALLING    To voice call an Intercom station     Lift handset     Press ITCM       Dial extension n
187. g conditions  before they are reported as department calls        They must be incoming calls  Outgoing calls are  not reported in the DCD report        The port number of the line which received the  call must be one that is assigned to a department     e The port number of the station which answered  the call must be assigned to a department     e A DCD report consists of the following columns  of information   Station Number  The station name or extension  number of the station being reported   Idle Time  The amount of time that the station is  on hook and available to answer a call     Dept  Calls  The amount of time spent on  incoming calls that rang into the department and  calls that were transferred to the department   Hold Time  The amount of time that department  calls spent in an on hold state at a particular  station   Avg  Dept  Calls  The average time per call   including on hold time  that a station spent on a  call   Wrap Up Time  The time that a station spent in a  wrap up mode doing such things as follow up  paperwork  While a station is in a wrap up mode   it does not receive department calls  The station  user sets a wrap up mode by pressing SHIFT  DND and repeats the procedure to clear the  wrap up mode   Missed Calls  The total number of calls that are  not answered at a station and that are cycled by  the system to another station for answering    1  166 083    Other Calls  This is a summation of the time  spent on outgoing call activity  incoming call 
188. ginally parked the call     CALL PICKUP    DIRECTED    A station user can dial a code  followed by the  extension number of a ringing station  to answer the  ringing call     CALL PICKUP     GROUP    If a call rings to any station in a pre programmed  group and another user in the group wishes to answer  the call  that user must dial the group pickup code to  answer the call  Four different groups can exist with  any number of stations in a group  Overlap is provided  by allowing stations to be in more than one group thus  enabling those stations to pick up for stations in more  than one group  Stations within the system are placed  in logical answering groups by programming action   Group stations together using the station class of  service programming     CALL TRANSFER  SCREENED    Screened call transfer allows outside calls to be  transferred from one station to another  via the   intercom link  in one of two ways  If both stations have  access to the line  a common line pickup transfer can    2 4           66 083    be effected  If the other station does not have access  to the incoming line  transfer can still take place using  the system transfer feature  For a screened transfer   a call is transferred to another station with a  pre transfer announcement by the transferring patty   Transferring calls is accomplished with the  TRANS CONF button  Also refer to the discussion  titled        Transfer  Unscreened     CALL TRANSFER   UNSCREENED     An active call can be tran
189. grammed on a per station basis  to provide ringing line preference on all lines  programmed for ringing at the station     When ringing line preference is enabled at a station   taking the handset off hook automatically connects the  station to any outside line that is ringing at it  A line  button will not have to be pressed  lf a station also has  prime line assigned  the prime line will always be  answered first even though it may be the second line   to ring  The ability of a particular station to answer a  ringing line without line selection is enabled by the  station class of service programming     SAVED NUMBER REDIAL  This feature enables a button action to save the first 16  digits of the last number manually dialed from the  buttonpad  The saved number can be redialed at a  later time  The saved number is permanently available  for later use until it is replaced with a new number     SECURE OFF HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE  With the secure off hook voice announce  SOHVA   feature  a secure announcement can be made from  one station to another station that is off hook and busy    2 14    1  166 083    on a call  A station being operated in a handsfree  mode cannot receive    SOHVA With SOHVA  the  announcement is delivered and responded to in a  secure manner that prevents the distant party from  hearing either the announcement or the response  The  announcement is preceded with a tone alert and is  delivered to the handset receiver of the telephone  The  announcing caller re
190. gramming  System Speed Dial               5 14  Pubiiions Overview                        2    Pulse Tone Switchable       caliFiash Aon den eu e Ad  RE  A d e hod 4 6  5 6  Related Publications                        1 2  Remote Programming And Administration          2 14  Remote Programming Block Diagram             4 86  Remote Programming VDT                  4 84  Resistance Check                       3 31  Response Message Button  Programming          5 12  Response Messaging                     2 14  Ringer                      Number                     9  Ringer Volume Control 0                   5 24  Ringing Line Preference                 2 14  4 27    Index    Index    20                                     a            5  Saved Number Redial                  2 14  5 4  Screened Transfer                        5 4  Secure                        Announce              2 14  Secure Off Hook Voice Announce  Answering Calls      5 1  Secure               Voice Announce Sutton           2 15  Secure Off Hook Voice Announce Disable          4 33  Secure Off Hook Voice Announce Groups       2 15  4 33  Secure Off Hook Voice Announce  Making Calls         5 3  Secure Off Hook Voice Announce Originate   Button  Programming                      5 13  Self Diagnostics                        2 16  Service Observing                 2 16  4 27  5 10  SMOR Pott                          119  Software Cartridge                      3 27  Software Cartridge Installation and Remov
191. guration mode    DigiTech System Software Enhancements TAB 099    FEATURE BENEFITS  Account VDT COS PROGRAMMING    Codes  cont    1  Enter COS programming    2  Enter 1 for system COS programming  3  Enter 8 for SMDA programming    4  Enter 6 for account codes    To set account codes     Enter 1    If the Verified Account Code Length is 3  the system will prompt you to  Enter Account  Codes  0   999          Type in valid account code s   delimited by commas  If you enter fewer than three digits  the system will assume leading zeros    If the Veriiied Account Length is between 4 and 16  the system will respond    Table is  Full   if all possible account codes are stored  or  Enter   ccount Code     If the prompt  Enter Account Code    appears  type in only one valid account code        system will respond with    Command Accepted  and will allow subsequent  account code entry     If you type in more or less than the number of digits specified as the verified  account code length  the system will respond with        Command Rejected          To clear account codes     Enter 2    If the Verified Account Code Length is 3  the system will prompt you to  Enter Account  Codes  0   999        Type in valid account code s  to be deleted  delimited by commas  If you enter fewer than three digits  the system will assume leading zeros    If the Verified Account Length is between 4 and 16  the system will respond  Table is  Empty   if there are no valid account codes in the  list  or  En
192. he discussions  titled  Do Not Disturb and Executive Attendant  Override     DUAL INTERCOM    This feature provides for two separate intercom lines at  the same station  One intercom line is fixed and is  accessed with the ITCM button  The other intercom  line is programmable and is accessed by a  programmable button selected for that purpose by  class of service programming  Calls are handled on  the intercom lines in much the same manner as   outside calls are handled using the line buttons   Special considerations are as follows     e Distant party hang up causes intercom link to drop   e Intercom call to station already busy on intercom  rings in subdued fashion and flashes indicator   associated with other intercom button    e With both intercom lines busy  a third intercom call  results in a secure off hook voice announce  if  enabled  at busy station    e Pressing a DSS button while on an active intercom  call will drop the distant party unless the automatic   hold feature is enabled for the intercom line  through class of service programming  The hold  button can be used  however  to place an intercom  call on hold before selecting the other intercom  line for use    e Any action taken on the intercom by a station  being observed via the service observing feature  will cause the observing station to return to an idle  state     The station class of service button mapping procedure  assigns a programmable button to serve as the second  intercom button     DYNAMIC LINE 
193. he strap     The KF and MF designations are equipment type  categories as stipulated in FCC rules and regulations   Pan 68  and appear as part of the FCC Registration    Number on the equipment label  The appropriate  registration number must be reported to the telephone  company at the time of connection along with other  FCC mandated information  Operationally  the hybrid  configuration enables a PBX feature that may incur a  higher monthly tariff to the telephone company  This  feature allows dial access to  automatic selection of   outgoing lines  The specific system feature that is  enabled by the multifunction  hybrid  configuration  5     e Line Group  Including Dial Access     m i            50         CLIP TERMINALS    STATION CONNECTOR BLOCK   4 LINE  8 STATION BASE UN  AND 8 LINE  I6 STATION BASE    ADD CONFIGURATION  STRAP FOR HYBRID  OPERATION                BARR IER STRIP   16  LINE  32 STATION BASE UNIT1    Figure 3 6  Key Hybrid Configuration    3 14           66 083            POWER FAILURE STATION industry standard  single line telephone  such as a  CONNECTIONS Comdial model 2500 xx  can be connected to a power    The system provides a tip and ring pair connected to failure pair and used to provide communications   line 1 as an emergency power failure circuit  This capability until the AC power to the system is restored   circuit is active during a commercial AC power failure The power failure pair is located as follows and as   if an external battery assemb
194. ial    for next station feature    OR   Dial    3k for configuration mode     m       EFAULT   SOHVA ENABLED       puc            D T ALL STA     Secure Off Hook          Announce 1  Dial 53     STATION FEATURES   SOHVA  Groups  Arrange the ability of   2  Dial 30     SOHVA GROUP     station port to originate and or receive  3  Dial 1  6 for gp  1 8   SOHVA GROUP X  SOHVA calls by assigning SOHVA   4  Select all station ports to receive SOHVA group  calling groups to station ports  Certain Station 10     57  Dial 10   57  station ports can be arranged together 5  Dial    and re          peat steps 4 and 5 for additional  for SOHVA calling between one another      while other station ports in the system                       are excluded from this group  Eight ee  different    fixed configuration SOHVA Dial       for next station feature    groups are provided by the system  _       mE  Dial          for configuration mode        280 99 IWI                                                       Press            7 4 6    for base level         EATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD  DataSecurlty Port  While port is active      Dial 53     STATION FEATURES  PORT  ENTRY PORT  ENTRY                      nacall  this feature prevents any      Dial 26   DATA SECURE PORT       26             icomingtones associated with other 3  Select station port for programming           ystemfeaturesfrominterruptingthecall    Station 10 57  Dial 10 57                 
195. ice  1A2  Emulation                2 3 Configuration  System                     4 5  Battery Back Up                      2 3  33 Connection  AC Power                     3 3  Battery Back Up Interface                   23 Connections  Data Communications                 3 29  Blank Buttons ICD    ee      4 42 Connections  Data Device                   3 20  BLF Lights                ONE nai             5 27 Connections  Line                       3 5  Block Programming                 2 3  4 19  4 51 Connections  Power Failure Station              3 15  Button Assignment  Default                  4 41 Connections  Station                         3 5  Button Mapping                        441 Controls and Indicators                    518    1 1    Index    Le             m BaudRate                         4 7  Data Communications                     3 29  Data Communications Interconnection Diagram           3 30  Data Device Connections                3 20  3 21  Data Printer Service                      4 64  Data Security                           2 6  Data Security Port                       4 34  Default     System  Line and Station               4 4  Default Button Assignment                  4 41  Default Functional Program                      2 6  Default Toll Restriction                  2 6  4 59  Delayed Ringing                         2 6  Delete SMDA Records By Attendant              4 8  Departmental Calling Distribution Report             2 6  Departmental S
196. iction will be  activated at the station   1  Determine the types of dialing restrictions which must be imposed on the system  Typically  this includes access codes which result in toll charges   and certain local numbers as desired   2   f the restricted dialing codes will be imposed consistently on most or all stations in the system  list them on one or two tables    wide variation in the  dialing restrictions is planned  spread the listing out across several tables   3  Strategically group the listings on the tables so that a list of restrictions can be applied to a particular station or group of stations   4  Designate each table as a DENY table or as an ALLOW table  The numbers entered in a DENY table are prevented from being dialed  ALLOW  tables take precedence over DENY tables  Therefore  an entry in an allow table will provide an explicit exception to an entry in a DENY table  Note  that the system always permits the dialing of any number not explicitly denied  Also  system speed dial numbers will not be toll restricted unless  specified by station COS programming     Example A  Provide a simple and broad toll restriction format by creating a DENY table with two entries   e ENTRY  1    1  ENTRY  2    0  This format prevents all long distance and operator calls     Example B  Prevent the dialing of all numbers within the  804  area code  while allowing the dialing of one specific number within that area code  by  entering 1804 in a DENY table and 18049782200 in an ALL
197. identifying the buttons required for  programming  The overlay fits over the buttons of the  programming station  A full size copy of the  programming overlay is included at the end of this  chapter for use as needed     System Programming IMI 66 083       SECTION 2  CLASS OF SERVICE PROGRAMMING    Class of service programming is usually performed by remainder of the system variables to remain set to  the system installer  Class of service programming their default values   procedures provide the means for programming all of Perform class of service programming as shown    the system variables  The installer may elect to below     D Mark the desired selections in the  charts to record programming needs     program only the line attributes and allow the           Enter the base level programming mode   Press             7 46      The display will show   CONFIG  MODE          TYPICAL FEATURE PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE          Automatic Hold For Intercom    With this  1  Dial 53   STATION FEATURES               ENTRY   POR LENTRY   PORT JENIRY   feature enabled  pressing another 2  Dial 12   TCM AUTO HOLD  Ho   Je N     49    intercom button or line button while 3 Select station ports to be programmed  ua   43         Pes                              Station 10   57  Dial 10  57  ta           Nas    automatically place this existing call on  4  Dial    fof next station fea ture  HA   Ta      Te       hold   OR  H8                          7                    591 15 114     20   ____
198. ight transfer  of ringing  is      attendant controlled  feature that transfers the day ringing program of all  incoming calls to a particular station or stations for  off hour or special purpose answering  The night  transfer mode can only be activated from station 10 or  12  The individual lines at each station that are to be  transferred with this feature are selected by station  class of Service programming     2 13    Description Of System Feat     ON HOOK DIALING    Every station provides manual and or automatic dialing  while the station handset is on hook  An internal  speaker monitors call progress for completion   The  handset must be taken off hook to provide the voice  link on non speakerphone stations      ORIGINATING DENIED    The ability to originate calls on certain lines can be  denied at individual stations through system  programming  The originating denied feature is  programmed on a per station per line basis   Originating denied does not prevent a user from  answering a ringing line  retrieving a held call or  receiving a transferred call  Call origination on a line is  denied at a particular station by the station class of  service programming     PBWCENTREWCO COMPATIBLE    System features and programmable buttons support  the requirements of most PBXs  Central Offices  and  CENTREX systems  Numbers    5  55   programmable pauses  and flash signals can be made  a part of every stored number for access to host  system feature codes     PERSONALIZED RINGI
199. ights is enabled by class of service  programming and is usually limited to one station in  the system  This station is designated as a central  message desk     To turn on MW light from central message  desk      Press               Dial             Dial extension number of station to be alerted   The  MW light of called station will flash      To turn off MW light from central message  desk         Press  TCM     Dial  3       Dial extension number of station that was alerted    The MW light of called station will turn off       To turn off MW light while delivering message       Press             5 5    To receive message at an alerted station      Observe flashing MW light      Lift handset      Press        HOLD    e Connection to message desk is    LCD MESSAGING    System supplied messages can be set at a station to  be displayed by a calling LCD speakerphone    automatic     To turn on message       Press ITCM       Dial   02     Dial message code number  1   0   See attendant  for list of messages available    e Press MNTR  SPKR   Intercom light flashes    The default messages of  BACK         and              may   be provided for use     If  BACK AT  is provided as message 1  then dial time  in twelve hour format after dialing message access  code 1          CALL    is provided as message 2  then         extension that calls are forwarded to after dialing  message access code 2     To turn off message     Press ITCM         Dial   02     To send message for assistan
200. igned     Dial    for next PA option   OR   Dial       for configuration mode     Continued on next page       Press SPKR to end        680 99 IWI     A Options   continued Continued from previous page    Ringing Tracking Relay  1 Dial 60          ORT   2  Dial 5   RELAY XXXXXXX   3  Choose relay tracking assignment    Press Al to toggle between   paging port and station port 17      LED On  lt  paging port    OR   Dial 1 for station port 17   RELAY STA  17   Dial 2 for paging port   RELAY        PORT       Dial    for next PA option    OR   Dial       for configuration mode     PressITCM    7 46  for base level   SSS er     Extended DTMF Tones For 1 Dial 26  DTMF          XXXX   Automatic Dlallng  When a number 2  Choose DTMF tone length   is automatically dialed  autodial    Press Al or dial 01   60 msec    saved number redial  etc   the length    Press A2      dial 02   80 msec    of the generated DTMF tones are as   Press      or dial 03   100 msec    set with this programming option    Press   4 or dial 04   120 msec    This is useful when the automatically     Press   5      dial 05   160 msec    dialed number is to be used to access   Press   6 or dial 66   240 msec     answering machines  banking  computers  voice mail  etc that require        Press A8      dial 08   400 msec   DTMF that   th                                   Press A9 or dial 09   480 msec     Press A10 or dial 10   560 msec       Press All or dial 11   720 msec      Press Al 2 or dial 12   880 msec  
201. implify  and clarify the programming procedures  Class of  service programming access is as follows     e Installer dials  JTCM   746      e Administrator dials             236       Attendant dials             0   e User dials                  Class of service programming can be performed using  instructions provided in Chapter 4  Sections 2 3 and 4     CLASS OF SERVICE PROGRAMMING   VIDEO DISPLAY TERMINAL   An asynchronous  serial data terminal with an RS 232  interface can be used to effect class of service  programming through menu driven procedures  VDT  programming provides a menu driven approach to  programming as discussed in Chapter 4  Section 5     CLASS OF SERVICE   PROGRAM PRINTOUT  Connection terminals are provided to interface an  RS 232 compatible  asynchronous serial data printer  to the system  The connected printer will provide a  printout of class of service and toll restriction records   The data printer service class of service programming  determines the nature and extent of each requested  printout  The system class of service programming  specifies the bit length and baud rate of the data     COMMON AUDIBLE   RINGER INTERFACE  Connections are available at the wmmon equipment  that provides  dry contact  relay closures whenever an  incoming line rings  These contact closures track the  ringing pattern and can be used to control an external       tion Of System Features IMI66 083    CONFERENCING   ADD ON    With this feature  a station  operating in a pr
202. ing intercom line  In  general  attendants will probably desire this feature so  they can handle multiple calls  while other station users  may prefer to have a message taken when they are  already busy on a call     ZONE PAGING        STATION  SPEAKERS     Zone paging allows groups of stations to receive  announcements through the station speakers  The  programming can enable zone paging in up to four  different zones  Zone paging can also be received at  the paging port where it can be connected to the input  of an external paging amplifier  The ability of each  station to originate and or receive a page and the  arrangement of the paging into different zones are  controlled by station class of service programming   Zone paging through the paging port is enabled by  System class of service programming  Also refer to the  discussion titled  AJf Call Paging  Via Station  Speakers     2 18           66 083    Installa    CHAPTER3  INSTALLATION    SECTION 1  STANDARD INSTALLATION DETAILS    MOUNTING CONSIDERATIONS       The common equipment cabinet should be attached  vertically to any sturdy  flat surface  It may be  vertically rack mounted if desired        The cabinet must be located within six feet of a  proper electrical outlet  The system requires a  dedicated 117VAC 15 AMP circuit  with a third wire  ground  supplied to a standard electrical outlet   NEMA 5 15R         The distance between the common equipment and  the TELCO PBX jacks must be 25 feet or less as  per FCC 
203. ious Menu    Enter Selection       SYSTEM COS MENU SELECTIONS    Selection 1  System defaults    Defautt Ail System Data      Default Ail Line Data    Defautt Ail Station Data  Defautt Selected Station Data    Pulse Dial on All Lines      Tone Dial on Ail Lines  Default key Mapping on ail Stations    57     e Selection 2  System Options       Voice Tone Announce First on Intercom   Choose either Voice or Tone signailing as  standard intercom signalling method       Station Message Desk  Assign or clear one  station port as the central message desk        Assign Extension Number to Port  Gives a  station flexible extension numbers from 2   4  digits         Assign Pilot Number to Department  Gives an  entire department one extension number        Music on Hold       Do Not Disturb Inhibit       Station Monitoring  Visual ring indication for  station with BLF appearance at programmed  station can be enabled or disabled     e Tandem Attendent  One or both attendants can  receive timed hold recall and recall from  transfer        Voice Mail Auto Transfer  Enables immediate  line transfer when voice mail unit is included with  system          Disable Stations  Disable station ports     System Alarm Reporting      PA Options  Enables direct ringing  delayed  ringing  or night transfer  of ringing  and zone  paging on the PA port  Also chooses ringing  port relay control as either paging port or station    port 17     The station    be programmed must be identified by  port number  
204. ired  press        button to store a hookflasi  6  Press TRANS CONF button to save the number   7  Repeat steps 2 6 for all speed dial numbers     OR    Press    for configuration mode     Press SPKR to end              JJ IV    DUZUWEIDO d                 SYSTEM SPEED           RECORD                  as       gt                          coi c                                                            CX 97 01 O  i    i                          lt              c   o cO COX       4 4                                  Ole         Ele Ete Ete E s    LO   OI CO       OI      OI           47 42  RU                       OX    3  lt                     as  an  el  24    NONE AS GND       DEFAULT              Press  TCM     7 4 6    for base level        EM  FEATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY  REFERENCE RECORD  Night Transfer  of ringing   The 1  Dial 03     NIGHT XFER                         DISABLE  attendant can place the system into the  2  Press Al to toggle between enable and disable    DEFAULT   DISABLED    night transfer  of ringing  mode of  LED On   Enabled    operation  While in this mode  special  OR   line station ringing assignments are Dial 1 to enable  enabled   Al LED on      NIGHT XFER ON    NOTE  See night transfer of tinging on Dial 2 to disable     NIGHT XFER OFF    page 4 37 for line station 3  Dial    for configuration mode   ringing assignments    Music on Hold  Music is provided to     Press 04                                   DISABL    ou
205. is chapter  provides a detailed discussion of the features  provided by the digital telephone system       Chapter 3  Installation  This chapter provides  detailed installation instructions and connection  details     e Chapter 4  Programming  This chapter provides  detailed programming instructions for setting the  operating parameters of the system     e Chapter 5  Operation  This chapter summarizes  operating procedures and provides special tone  and indicator details       Chapter 6  Maintenance  Special maintenance  details are provided in this chapter     RELATED PUBLICATIONS  Related publications  which contain additional  information applicable to this system  are available  from the manufacturer     They are as follows   GENERAL INFORMATION        IMI 01 005 Handling Of Electrostatically Sensitive  Components    USER INFORMATION      GCA 70  82 Attendants Guide      GCA 70 1 83 System Users Guide             70 1 84 Station Users Guide    1 2            99 983                System Overview    ION 3    HARDWARE SUMMARY    The digital telephone system consists of an electronic  Key Service Unit  KSU  base unit  usually referred to  as common equipment  optional expansion modules to  extend station and line capacities as required  a  software cardridge containing the operating system  programming  dedicated digital electronic key  telephones  and interconnecting wiring consisting of  small  2   or 4  conductor  twisted pair cable     The station and line capacity of th
206. it is busy  no further choice is made  No  class of service is required  Also refer to the  discussion titled  Automatic Pause Insertion     LCD MESSAGING  Standard and system supplied custom display  messages can be set by dialing a specific code at any  station  Such messages are to be received and  displayed by any LCD speakerphone that calls the  station which set the message  When a message is  set  the intercom light at the setting station will flash to  indicate that the feature is active     LCD SUPPORT  The system supports the use of digital telephones  having a Liquid Crystal Display  LCD   The display is  capable of providing the station user with a visual  presentation of  call cost  call duration  number dialed   name of called station  name of active feature  date  and time  and programming prompts     LINE ACCESS RESTRICTION  Refer to the discussion titled  Access Denied     LINE ANSWER FROM ANY   STATION  NIGHT MODE   When the attendant programs the system for nighttime  operation using the night transfer of ringing feature  the  line answer from any station feature is made active   With this feature  a user can dial an access code over  the intercom line to allow him to answer any ringing  outside line  The line need not be ringing at the user s  station for this feature to be used     LINE GROUPS    Outside lines can be grouped together in up to four  different groups  Each group is accessible through a  unique dialing code or automaticaly selected with the 
207. ital apparatus set out in the  Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department  of Communications     Le present appareil num  rique n   met pes de bruits  radio  lectriques d  passant les limites applicables aux  appareils num  riques  de la class A  prescrites dans le  R  glement sur le brouillage radioelectrique   dict   par le  minist  re des Communications du Canada     RINGER EQUIVALENCE NUMBER    The REN of each line is 0 48  The FCC requires the  installer to determine the total REN for each line  and record  it at the equipment           3 32           66 083    System Programming    CHAPTER4  SYSTEMPROGRAMMING    SECTION 1  GENERAL INFORMATION    Configuration programming is performed from station  port 10 or station port 12  The programming station  should be an LCD Speakerphone  Any digital  telephone can be installed at station port 10 or 12 and  used for programming but LCD feedback of the  programming operations will not be available   Programming commands will not be accepted from  any other station port in the system  Station 10 or 12  configuration programming consists of the following  categories     Class Of Service Programming  This class of  service programming is unlimited as to the features  that can be programmed using it  Class of service  programming is usually performed by the installer  when the system is first put into service     Administration Programming  The administration  programming can be used to program all system  features exc
208. ivate mode   can add up to four other stations to an outside call     CONFERENCING   MULTILINE  This feature will allow one station to access up to four  outside lines at the same time resulting in a conference  arrangement  Conferencing is established through the  use of the TRANS CONF button     CONFERENCING     UNSUPERVISED    After a conference between an internal party and a  maximum of two external parties has been   established  this feature allows the internal party to  drop out of the conference by dialing a special code   The conference between the two outside parties  continues in an unsupervised condition    Also refer to  the discussion titled  Conferencing   Multiline     DATA SECURITY    This data security feature will prevent any type of tone   DTMF  camp on  barge in  etc   from interrupting a   call that is active on a port programmed with the   feature  This prevents interference to non voice  communications from occurring when the port is being  used as a data port  when operating a modem through  an OPX port for  example   Use station class of service  programming to enable a data security port     DEFAULT FUNCTIONAL PROGRAM    At initial power up of the system  the operating features  are set to a specific group of operating conditions   defautt conditions   The defautt conditions provide a  complete operating system for normal use    can be  let as    defaulted system or reprogrammed as  desired  Defauft conditions can be reset if desired  A  System can
209. iversal service order code   USOC  outlet jack supplied by the telephone operating  company  If the installation site does not have the proper  outlet  ask the telephone company business off ice to install  one  The correct outlet jack for this system is either a type  RJ21 X or type RJ14C     PARTY LINES AND COIN LINES    Local telephone company regulations may not permit  connections to party lines and coin lines by anyone except  the telephone operating company     TROUBLESHOOTING    If a service problem occurs  first try to determine if the  trouble is in the on site system or in the telephone company  equipment  Disconnect all equipment not owned by the  telephone company    if this corrects the problem  the faulty equipment must not be  reconnected to the telephone line until the problem has been  corrected  Any trouble that causes improper operation of the  telephone network may require the telephone company to    discontinue service to the trouble site after they notify the  user of the reason     REPAIR AUTHORIZATION    FCC regulations do not permit repair of customer owned  equipment by anyone except the manufacturer  their  authorized agent  or others who might be authorized by the  FCC  However  routine repairs can be made according to  the maintenance instructions in this publication  provided  that all FCC restrictions are obeyed     RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE    The electronic key system contains incidental radio  frequency generating circuitry and  if not in
210. l  continues  message cannot be delivered until called  party picks up handset  however  called station will  sound intercom ringing    e Deliver message     e Wait on line for reply   If the calling station does not have a SOHVA button  programmed       Lii handset     Make intercom call       Hear SOHVA warning tones  six quick tone bursts    If busy signal sounds  message cannot be delivered  until called party picks up handset  however  called  station will sound intercom ringing    If calling from an LCD speakerphone         Called station may send non verbal message  response for display  As non verbal response  message is displayed  calling station is  disconnected     SPEED DIALING    To dial station speed dial numbers       Press keypad digit 0   9 for desired personal speed  dial nume    If on line listen to dial tone        D HOLD and then press desired keypad digit  o 9     System Operation      To dial system speed dial numbers   e Press          Press keypad digits 01     99 for desired system  speed TE         If on line listen to dial tone       Press HOLD    and then press desired keypad  digits 01   99     AUTOMATICDIALING    To automatically dial numbers     Press desired programmable button        f desired programmable button is also programmed  for DSS  one button intercom  calling       Press HOLD        then press desired programmable  button     AUTOMATIC REDIALING    To activate automatic redial       Press programmable button pre programmed for  tha
211. l receive  music while on hold if the system is  0 equipped  To  provide reassurance to the caller during ringing it is  recommended that a music source be connected to  the system  The call will remain in a held state until it is  answered or until the department transfer recall  timeout period has ended  When the recall timeout  period has ended  the call will return to the transferring  station     Intercom calls that are made to the department will test  the department stations for busy or a        Ifall  stations are busy  a busy tone is returned to the caller   Intercom calls will not camp on at the department but  will go to the overflow station     2 7              Of System Features IMI66 083    Further  the system camp on feature cannot be used  to camp on to a department     Subsequent calls to a department on a particular line  always try the next station in the department from  whichever station serviced the last call on that line   This means that if department stations 15 and 16 are  programmed to answer line 1  and station 15 services  a call  the next line 1 call will ring at station 16  When  both stations 15 and 16 are programmed to answer  lines 1  2 and 3  call delivery is on a per line basis  If  station 15 handles and completes calls on line 2 and 3  while station 16 is still on line 1  the next calls on line 2  or 3 goes to station 15 even if station 16 has become  idle     Since the RNA time of a station is a programmable  feature  department stations
212. ld be removed so that calls are costed based on just the actual telephone numbers dialed  Up to six  different access codes entries with up to eight digits per entry can be programmed     Example  If the system is installed behind a PBX using a 9 as an outside line access code  program a 9 as the discard digit  When a number such as  9 555   212 is dialed  the 9 is discarded and the call is costed based on 5554 212     7  DIALING TIME AND ANSWER TIME  Dialing time is not included when the time of a call is recorded for costing         amount of time that the system ignores for dialing purposes is    programmable  Plus  the system can be programmed to wait for a period of time before beginning to record costs for a call  This wait time allows a call  to ring and be answered before it is costed            66 083    ALL LINE CALLS    1    DISCARD DIGITS       1  TABLES  pr     COST  COMPUTED  USING YES NO  ASSOCIATED  CALL RATE  TABLE  Els  p e  BAND                          COST  COMPUTED  USING  ASSOCIATED  CALL RATE  TABLES  18   24       CALL RATE TABLE        OF LAST RESORT  GENERAL CALL  RATE TABLES    CALL RATE    TABLES FOR AREA  CODE BANDS 1  7    18   19   CALL RATE TABLES 20  FOR OFFICE CODE        gt  21    BANDS 1 7       CALL RATE TABLES  FOR ZONE BANDS 1 4    GENERALCALL  RATE TABLES    System Programming      Y    1   2  ZONECALL      BAND TABLES  4    COST    COMPUTED  USING  ASSOCIATED  CALL RATE  TABLES  255 28    AREA CODE  BAND TABLES    COST  COMPUTED  USIN
213. le Account Codes Without Verify  User  account code entry is not compared with  programmed account code        Disable Account Codes      Account Code Message Display Parameters   LCD speakerphones can prompt users for  account code entry on incoming and or outgoing  calls      Account Code Message Display Time     Maximum Account Code Length     Call Cost Tables  Call Cost Exception Tables  Automatic Reports  Call cost reports can be  produced for printing    SMDA Delete By Attendant  alows attendant to  delete SMDA records       Selection 9  SMDR print parameters  enables Or    disables call cost reporting along with a Station  Message Detail Report         System Progamming    Selectlon 10  Logical physical assignments     stations  For example  assign station extension 25  to station port 25  Also refer to the  discussioin  provided on page 3 6      Selection 11  Logical physical assignments   lines   For example  assign line 1 to line port 1  Also refer  to the discussion on page 3 5     Selectlon 12  Automatic station relocation  allows  individual features to be physically relocated without  losing their programming parameters and extension  asignments     Selection 13  Feature inhibit programming  allows  individual features to be inhibited     Selection 14  Enable all inhibited features  will  enable all features inhibited with selection 13     Selection 15  LCD messages  programs the  messages for the LCD messaging and response  messaging features     Selectlon 16  
214. lections to be presented or  causes a particula  COS programming action to  take place     e This menu system prompts the programmer for the  required response and  where appropriate  will  repeat prompts to allow programming of more than  one device without having to make another menu  selection     e All of the menus operate in the same manner   They differ in only the required response     e Each prompt requires a response followed by a  Carriage Return  RETURN   The responses  usualy consist of a one or two digit number or a  string of numbers or alpha numeric characters  when programming names and messages     Successive entries are separated by a space or a  comma     GENERAL INFORMATION    There are two responses which allow a programmer to  quit a procedure       RETURN  ENTER on some keyboards      This  action returns the user to the top of the current  menu     e CONTROL C   This action returns the user to the  top of the main menu     There are certain other responses which have special  functions         Responding with the   key will print or display the  menu that the programmer is currently using  The  system is waiting at the same prompt line as it was  before the menu was repeated     e Responding with the   key will cause a help menu  to be printed if one is available  The system is  waiting at the same prompt line as it was before the  help menu was requested     There are special line edit characters   e Backspace  Delete  Rub out     Used to delete    ch
215. light     For line calls  press TAP if station does not have  line appearance     EXCLUSIVE HOLD  Only your telephone can  retrieve held cell        Press HOLD twice     HOLD RECALL FEATURE   After a preprogrammed length of time  a call placed on  hold will automatically ring back to the telephone  which placed it on hold  If the call is on exclusive hold   it will revert to manual hold after the hold recall time  period  The call can then be retrieved by anyone with  that line appearance     DIRECT STATION HOLD  To place a call on direct hold  park a call at a  particular station      e While on line  press         outside call placed on  hold        Dial    9 0 plus extension number of station to  receive parked call     To retrieve direct hold call     From the hold receiving extension  Dial   9 0              the station which placed call on hold      Dial   4 plus the extension number of hold  receiving statlon     CALL PARK    To park a call with Park button  user programmed  programmable button          Press Park button  Light associated with button will  turn on    To manually park a call      While on line  press ITCM      Dial       e Dial a park orbii access code  91 99      NOTE  If a parked call is not retrieved within a  programmable limit  0  6 minutes  O never  recalls   it reverts to the parking station as a  standard held call     To retrieve parked call wlth Park button  user  programmed programmable button     e Press lighted Park button    To manually re
216. ling operations can be performed   Refer to Figure 4 1 on page 4 50 for  tton locations     Jefauit Button Assignments 1  Dial 56   BUTTON MAPPING    2  Dial 01   BUTTON DEFAULT    3  Select station ports to be defaulted      Station 10   57  Dial 10    57   3  Dial X for next button mapping feature    OR   Dial       for configuration mode        Assign LInes To Buttons 1  Dial 56     BUTTON MAPPING    2  Dial 02     ASSIGN LINE    3  Select button to be programmed     Press Al   A14  B1  B8   4  Select line ports to be assigned     Line port 1 14   Dial 01     or Press Al              Line port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or Press B1  B2    Line port 17   24   Dial 17   24      OR    Press SPKR to end       Assign Lines To Buttons    Continued Press HOLD then press Al    A8   on next          5  Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all    are assigned     280 99 IWI    Buiuswei6o1g                   Pr             7 46x for base level                 DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY    Jnes To Buttons  continued 6  Dial   to finish button mapping     7     8     issignDSS BLFSelectlonToButtons    2 4       Blank Buttons For User Autodlal and   DynamicLine Buttons   NOTE When blanking buttons  be  Sure a previous y assigned  button is idle  feature not  selected by user  before it is  blanked    Dynamic line buttons are located        at B1  B2   amp  B3     Select station port to be programmed        Station 10   57  Dial 10   57     Dial 3  for further line button assignment   
217. lly returns to a timed hold Press Al or dial 1 a 1                   RECALL X    recall condition at the parking station  Press A2 or dial 2   2 min    Press      or dial 3   3 min    Press   4 or dial 4   4 min    Press   5 or dial 5   5 min    Press A8 or dial 6   6 min    Press A9 or dial 7 z Never Recall    NEVER RECALL       Dial    for configuration mode               Exclusive Hold  This feature   Dial 23                    EXC HOLD   prevents a held call from being   Press Al to toggle between enable and disable  retrieved at any other extension  lt  LED On   Enable    can be enabled or disabled  OR   system wide  Dial 1 to enable    ENABLE EXC HOLD     Al LED on    Dial 2 to disable     DISABLE EXC HOLD       Dial    for configuration mode       Press SPKR to end     5809 99       Bult wesbo1g               fil 4      Press            7 4 6    for base level      once B     IFEATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY    Tandem Attendant  When this  feature is enabled  a recall from an  unanswered call transfer or timed hold  recall will ring at both attendant  stations  When disabled  only the  attendant station which transferred  the call will ring     Automatic Statlon Relocation  With   this feature  the system will   automatically recognize a particular   station should that station be   re located to a different station port    and supply the same COS   parameters as programmed for the   station at the original port    NOTE  Refer to station fe assignm
218. ly is not installed to detailed in Figure 3 7 below    provide battery back up power to the system  An    POWER FAILURE TERMINALS ON  STATION CONNECTOR BLOCK   4 LINE  8 STATION AND 8 LINE  I6 STATION BASE UNITS    QR     POWER FAILURE            IG LINE  32 STATION BASE UNIT            TYPICAL INDUSTRY STANDARD  NON ELECTRIC TELEPHONE   POWER FAILURE INTERFACE     J    Le m HHH HHH HM DAD HH          Figure 3 7  Power Faliure Connection    3 15                  66 083    AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT INTERFACE NOTE  When the auxiliary interface feature is being  An industry standard non electronic telephone device employed  the      to line        reassignment as  or a data device can be connected on a line ahead of discussed on pages 3 5 and 4  19 works as    described except in regard to line 2 and line 4     the common equipment  The system can detect an j            y Line 2 can only be reassigned to line port 4    off hook condition in the connected device and turn on    the line sta us light at the telephones to indicate that and      4 can only be reassigned to line port 2   the line is busy  Table 3 1  given in Section 1  and  D       Figure 3 8 below detail the auxiliary interface   Connection is across tip and ring of lines 2 and 4    connections  The auxiliary interface connections are provided at  terminals 1 and 6 of common equipment line jacks 1  and 2             AUXILIARY  INTERFACE         FOR LINE 4  COMMON EQUIPMENT   8 LINE  16 STATION   AUXILIARY  BASE UNIT SHOWN 
219. m Auto Hold  intercom automatically  when new line is selected     held    Svstem Proaammina      Thru Dialing ATI  arrange port to allow           tones to pass through to connected equipment         Executive Override   Do Not Disturb Override     Service Observing      All Call and Zone Paging     Message        Originate  Head Set Mode  Group Call Pickup  Secure Off Hook Voice Announce  Data Security Ports  LCD Call Costs  display of cost for current call   System alarm recipient  Unobservable station  Voice mail transfer on busy for station  Voice mail port    Toll Restriction Table Administration  1  Build   Modify an Allow Table  2  Build   Modify a Deny Table    3  Clear a Table   Entry  4  Return To Previous Menu       TOLL RESTRICTION TABLE ADMINISTRATION    Use the toll restriction table administration menu to  build toll restriction tables for line and station  assignment  Refer to page 4 52 for a discussion  concerning toll restriction table construction and  assignment     STATION 10    PROGRAMMING OVERLAY  e Cut out along border        Cut out shaded openings      Fit over station faceplate         10x14  PROGRAMMING  OVERLAY                 STATION 10   PROGRAMMING OVERLAY     Cut out along border    e Cut out shaded openings    e Fit over station faceplate             5x14  PROGRAMMING  OVERLAY    STATION 10  PROGRAMMING OVERLAY      Cut out along border     Cut out shaded openings     Fit over station faceplate                        8      2   9        013 
220. m may be programmed by call  costing and SMDA reporting class of service  programming to permit station users 10 enter account  codes for incoming calls and or out going calls if  desired  Account codes are entered while on line  either before an out going call is dialed or after the  distant patty on an incoming call has hung up  On out  going calls  the user who enters the account code is  associated with the call record except when the call is    H  0    Description Of svstem Feat     PTER2  SYSTEMFEATURES    transferred  On transferred calls  the transferee is  associated with the call record  On incoming calls  the  last user active on a call is the one that is associated  with the costed call record  The system can be  programmed to place an appropriate message on the  display to remind users of LCD speakerphones to  enter an account code  Account codes may be from  three to eight digits in length as set by class of service  programming  When the user enters an account code   the system will force the use of the programmed  length  but will verify only the first three digits to  determine validity     ALL CALL PAGING  All call paging allows all stations to receive  announcements through the station speaker at once   All call paging is also sent to the paging port where it  can be applied to the input of an external paging  amplifier  Origination of announcements must be via  the station handset  Each station can be programmed  to receive and or originate all call page  
221. misi o ml wh        wh RI              cas QR E       TAI TE  TRI TES          Square Non Square    Configuration       n om ong sm 4      Station By Station d Hyde                                 e vient Vaca eee queis        agr  Station Message Detail Accounting owe Ris dock o              cete oce                       Roue              Station Message Detail Recording DEVI  Station Monitoring With DSS Call Pickup MAN Na eh              ce Quid                     PR ES cg ui uh 22    Station Speed Dial    Station To Station Messaging          c               3 4 4 4       4 4 4                            s s s s s                                           Subdued Ringing    System Alarm Reports 4040404 46 40404040404 040402  2  2                             4 404 XX    System Speed Dial  Tandem Attendant  Tap  Flash  Recall     Tenant Service      Timed Hold Recall    Toll Restriction  0 And 1            fe                                 Addis us ml us          cip s        cay      day  tans                      EGAL UE  AR    Toll Restriiion  Flexi    ble  css    Toll Restriction  Night Mode  r1  Tone Or Voice Signalling  Intercom  41244    4    4  4   4 46         Transfer Conference    Button MX    Unanswered Call Transfer Recall Timing 424040404 o9 om om om om o9 on s 9 o9 om om om om oso s 0 4 40040404004   404 4 2 0 4 404040        Voice Announce Blocking II  Voice Mail Transfer on Busy XI  Zone Paging  Via Station Speakers     4             TAL          UN ca   
222. mmon equipment and telephone  installation for proper operation by performing the  following resistance and voltage measurements     RESISTANCE CHECK  Measure the resistance at the station connector blocks  under the following conditions        AC power cord disconnected from electrical outlet        Common equipment connected to station connector  blocks        Stations wired and wiring punched down      blocks        Bridging clips removed from blocks to isolate  stations from              equipment     Measure the resistance of each installed station and  wiring from the station side of the connector blocks   Resistance values will vary with cable length and   station type but should be within the following limits       Greater than 700 Kohms  VOLTAGE CHECK  Make the following voltage measurements at the    station connector blocks under the following conditions     e Bridging clips installed    e AC power connected to the common equipment    Measure the voltage across the signal pair  The  measured voltage must be within the following limits       28   36 VDC    GENERAL CHECK    1  Check the red light emitting diode  LED  system  status indicator  Be sure that it is on steady  If it is  off or flashing  refer to the paragraph below titled   Failure Isolation     2  Refer to Chapter 5 for operating information and  perform a general operational test of the system by  exercising the features from station port 10 or 11   Operational parameters are per the system default  con
223. mpany at the time of installation     Prior to this software release  a station user could only camp on to a station that was busy on the  intercom line  With this software release 11 a  a user can also camp on to a station after calling  on the intercom line and receiving no answer     With the release of the revision   models  Comdial has enhanced the design of the DigiTech  telephones  These enhanced telephones require changes to the system software that this  release provides     All revision   DigiTech Telephones provide red  orange  and green light emitting diodes  LEDs    Red LEDs indicate which lines are in use at another station  Green LEDs indicate which lines are  in use or on hold at a station  An orange LED indicates a ringing line thus distinguishing between  lines that are on hold and a line that is ringing  Additionally  all revision   DigiTech telephones  provide pushbutton volume control on their front panels and a group listening feature  Withgroup  listening  a user        turn on the telephone speaker while the handset is off hook     The 77005      24 line  LCD speakerphone provides enhanced displays that prompt users on the  operation of the many system features available    them  The LCD speakerphone provides three  interactive buttons that provide quick easy access to system features and straight forward button  programming without dialing codes  It also includes an auxiliary jack on the rear panel where the  installer or the user can connect devices 
224. mum of one hour without AC power     BLOCK PROGRAMMING    A class of service assigned to a particular station or  line can be assigned to an entire block of stations or  lines with one programming action  This feature  eliminates the need to individually program stations  and lines with the same class of service  Block  programming class of service can be performed after a  station class of service or line class of service has been  programmed for a particular station or line     CALL ANNOUNCE WITH HANDSFREE  ANSWERBACK    The internal speaker at each station provides  call announce capability over the intercom link  A  handsfree response to a call announce call can be  made  This response is transmitted by the microphone  built into the telephone housing      CALL COSTING AND STATION MESSAGE  DETAIL ACCOUNTING REPORTS  The system provides built in  estimated costing of all  outside calls  ft also provides station message detail  accounting  SMDA  printout reports of all costed calls  as well as displayed call costs on LCD speakerphones   Call costing  in general  provides a means of    establishing costs to be applied to outside calls made  from system telephones  Call costing computes  charges for a call after it is completed  t does not  restrict dialing as toll restriction does  Call costs are  based on a two tier time rate and includes a line  surcharge cost  Allowances can be programmed for  call set up and minimum call duration  The system  provides several ways of det
225. n Base Unit     amp Line  1  amp Station BaseUnit    16 Line  32 Station Base Unit      Figure3 1  Mounting Dimensions    3 2           66 083         POWER CONNECTION    Employ a dedicated 117VAC 15        circuit  with a  third wire ground  supplied to a standard electrical  outlet  NEMA 5 15R  for the AC power connection  A C  power connection is illustrated in Figure 3 2 shown  below            plug in power line surge protector should be  installed between the power cord and the AC               Do not connect the AC power cord until the  installation has been checked        To apply AC power  connect the power cord to the  electrical outlet     BATTERY BACK UP    The common equipment provides an interface  connector for the connection of an optional external  battery assembly  This assembly is available  separately as a kit     Be sure that the AC power cord Is  connected to the electrical outlet before  connecting the external battery assembly  to the common equipment interface  connector  This ensures that internal  protection circuitry Is operating to prevent  damage that could result from Improper  connection     e The optional Comdial model BBUO2 external battery  assembly provides a minimum of one hour of  operation should the AC power to the system be  interrupted  The BBUO2 assembly has a 15  ampere hour current rating    The BBUO2 external battery assembly may include   batteries from either of the following suppliers       Model PS 12150 from Power Sonic Corpo
226. n a    632 with two CM408 expansion modules  the first 16 buttons are automatically assigned   defautted  to station ports 42 through 57       On a      632 with one CM408 expansion module  the first 8 buttons are automatically assigned   defaulted  to station ports 42 through 49       On any other smaller station capacity system  all buttons are unassigned     All 32 buttons on the second console are programmable for DSS and or autodial use     The second console provides COS programming buttons C42 through   57 when needed   Refer to the programming overlay that is included at the end of this publication     It is important to remember that when a second console assignment is made or cleared  the console  button mapping and autodial values are reset 10 match the default values  or any previously  programmed ones  for the active feature  This means that when the second console feature is  cleared  the console installed at that port complements the telephone that is installed at the  logic paired port instead of the one at the port set with the second console programming  The   console buttons are automatically reassianed  defaulted  to stations 10 through 41 or to the maximum  station number on system  Figure 1 illustrates a typical dual console configuration     A second console can be installed and programmed without  having a first console installed at a logic paired port  The  button assignment is automatically defautted for a  second console but can be reprogrammed as  
227. n incoming call is the same as  the ringing cadence of the TELCO  PBX  or CENTREX  System  The ringing cadence of an intercom call  presents two tone bursts sounded every four seconds     DO NOT DISTURB    Any station can be set to a do not disturb mode  DND   using the designated DND programmable button and  associated indicator  indicator will light when DND is  active   While in the        mode  the station will not ring  on any incoming call nor will it accept an intercom call   A party making an intercom call to a station set in the  do notdisturb mode hears a fast busy tone  The  feature cannot be overridden by the calling party  unless the override feature is enabled  The DND  feature is used with the departmental calling feature to  provide a station wrap up mode and a station off duty  mode  Refer to the discussions titled  Do       Disturb  Override  Executive Attendant Override  and  Departmental Calling Distribution Report     Description Of System Feats    DO NOT DISTURB INHIBIT    The system can be programmed to inhibit any station  from entering the DND mode  System class of service  programming is used to program this feature     DO NOT DISTURB OVERRIDE  Stations can be provided with DND override capability  which will allow them to call a station that is set in the  DND mode  The Executive Attendant Override feature  must also be active for DND override feature to  function  Station class of service programming is used  to assign this feature  Also refer to t
228. n optional accessory available for use with the digital telephone system     Connect it to a station port to    provide interfacing for such external telephony equipment as an ExecuMail system  an industry standard model 2500 tone dial telephone  a model 500    rotary dial telephone  etc  Perform the following programming actions as necessary when operating external equipment through the    Press              7 4 6   for base level     ATI device        FEATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD  AUTO VOICE MAIL XFER          Automatic Transfer of Volce Mall   When ExecuMail 15 included with the  System  use this programming feature  to arrange for a immediate line transfer  without delay from ExecuMail to a  station                     Mall Line ID  When ExecuMail  is included with the system  program  the lines with identification  ID   numbers  These numbers allow the  ExecuMail system to identify which line  it is answering  The ID numbers that  are assigned here must match the ID  numbers that are selected as part of  ExecuMail system programming       Dial 25  V MAIL AUTO XFER     Press Al to toggle between enable and disable      LED On   Enable    OR    Dial 1 to enable     Al LED is on    Dial 2 to disable       Dial    for configuration mode      Dial 43   VOICE MAIN LN ID     Select line port  LED On   Line assigned     Line port 1 14   Dial 01     14 or Press Al           Line port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or press B1  B2  Line port 17 24   
229. nd  busy RNA timeout  call forward  gt   busy feature  using  the station class of service programming  Also refer to  the discussion titled  Departmental Calling Distribution  Report     DIRECT INWARD STATION DIALING   DISD     The DISD feature allows an external party to call an   intercom station directly without assistance by the   attendant  The DISD call must be received on a line  which has been specially programmed to allow this  feature  Any line can be programmed to be a DISD  line for both the normal mode of operation and the   night transfer  of ringing  mode of operation     The number of rings which occurs on a DISD line  before it is answered is programmable  By setting a  large number of rings  time is allowed for a call to be  serviced in a regular manner by stations that have a  line appearance for the DISD line  Setting the number  of rings to 0 disables the line for DISD use  If a line is  to be dedicated for DISD use  it is a good practice to  set it for one ring  The amount of time allowed for an  extension number to be dialed is programmable and a  DISD assist station can be programmed to answer  calls that are not completed during this dial time limit   When a DISD line is called  it rings for a programmed  number of rings  If the call is not answered in a normal  manner by a station with the line appearance during  this time  the system answers it and presents a DISD  dial tone to the caller  The system then waits for an  extension number to be dialed
230. nd originate capability from any  other system stations  Assign group 8 to both station  port 14 and station port 15  Do not assign group 8 to  any other station port but be sure that ali station    The SOHVA groups are assigned in station class of  service programming  Also refer to the discussions  titled  Secure Off Hook Voice Announce  and Secure  Off Hook Voice Announce Button               Of System Features IMI66 083    SELF DIAGNOSTICS  Each station can execute a self test when so enabled   This test verifies processor  indicator  and tone  functions     SERVICE OBSERVING  Service observing allows a third party to enter an  in progress call in an unannounced muted mode to  monitor the conversation  There will be no warning  tones sounded when the call entry is made  This  feature is useful in allowing a supervisor to monitor the  performance of an employee during a phone  conversation with a client  For a station to provide the  service observing feature  the executive override  feature is automatically enabled when the service  observing feature is enabled  Service Observing can  be blocked by class of service programming on a  station basis  Use station class of service programming  to give a station service observing  and executive  override  or block this feature     SPEAKERPHONE SUPPORT  The optional speakerphone provides handsfree  operation of all features  except voice signalled  intercom calls  The handset must be lifted for this  purpose     SQUARE NON SQUAR
231. ne 1 3      1R   zone 1 receive  AO   originate all call     Press SPKR                        9 INI    DUILIWIBIDOJg     15  6                   56           746    for base level     FEATURE DESCRIPTION IENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD         i  1  Dial 53   STATION FEATURES     2  Dial 15   PRIME LINE    3a  Assign prime line     PRIME LINE          Line port 1 14   Dial 01  14orpressAl  A14    Line port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or press B1  B2     Line port 17   24   Dial 17   24   OR   Press HOLD then press Al   A6  3b  Assign prime group      Dial 51 54 for gps    4     PRIME L NE GRP X  3c  Assign prime intercom      Dial 50 for intercom line     PRIME INTERCOM  4  Select station ports to be programmed      Station 10    57  Dial 10    57   5  Dial    for next prime line  group  or  intercom assignment    OR   Press     for next station feature    OR   Press          for next station feature    2rime Line  also prime group or prime   ntercom   A preprogrammed group of  ines  an intercom line  or one individual  ine can be designated to a particular  station where it is automatically selected  or use when that station is taken                                   Flexlble Ringing Assignments  Ringing  Direct Ringing RD ON PAGE  40  assignments are programmed on a         1  Dial 54   STA LINE CONFIG       IRECT RING AT  station per line basis  Ringing is 2  Dial 1  DIRECT RING   TS 10 AND 17        controlled for every line that has 3  Select line ports for 
232. ng Patterns                   5 22  System Speed Dil                2 17  4 78  5 14  System Speed      Record                  4 80  System Speed Dial        Restriction              4 25  System Status Indicator                    3 81  Tandem Attendant                   2 17  4 10          FlashyRecall                       2 17  Technical Assistance And Repair Service              6 1  Tenant                            2 17  Terminations                                         a ee    4  0  Thru Dialing ATI                        4 56  Timed Hold                               2 17 4 7         Restriction  0 And 1                    217         Restriction  Flexible                    2 17         Restriction  Night Mode                  2 17         Restriction Defaut                      4 59         Restriction Table Administration              4 90         Restriction Table Configuration               4 58         Table Enty                         4 60         Table For Night Transfer Of Ringing           4 61         Table Reference Record                  4 62         Table To Lina                        4 60         Table                                        4 61  Tone Or Voice Signalling  Intercom            2 18  4 8  Tods And Hardware                       3 1  Transter Conference Button                   2 18  Transfering Cal       5 4              PC Operation                      4 84  Unanswered Call Transfer Recall Timing        2 18  4 5  Unscreened Tran
233. ns testing each one in turn with                   Dial       for next station feature      OR    IVOTE  Also program the system Dial          for configuration mode   intercom signalling as tone  for the first choice   See page 4 8        Station Message Detali Account 1  Dial 53   STATION FEATURES      SMDA  Departments  Selected station    2  Dial 22   SMDA DEPARTMENTS   can be arranged together making it 3  Dial 0 for no SMDA dept  assigned    possible for an SMDA report to be  DEPARTMENT 0   generated which will only include  OR    information concerning that specific 4  Dial 1   8 for dept 1   8     DEPARTMENT X    staton arrangement  5  Select stations for SMDA department       Station 10   57  Dial 10    57       ign SMDA 4                  6  Dial    for additional department station    assigments     OR    Dial       for next station feature    OR    Dial          for configuration mode     Press SPKR to end                                   LUO OS    580 99 INI         Press ITCM    74 6    for base level                                      Lu   FEATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD  OR             ENTRY              ENTA    Secure Off Hook Voice Announce 1  Dial 53  STATION FEATURES  SOHVA  Disable  The SOHVA feature   2  Dial 24   SECURE           S standard for every digital telephone 3  Select station port for programming  station  The feature can be disabled with   Station 10   57  Dial 10   57   his programming selection  4  D
234. of digits  3   16     set the account code display time     Press 10    Dial 1   20 to select new display time  in seconds     4           099 DigiTech System Software Enhancements    FEATURE BENEFITS   ount Codes STATION 10 PROGRAMMING  cont      wt    To enable or disable the account code prompt for incoming calls     Press 1 1  Press Al to toggle feature on and off  Al LED on   feature enabled for incoming calls    Or     Press 1 to enable prompt for incoming  2 to disable prompt for incoming    To set the number of account code digits to be verified     Press 1 5  Dial 3    16 for number of digits to be veriiied         set emergency numbers  which will not require account codes for dialing      Press 1 6  Dial emergency number  up to 12 digits     To enter another emergency number  press    then dial number    To clear emergency numbers     Press 1 7  Dial emergency number  up to 12 digits     To clear another number  press    then dial number    3  Press       for configuration mode    4  Press 5 3 for station features  Press 3 5      Optional Forced Account Codes    To set all stations to forced account codes     Press AI    Enter station number s   if any  of station s  to be    Exception s  to Forced     i e   they  will have optional account codes     To set all stations to optional account codes     Press A2    Enter station number s   if any  of station s  to be    Exception s  to Optional           they  will have forced account codes     5  Enter       for confi
235. omatic Dialing  instructions for programming details     PROGRAMMING AUTOMATIC REDIAL  BUTTON   The system will allow the last previously dialed  number to be automaticaly and repeatedly redialed for  approximately ten minutes  A programmable button is  defaulted to provide this feature  A different  programmable button can be assigned for this function  if desired    To program another programmable button for use  as an automatic redial button    e Press            1    e To remove function assignment     e Press current assigned programmable button  then  press TRANS CONF button     e Press desired programmable button to receive  function  Listen for fast tone burst     e Press  to assign function   e Press MNTR  SPKR  to end     PROGRAMMING RESPONSE MESSAGE  BUTTON   The system will allow a station user to make a  non verbal response to an intercom call or to a secure  off  hook voice announcement  This response will  provide a preprogrammed message for display at the    calling station if it is an LCD speakerphone     To assign programmable button for non verbal   one button response      Press              1    e Press desired programmable button        Dial 5       Dial message location number  1 0     NOTE  The response message is preprogrammed and  made available for use by attendant  programming      Press MNTR  SPKR  to end    e Label button          6 4                    Operation    PROGRAMMING ASSIST BUTTON   Press MNTR  SPKR  10 end   e Press          x 1    La
236. on  and special purpose operating features  The  installer enters COS programming by dialing an  access code over the intercom line  System  administrators can enter COS programming with  another code to reprogram any system  station  or  special purpose operating feature that may require  change at a later date  Line reprogramming ability is  not available through system administration  programming  The system attendant can reprogram  certain system wide features that require periodic  change by entering COS programming with another    Description Of System Feati      code provided for this purpose  The station user can  program individual stations for speed dial  autodial and  direct station selection  DSS  by entering COS with a  code provided for that purpose  Thus  COS  programming is arranged with a hierarchical order  from the highest  the installer  to the lowest  the  station user  level with a higher level programmer  having the ability to do anything a lower level  programmer can do without exiting a current  programming mode  However  only the station user  can program the speed dial and autodial locations at  telephone     All class of service  COS  programming is performed  from station 10 or 12  Any station and console  combination will function in this mode and provide  visual feedback with the LED associated with the  programming button  By employing an LCD  speakerphone  however  the programmer will have the  benefit of display prompts and verifications to s
237. on can be a type 66         connector block or individual 6 position modular jacks   The line cord that is routed between the outside line  termination and the common equipment termination  should be twisted pair wiring  Table 3 1 shows the  line connection details for all three of the common  equipment base units  Figure 3 4 illustrates typical  line connections     Transient voltage spikes  if induced onto CO or  CENTREX lines  can travel through the cable and into  the common equipment  The telephone company  offers basic protection against this condition but it is  usually designed to protect the central off ice circuits   While it will also provide some protection to the  common equipment  it should not be relied upon for  total protection  To help ensure that external  overvoltage surges do not damage the system  it is  recommended that gas discharge tubes  or similar  primary protection devices  be installed and properly  grounded on all lines     The outside line that is initially connected to a  particular line port along with all programmed  attributes  can be reassigned to a different port by  programming action  This feature allows adds  moves   and changes to be made without relocating the line  wiring  Refer to Chapter 4  page 4 19 for line to line  port     re assignment     Add on expansion modules are available to expand  line capacity  Refer to Section 3 for complete details     STATION CONNECTIONS    The system supports the operation of the following  digit
238. onatanotherstatlon     If        override Is allowed     Make intercom call and hear busy signal       Dial    03  An intercom call rings at the called  station     5 7    System Operation        66 083    MUTE   HANDSFREE ANSWER INHIBIT    Toprevent distant party from hearing whilehand  Toblock out handsfree answer Ofintercomcalls     set Is lifted    Press MUTE  MNTR  SPKR  light will flutter     Press MUTE  MNTR  SPKR  light will flutter  To release handsfree answer of intercom calls   Toresumetwo wayconversation      Press MUTE MNTR  SPKR  light will turn off       Press MUTE  MNTR  SPKR  light will turn off     PULSE TONE SWITCHING    If the local telephone service Is pulse  rotary  but NOTE  Pulse Tone switching can be programmed into  tone generation Is requlred during the call  convert auto dial numbers by pressing   during number  to tone whiledialingas follows  storage       Press   at point in dialing sequence where  conversion to tone is required   System will switch  back to pulse dialing when call is ended      PERSONAL RINGING TONES    A station user can select one of four different ringing FREQUENCY WARBLE   tones for use at a station  TONE PAIR RATE   o             TONE  666 571 Hz 16Hz     Dial 4  TONE 2 1000 800 Hz 16Hz     Dial 1  2  3  or 4  selects tones 1  2  3  or 4   TONE 3 666 571 Hz 23 Hz  TONE 4 1000 800 Hz 23 Hz    BACKGROUND MUSIC    Music must be supplied by the system before it can be   Adjust loudness of music with call monitor speaker  turned
239. ormation is  yovided to an LCD speakerphone       lisplay     System Speed Dial  A special  System wide list of numbers can be                     for automatic dialing by all  Jsers     Press              CONFIG  MODE      1  Dial 01   SET CLOCK    ONG FORM    Dial 00   99 for yr     Dial 01    12 for mo     Dial 01    31 for day    Dial 00    23 for hr      Dial 00   59 for min     Dial    for configuration mode     SHORT FORM       Dial W 23 for hr       Dial W 59 for min       Dial 4 to assign hours  and minutes     RECORDSPEED DIAL NUMBERS ON PAGE 4 79      Dial 02   SYS SPEED DIAL      Dial 01     99 for storage location                               Dial      clear current entry   LINE       Choose line  line group  or intercom  to be used with speed dial  number     LINE XX      Line port 1 14   Dial 01    14 or press Al     14     Line port  15 16 2 Dial 15  16 or press B1  B2     Line port 17 24   Dial 17     24  or press HOLD  AI   A8     Dial 90 for last line  used or prime line      PRIME LINE     Continued on next page    Press SPKR to end        UuluJUdcJUUJd                 80 99 IWI                 PressiTCM 4746 forbaselevel                 Y NN   EATURE DESCRIPTION IEFERENCE RECORD    system Speed Dial   continued     Dial 91   94 for line group         LINE GROUP 1      Press         button for intercom line      INTERCOM         5  Dial number for storage  32 digits max                          If required  press HOLD button to store a pause       If requ
240. parate pilot numbers   extension numbers  can be assigned to each  department to be used for making intercom calls or  doing call transfers to the department     The direct department calling feature requires that lines  and stations be assigned to a department  It does not  require that department lines be assigned to to appear  at buttons on department stations  If direct line  appearance of a particular department line to a  particular department station is required  it can be  assigned  If this assignment is made  ensure that  neither direct nor delayed ringing is enabled for that  line at that station     An incoming call searches for the first station available  to answer a call  If all stations in a department are  busy or are ring no answer  RNA   the call will go to  the overflow station in that department  if one has been  programmed   If there is no overflow station  programmed  the call continues to try the department  stations until it is answered or dropped by the caller   The caller continues to receive ringback tone until the   call is answered  The overflow station can service the  call or transfer it back to the department using the  department pilot number  When the call is transferred  back to the department by an overflow station  it will  not return to the overflow station until that station is  idle and has no ringing calls either new or transferred   instead  the call will camp on at the department and  walt for a station to become idle  The caller wil
241. party     Programmable buttons  Many of the telephone  buttons can be programmed to provide functions such  as direct station selection  DSS   auto dial  system    feature access  line access  messaging and more   Programmed buttons helps station users eliminate  manual dialing errors     Service observing  Supervisors can help insure  quality of service without interrupting calls by  monitoring a trainee   s call without being heard by the  distant party at the trainee   s station     Handset volume control on all stations  Handset  volume can be set to a comfortable listening level for  each individual user of the telephone     Call cost display  Built in software records all  outside call costs  Special programming allows an  LCD speakerphone to display the accumulating cost of  a Call     Dual intercom  A second intercom key can be  provided so that station users can handle two intercom  calls at once  One intercom call can be placed on  hold while a second intercom call is serviced or both  calls can be conferenced together     System Overview    IMI 66     SECTION 2  PUBLICATIONS OVERVIEW    MANUAL SCOPE    This publication contains a technical discussion of the  digital telephone system  Included in this manual is  the following information        Chapter 1  System Overview  This chapter  provides a generalized understanding of the  system  an explanation of the supporting  documentation  and a summary of the equipment  hardware       Chapter 2  Feature Description  Th
242. phones     Enhanced secure off  hook voice announce operation     Expanded personal ring tone choice     Simplified hybrid operation     Support for DigiTech telephones with a revision letter of   or later   Software release 11A provides all of the above enhancements plus the following additional ones     Enhanced automatic call back     Support for digital single line proprietary telephone     Support for ExecuMail voice processing system    Availability of these enhancements is as follows     SYSTEM BASE UNIT PRODUCT CODE SOFTWARE CARTRIDGE PRODUCT CODE   CO408 GO408 All Revisions 50408 Rev  11    and later   C081 6 GO81 6 All Revisions 5081 6 Rev  11 a and later     1632 91632 All Revisions 51632 Rev  11 a and later   FEATURE AND BENEFIT   The major feature and benefit of these software enhancements are per the following discussion   FEATURE BENEFIT    Additional dlaltime   With this software release  the digital telephone system provides an additional dial time limit for   for the DISD option    Direct Inward Station Dialing  DISD  option  When a caller does not finish dialing an  extension number within the programmed dial time limit  the system routes the call to the assist  station if one is programmed  otherwise  it drops the line  Previous software provided dial time  limit choices of 6  9  12  and 15 seconds  This software release adds    30 second dial time limit  to the list of programmable choices     Changed defaulted Intercom calls can be tone signalled or voic
243. power and external battery  back up power from the system     2  Remove and set aside nameplate from base unit   This action exposes internal cable connector on  base unit circuit board     3  Reach through opening in base unit and mate  module cable plug with base unit circuit board  connectors     TYPICAL BASE UNIT   841          IG STATION BASE UNIT        BOTTOM  LOCATION y    CONNECTING CABLE  7j AND PLUB    SECUR ING  SCREW             Push excess cable inside base unit housing    through connector opening       install expansion module in place on all four    mounting holes  Be sure excess cable is not  pinched between add on module and base unit       Pull module down to latch in place     Use flat blade screw driver to tighten module  securing screw into base unit threaded fastener       Snap nameplate into slots on top of module    housing       Attach a  10 or  12 insulated  solid copper wire    between the grounding terminal on the expansion  module and the grounding terminal on the common  equipment cabinet     O Refer    Chapter 4  and perform configuration  programming for new station and or line ports     NAMEPLATE   REMOVE TO EXPOSE BABE  UNIT CONNECTORS     UPPER MOUNTING HOLES   2 PLACES     LOWER MOUNTING HOLES  12 PLACES1        GROUND   MODULES                       UNIT    SNAP SLOTS FOR  NAMEPLATE    TYPICAL ADD ON MODULE    Figure3 15  Expansion Modulanstailation           66 083                                       4  SOFTWARE CARTRIDGE    INTRODUCT
244. purpose on premise accessory for the digital  telephone system  It has dual circuits that allow the ExecuMail to interface to two station ports   Refer to Comdial publication       89 037  Installation Instructions For The Analog Terminal  Interface  AT  D  for complete details for using the ATI D to interface between the digital   telephone system and the ExecuMail system       addition to the required programming task of  identifying the ExecuMail station ports as voice mail ports  there are several other programming  considerations associated with the ExecuMail operation that the programmer can make whenever  their options are wanted     VOICE MAIL PORT  Required     The programmer must identify the station ports where the installer has connected the ExecuMail  System  Identifying them as voice mail ports enables the digital telephone system to recognize  them as such for proper call handling  Use the following programming feature to enable the  station port for ExecuMail operation     NOTE  The digital telephone system automatically disables this feature if an  installer replaces the ATI D with a multiline telephone at the  programmed station port     To program this feature  press ITCM     7 4 6    then do the following steps     NOTE  The station that is being used for programming cannot be  programmed as a voice mail port     1  Dial 63     STATION FEATURES     2  Dial 32     VOICE MAIL PORT    3  Select station ports to be programmed      station 1 1   57  Dial 11 e 6
245. quipment     When programmed forpaging port ringing       external  paging amplifier is employed to amplify and broadcast the  ringing tones sent to the paging port  The relay closures that  appear at the ringing terminals can be employed to energize  the external paging amplifier during the periods when the  ringing tones are being sent     NOTE  Refer to the following paragraph headed External  Paging Interface for a discussion of external paging  amplifer connections and information for using the  paging port ringing terminals in an alternate paging    enable function    LOW CURRENT APPLICATIONS ONLY    SEE CAUTION TEXT              2         COMMON EQUIPMENT     INTERNAL     SWITCHING   MSORUS        24                 INPUT AS  i d   48V             REQUIRED    a       CONNECT TO EITHER STATION 17                                  m  4 AUDIBLE OR COMMON AUDIBLE    TERMINALS     WITH SLAVE RELAY CONNECTIONS FOR HIGH CURRENT APPLICATION          CAUTION TEXT   CONNECT TO EITHER STATION 17 AUDIBLE                          p    OR COMMON AUDIBLE TERMINALS               ad 24V    1A MAX OUTPUT AS   l INTERNAL    0R  REQUIRED BY     SWITCHING b  48V                RELAY COIL       AC           am em eme em      em              OLTAGE CLAMPING  DIODE RECOMMENDED  AUDIBLE  STATION 17  AUDIBLE     an       STATION CONNECTOR BLOCK   4 1 INE  8 STATION AND  B LINE  I amp  STATION BASE UNITS                      STATION 17 AUDIBLE       BARRIER STRIP   I6  L INE  32 STATION BASE UNIT
246. r takes  ippropriate action     VOTE  Also enable system alarm  reporting         page 4  10                and Zone Paging  Stations can    eceive voice announcements through  he telephone speaker  or through an    xternal paging speaker connected to a       port  and transmit voice  ynnouncements with the telephone  1andset  Announcements can be made     certain areas of the system or to      stations in the system     NOTE  A button can be assigned to a  station for paging access per the  procedure shown on page 4 45     1  Dial 53   2  Dial 28   3  Select station ports for programming     Station 10   57  Dial 10   57   4  Dial    for next station feature    OR   Dial       for configuration mode     1  Dial 55    2  Choose paging assignment     Dial 1 for zone 1 originate     Dial 2 for zone 2 originate     Dial 3 for zone 3 originate     Dial 4 for all call originate      Dial 5 for zone 1 receive       Dial 6 for zone 2 receive      Dial 7 for zone 3 receive     Dial 8 for all call receive       Dial 9 to clear all assignments       Station 10    57  Dial 10   57   4  Dial    to assign other paging    OR   Dial       for configuration mode      PAGING      ORIGINATE ZONE 1    ORIGINATE ZONE 2    ORIGINATE ZONE 3      ALL CALL ORIG       RECEIVE ZONE 1        RECEIVE ZONE 2        RECEIVE ZONE 3        ALL CALL RECEIVE      CLEAR PAGING       3  Select station ports to be programmed                   Suggested Entrles  R   Receive  O   Originate   A   All Call  1 3   Zo
247. rame ground  The  grounding wire must be of  10 or  12 insulated  solid  copper and separate from the three wire AC line cord   A ground stud is located on the common equipment  cabinet for this purpose  System grounding is   illustrated in Figure 3 2              FUSE    4 LINE  8 STATION BASE UNIT            250   SLOW BLOW FUSE  8 LINE  IG STATION BASE UNIT       250V SLOW BLOW FUSE  IG LINE  32 STATION BASE UNIT       250   SLOW BLOW FUSE    PLUG IN                    NE SURGE PROTECTOR    TYPICAL                                          SER  DEDICATED   17       P id E TYPI LE OMEN  15        NEMA 5 158       d A  ELECTRICAL OUTLET      BASE UNIT SHOWN  WITH THIRD WIRE GROUND    UNIT SHOWN   2        7    7   GROUNDING  XN    E INTERFACE      OPTIONAL EXTERNAL  CONNECTOR TERMINAL   1 BATTERY AND             IONAL     CABLE ASSEMBLY wusic     IEXTERNAL      INPUT   Y       ASSEMBLY  PAGE INPUT       9 PEDEM STATUS              i   NR    ERES 2 TYPICAL EARTH GROUND sem       BUILDING FRAME  ETC                          NODULES      NEAR         SEE NOTE    7         Figure 3 2  AC Power Connection And System Groundina               vSU  29 INI           66 083    LINE CONNECTIONS    The line terminations for the common equipment  cabinet are standard modular plug jack connections   Each modularjack provides termination for two lines   Modular line jacks 1 and 2 also provide termination for  an auxiliary pair in addition to the two outside lines   The outside line terminati
248. rammed so that the TAP  RECALL  button will  generate a    flash    signal when it is pressed  When  custom calling features are not available  the TAP   RECALL  button functions as a positive disconnect  or  dial tone  recall button  These two features are  mutually exclusive  The flastvrecall tap time is  assigned through system class of service  programming     TENANT SERVICE    One telephone system can be used for multiple   tenants at a location by having flexible line appearance  at each station  Button mapping for line appearance  can be performed on each station using the station  class of service programming  Refer to the discussion  titled    Square Non Square Configuration     Description Of System Feat    TIMED HOLD RECALL    After a call has been on hold for a programmed length  of time the system will recall the station that placed  the call on hold  The system class of service  programming sets the timed hold recall time period     TOLL RESTRICTION  0 AND 1   See the discussion titled       Restriction  flexible      TOLL RESTRICTION  FLEXIBLE   System toll call restriction can be configured to  prohibit some or all stations from calling a wide range  of number combinations  The restricted numbers are  specified on up to 16 tables  The system assigns  several broad range values to two of these tables  and  assigns the tables to all lines as a default condition   The default tables need only to be enabled on a per  station basis to activate the default toll rest
249. ration    HI    Wn                  15  5 15                 PAINMAIN                               spuooes p          pepunos           euo  295     OML            JejsueJ                                         HED                euo            08 IUO                  GUO               anano             08 euo pue SISSING GUO  _             06                                    euo      295   08 euo   yee                           poy uo  Wed 1nd yey  uonels       820  Pjoy             popad inoeun           jo pue ey  ye pepunos  51554 euo   2  5   081                                   15114 euo   esu         euo           Puyeubis                   Spuooes                                            euo   295   091                          euo                    eouepeo Buu weiss 150        eur Xad o    SNU3LLVd 9NIONIH                 5 22    INTERCOM CALL PROGRESS TONES   Heard through handset recelver or over monitor speaker     Dial Tone    Called station ring back    Base level  program entry    Error tone   incorrectentry    All call and zone paging  Yotificationtone    Busy tone    Override feature  notallowed    Nignttransferfeature  not allowed                   5            and 3 sec  off     80 msec  tone burst  sounded once      30msec  tone burst    dounded three times    80 msec  tone burst  followed by 280 msec   tone burst    530 msec  tone bursts  sounded continuously       580 99 JWI       uone1edo waiskS         waiting tone               station      do
250. ration   Redwood City CA  94032       Model PE12V15 from GS PORTALAC  City Of  Industry CA  91748    Instal     The minimum battery backup time for a fully  configured system can be calculated  The formula for  doing this is   1 Ke     1     0 1   N      T   Back up time in hours   K   Constant  0 9 for CO408 with or without a CM408 module  0 8 for CO816 with or without CM408 modules  0 8 for Cl 632 with or without CM408 modules         Ampere hour capacity of battery  BBUO2   15   N   total number of stations    Example    Assume that a Cl 632 system plus      CM408  modules are installed along with a BBUO2 battery  assembly to provide back up power      08   15  12  Tcr 0a   ss     MEUS    e During AC operation  the common equipment  provides re charging current to maintain the voltage  potential of the external battery assembly at an  operational level  The charging circuit may not  provide an adequate charge if an installed battery  assembly has a current rating of greater than 40  ampere hours     NOTE  The optional BBUO2 external battery assembly  requires approximately 10 hours to completely  re charge to full potential after it has been  completely discharged and  in some cases   when initially installed     SYSTEM GROUNDING    The common equipment cabinet has internal   secondary surge protection on all line ports  In order   for this protection to be effective  the cabinet MUST be  connected to a reliable earth ground such as a metal  cold water pipe or a building f
251. required  This configuration is convenient   for adding a console to an existing tele   phone installation that already has  the logic paired port occupied   Do not use this configuration  for station ports 10 and 12  because the console buttons  will not be usable for  programming                      At Station Port 10                    0000000000000000           0000000    0000000000000000  0000000000000000  0000000000000000    Second DSS BLF Console    Paired Port DSS BLF Console  Installed At Station Port 19    Installed At Station Port 11     Figure 1  Dual Console Wiring    Continued on next page         vui          080    FEATURE    Dual  Console  Feature      continued    DigiTech Software Enhancement    BENEFIT  STATION 10 PROGRAMMING    To program a station port for the second console feature     1  Press        and dial     746    CONFIG  MODE  2  Dial 53 for station features  STATION FEATURES  3  Dial 34 for second console  SECOND CONSOLE  4  Assign console to station     Type console port number then type station port number that console is to be assigned to   5  Press SPKR  MNTR  to end     To clear a second console feature assignment   1  Repeat steps 1 through 3 above     2  Type console port number twice   3  Press SPKR          to end     VDT PROGRAMMING    To program a station        for the  second console feature   1  Type     7 4 6          press RETURN    2  Type 3  RETURN for Station COS    Type 10  RETURN for Miscellaneous Feature Programming    4 
252. requirements  A nominal distance of 7 feet  is recommended        The mounting location must be secure and dry and  have adequate ventilation  The temperature range  of the location must be within 32  22 degrees      O 50 degrees C   and the relative humidity must be  less than 90 percent non condensing     e    the mounting surface is damp or if it is concrete or  masonry material     backboard must be attached 10  the mounting surface to be used for common  equipment mounting  Suitable mounting  backboards are available commercially or can be  constructed out of 1 2 inch plywood cut to size     SPECIAL MOUNTING CONSIDERATION    When the battery back up is to be included as part of  the installation  the optional external batteries  cable  assembly  the common equipment  and the wiring  connections must be located in a dedicated equipment  room  as defined in the National Electric Code  published by The National Fire Protection Association   Quincy MA  02269      TOOLS AND HARDWARE        Fasteners   wood screws  1 4 x 1  inch round  head   toggle bolts  or  wall anchors    e Screwdriver to match fasteners    e Electric drill   if prepared holes are required    1     e Connecting tool     for fastening wires to a type 66  connector block     e Crimping tool     for 623 type modular plugs    MOUNTING PROCEDURE    Unpack and carefully inspect all equipment for  shipping damage  Notify the shipper immediately  of any damages found  Verify that the packages  contain all parts an
253. return to the  normal display of date and time     A user may clear an account code stored at a programmable button by pressing the Account  Code button twice  or by pressing           0 4 SPKR     DigiTech System Software Enhancements TAB 099    FEATURE    Account  Codes  cont      BENEFITS    ACCOUNT CODF FEATURE DEFAULTS    Account Code Feature   Off  Verified Non Verified   Verified  Forced Optional   Optional  Prompted Non Prompted   Prompted  Prompt Display Duration   5 seconds  Station Exceptions to Forced   None  Emergency Numbers    None  Valid Account Codes   None  Account Code Length   3   Verified Account Code Length  3    STATION 10 PROGRAMMING  1  Press            746    to enter COS programming    2  Press 7 5 for SMDA programming    To    To    To    To    To    To    set account codes     Press 0 5  Dial number of account digits    To enter another number  press    then dial digits    clear account codes     Press 0 6  Dial number of account code digits    To enter another number  press    then dial digits    enable or disable account codes           550 7  Press AI to toggle the feature on and off     LED        account codes enabled    Or   Press 1 to enable account codes  2 to disable account codes    set verified or unverified account codes     Press 0 8  Press Al to toggle the feature on and off  Al LED on   verification on    Or   Press 1 to enable verification  2 to disable verification    set maximum account code digits     Press 0 9      Dial number 
254. riction     In general  toll restriction works as follows     The programmable tables of restricted numbers  contain up to four entries with each entry containing  up to 16 digits     Each table of restricted numbers can be programmed  to be an  allow  table or a    deny    table with entries in  an    allow    table overriding entries in a    deny    table   This arrangement allows exceptions to toll restriction  to be enabled  For example  the dialing of  1 800                 numbers can be allowed even though  the dialing of all 1                        numbers is denied     A    match anything    symbol      can be stored to  represent any digit from 0 to 9  The programmed toll  restriction tables are individually assigned to each  appropriate station and line  When an outside call is  dialed  the system examines the dialed number and  makes a comparison between it and the toll restriction  tables  Any tables assigned to BOTH the station being  used and the selected line determine the restrictions to  be imposed     Dialing a restricted number on a restricted line from a  restricted station will cause the line to be automatically  disconnected from the station     Toll table class of service programming is used to  create the tables of restricted numbers     TOLL RESTRICTION  NIGHT MODE   Toll restriction tables that will only take effect when the  system is in the night transfer  of ringing  mode  can  be assigned to any or all stations in the system  These  toll tables
255. ridea  3  Select station ports to be programmed  41                          usy condition at a station  sound a   Station 10 57  Dial 10 57         191  45      raming tone  and gain access to the 1  Dial for next station feature  14                      xistingconversation   OR       H1    1      Hr                  10 4C  Dial       for configuration mode     __  ___ 52       H   1                                           20 Ooo ae   J52      1     2         25     157 l1        LT NED    Jo Not Disturb          Override      Dial 53    STATION FEATURES                ENTRY                         PORT   ENTRY               Dial  DND OVERRIDE   10    61   selectedstationscanbeprovidedwith   2  Dial 03    NDoverride capability  This capability   3  Select station ports to be programmed  H2    1 ps           44      illowsthe station to override    do not    Station 10   57  Dial 10     57         1       14        listurbcondition and ring astation    Dial kfor next station feature                                                  OR  15 l FS 1147 12   NOTE  Executive override  as      B i      described above  is auto  ig do  14    1041                              BE 911        1x 1           153 1  et OND INI DONIS 2               page 4 8       hs       55  _   DEFAULT   NOT ASSIGNED    Press SPKR to end                           WAS    580 99 IWI    A  1     Press            7 4 6    for base level                         FEATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DI
256. ring  Calls  opad          5 1  Making Calls 5e                 tato S cs tot qu tied           Gana a Re               5 2  Holding  Gall  wi                                             a ea E ru Fer RE ACA OX ue SEE Ys 5 4  Transferring  Calls                                                    5 4                              lt                                 5 5  Messaging      ah Was             ei                  Pe           QA eve d user eed Per A ung 5 5  Voice  Announce  Blocking  e a         At ose             Bae he                       5 6  bine                          o euet    deett        ote doe Peer             reple ei Gone E ab      5 6  Recall Flash  iz duod Aq at e a ERR SR TAY IA      5 6                    gus tn qo Be SLE Rut    Rb E                      ue  Bae gel    oai            5 7                                   DEVO               RUE SET IA e EN VES 5 7  Mute Handsfree Answer Inhibit                                               5 8  Pulse Tone  Switching  uon er ee a wp ve P eia bt vete ue bete s    5 7  Personal  Ringing Tones  uou ra udo leen roh Reheat    eR dub REPRE 5 8  Background MUSIC                              Ier EI                 REB E EE ee 5 8                                                                                              edidi ut       5  9  Automatic                                                                              ee pudet dut 5 9                           a    a                   s Rd pre had e
257. rom a remote site  proceed as follows     e  f a line switch is being employed  call someone at  the customer site  and ask that the switch be set for  modem operation     e After the outside line is connected to the modem   the data link can be made between the originating  and the remote modems     Programming can then be performed from the remote  site just as if the VDT or PC was connected directly to  the system     TYPICAL PC OPERATION    The following procedure is given as a typical example  for using         and      XMODEM type communications  software program to program the telephone system  It  is only provided for illustration and reference purposes  and describes a set up using a typical   communications software program known as  PROCOMM  produced by Datastorm Technologies   Inc    Many other communications software programs  are also available which can be used for this purpose   Individual operating procedures may vary with  different communications software programs but the  general process is similar to this     1  Perform turn on and program load procedures  f  operating through modems  take action  as  described in the previous discussion  to establish a  communications link between the PC and the  common equipment     4 84           66 083 System Programming      2  If the PC is directly connected to the common    equipment  match the data communications  parameters of the software program to those now       Press ESC then press ENTER to end the  terminal
258. rs as follows      e Press ALT 5               2 then press ENTER   e Type 1 then press ENTER        Use arrow keys to select VDT 100 or similar  emulation then press ENTER     NOTE  Setting the terminal emulation for a Wyse 50    or      100 emulation will provide a compatible  set of default values  however  any emulation  which provides full duplex operation is  satisfactory        Press ESC to finish       Press S then press ENTER  This action saves  the terminal parameters     common equipment to computer or up load COS  data from computer to common equipment     Down Load COS Data From Common  Equlpment To Computer        Type 1 then press ENTER     Press PAGE DOWN     Type 1 to choose XMODEM protocol     Type file name for down loaded COS data to  save into     e Press ENTER  The COS data  as programmed  in the common equipment  is automatically  down loaded to the computer file     Up Load COS Data From Computer To Common  Equipment       Type 2 then press ENTER       Press PAGE UP        Type 1 to choose XMODEM protocol      Type file name of saved COS data       Press ENTER  The COS data  as stored in the    computer file  is automatically up loaded to the  common equipment     9  Repeat step 8 except type 3 to down load currently    stored auto dial and speed dial numbers or type 4  to up oad them     10 Return to main menu and log off                                     Data  Port       Video Display Terminal Or  Personal Computer       Data Jack  Network Jack    
259. rs thus subject to  tampering or for environments where station users  must be limited as to the variety of features allowed to  them  Features are disabled by system class of  service  Once disabled  they can enabled by turning  on all features at once using the system default  programming     FLEXIBLE RINGING ASSIGNMENTS    Ringing assignments are programmable on            station per line basis  Pinging can be controlled for  every line that has an appearance at each station   Delayed ringing is assigned to certain lines at each  station through station class of service programming   Refer to the paragraph titled  Delayed Ringing     FLEXIBLE RINGING   ASSIGNMENTS OF PA PORT  The PA port can be programmed for flexible ringing  assignments and zone pages  Any desired lines can  be programmed for direct ring  delay ring  or night  transfer  of ringing  at this port  Paging can be to  programmed zone or to all call  A speaker can be  connected to the PA port to sound the ringing that is  generated by the system and sent to this port and  paging announcements when they are sent to the  programmed zone  Using such an arrangement  it is  possible for a user to determine that certain lines are  ringing  such as in a night transfer  of ringing  mode   and go to the nearest telephone and answer the call   The most common use for this arrangement is as a  night bell eliminating the need for external equipment  as required with the common ringer and auxiliary  ringer interface  The 
260. rt to be defaulted    will provide satisfactory system   Station 10     57  Dial 10   57    performance in a broad range of site 4  Dial    for additional stations to default   applications  OR     Dial       for configuration mode          Press             toend       WUC          UO   7    580 99 INI            Press            746    for base level           FEATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY                    RECORD    Flexlble Station Numbering  The  system supports a flexible station  numbering plan for calling individual  stations and departments  Each station         be programmed to respond to the  Jialing of any available number between  10 and 7999  however  the same dialing  2006 cannot be assigned as both a  station extension number and a  department access code  nor will the  System allow an extension number or  access code conflict such as 15 and  1500 to be assigned     Direct Department Calling  Access  Codes   Department access codes can  be programmed to be any number  between 10 and 7999  however  the  same dialing code cannot be assigned  as both a station extension number and     department access code nor will the  system allow an extension number  conflict such as 15 and 1500 to be  assigned  Further  with system defaultet  extension numbers  assigned  department access codes must start at  0058 or larger     NOTE  See page 4  18 for line  assignment and page  4 3 1 for station assignment    1  Dial 52   ACCESS CODE    2  Dial 1 to 
261. s  Part 68  The  FCC registration label on the KSU contains the FCC  registration number  the ringer equivalence number  the  model number  and the serial number or production date of  the system     NOTIFICATION TO TELEPHONE COMPANY    Unless a telephone operating company provides and installs  the system  the telephone operating company which  provides the lines must be notified before a connection is  made to them  The lines  telephone numbers  involved  the  FCC registration number  and the ringer equivalence number  must be provided to the telephone company  The FCC  registration number and the ringer equivalence number of  this equipment are provided on the label attached to the  common equipment The user installer is required to notify  the telephone company when final disconnection of this  equipment from the telephone company line occurs     COMPATIBILITY WITH TELEPHONE NETWORK    When necessary  the telephone operating company provides  information on the maximum number of telephones or  ringers that can be connected to one line  as well as any  other applicable technical information  The telephone  operating company can temporarily discontinue service and  make changes which could affect the operation of this  equipment  They must  however  provide adequate notice   in writing  of any future equipment changes that would make  the system incompatible     INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS    Connection of the electronic key system to the telephone  lines must be through a un
262. s associated with visual ring  indication can be enabled or disabled on a  system wide basis  When enabled  the audible  indication of ringing can then be enabled on a  station by station basis  Enable or disable visual ring  indication on a system wide basis with system class of  service programming  Enable or disable audible ring  indication on a station by station basis with station  class of service programing     STATION SPEED DIAL  Each station can be programmed to provide 10 speed  dial numbers at the buttonpad buttons  Station speed  dial numbers can be up to 16 digits in length and can  include line or intercom selection  numbers     S   pauses  and flash signals  A pause is stored each time  the HOLD button is pressed  and a flash signal is  stored each time the TAP button is pressed     STATION TO STATION MESSAGING    If a station has a DSS BLF appearance at another  station  a callback message indication can be left at  that station with the DSSYBLF appearance  By dialing  a special code  the BLF light at the called station that is  assigned to the calling station can be activated  This  light indicates that a callback is requested  The light is  automatically turned off if a successful callback is  made     If a station number is not programmed for a DSS BLF  appearance at another station  attempting to place a  call back message will cause the central message desk  Station to ring  If there is no central message desk  assigned  no action will occur           66 
263. s private  a user can press the privacy  button to change it into a non private one  If the line is  non private  pressing the button will have no effect   Station class of service programming is used to  program the programmable button function at the  stations     PRIVACY RELEASE   BROKERAGE SERVICE  See the discussion titled  Privacy    Designated  Programmable button    PRIVATE LINES  ACCESS DENIED   See the discussion titled  Access Denied     PROGRAMMABLE DSS BLF   DIRECT STATION SELECTION BUSY  LIGHT FIELD    A station user can store one button  direct station  selection  DSS  at any memory button location to  create    055 memory button  When this button is  pressed  any active outside call is automatically placed  on hold and an intercom call is automatically made to  that previously stored station number  The visual  indicators of the stations programmed at the button  locations form a busy lamp field  BLF   The BLF  conveys station status to the user  An autodial number  can also be programmed as a secondary function at  every DSS BLF memory location  No class of service  is required  Also refer to the discussion titled  Tone Or  Voice Signalling  intercom      PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS  Refer to the discussions titled  Full Button  Programmability OfFeatures  Programmable DSS BLF   and Dedicated Programmable buttons     PULSE TONE SWITCHABLE  The system can be programmed on a per line basis 10  allow the stations to switch from pulse to DTMF type  dialing as needed  Af
264. s through the  station class of service programming     MEMORY RETENTION WITHOUT  BATTERIES    The system memory is electronically protected during  AC power failures by an electronic device sometimes  known as a    super cap     The stored program data will  remain in memory for a minimum of 65 hours provided  that the system has been powered continuously for at  least 30 minutes prior to the power failure or  disconnection  Also  the system clock will continue to  run and keep time for at least 30 minutes after an AC  power failure or disconnection     MESSAGE WAITING    Special feature access codes enable a station user to  control the message waiting  MW  light at other  stations in the system  When the message waiting  light is turned on at a station  a call can be  automatically placed to the station that turned it on     Alternately  one station can be designated by COS  programming as the central message desk and can be  arranged for exclusive message waiting control  The  central message desk can be used to control message  waiting lights and deliver messages to and from all  other stations in the system  The ability of a station to  originate a message waiting signal is enabled by  programming action  Station class of service    2 12    1  166 083    programming provides a station with the ability to  originate a message waiting signal and is used to  create a central message desk     MODULAR WIRING AND JACKSR  OR   4 CONDUCTOR WIRE SYSTEM   The system can be comple
265. sfer                               5 5  Unsupervised Conference                      5 5           66 083             Programming                   2 5  4 83         Programming Procedure                 4 83  VideoDisplayTerminalProgramming             4 83  Voice Announce Block Button                  447  Voice Announce Blocking               2 18  4 25  5 6  Voice Mail  Automatic Transfer                4 55  Voice Mail Line ID                       4 55  Voice                                     4 57    Index    Voice Mail Transfer on Busy                2 18  4 56   Voltage Check   e n Ke   3 31   W   IIT MER E RETE EET  81   2   ZoneCallBand Tables                     4 69  zone Page Ali CallSutton                    445  Zone Paging  Via Station Speakers              2 18    Cut along Line    Cut Along Line                                                        gt  o o                                 ee                                                             a  o       READERS COMMENT FORM    Publication No  7 issue No     Title    How did you use this publication         Product familiarization Q Training  D  Installation O Maintenance  Other    Please check specific criticism s   give pagenumber s   and explain below   O Clarification on page s  __________    Error on page s          Addition on page s     Deletion on page s     Comments     Thank you for your cooperation   f a reply is required  please check         Name         Your Function   Company  Address
266. sferred to another station  without being announced  The transferred call will  camp on to the other station where it will ring and  await an answer  The call will automatically ring back  to the transferring station after a programmable recall  period  There is no limit as to how many calls can be  camped onto another station  A transferred call will  only ring if the station is idle  The system class of  service programming determines the recall time for an  unanswered transferred call     CALL WAITING TONE  The call waiting tone may be signalled to a busy  station to indicate that another station or the attendant  wants to contact the busy station  A special code is  dialed to activate the tone     CALLING STATION   IDENTIFICATION ON BLF  If the station number of a calling station has been  programmed into the direct station select busy lamp  field  DSS BLF  of a called station  the caller will be  identified by flashing at the corresponding BLF light   The lights also indicate the status of the DSS  telephones  dark   idle  steady on        use  flash    calling  or ringing when station monitoring is enabled    and flutter   call back request  if feature is available   No class of service programming is required for this  feature  Also refer to the discussions titled   Programmable DSS BL F and Call Messaging     CLASS OF SERVICE PROGRAMMING   FROM MAIN STATION    Class of service  COS  programming is used by the  installer to configure and assign all system  line   stati
267. sion Module                        Character Dialing Codes Chart        t t t e t e     Character Codes OON M gut                ray  Tey                       vie tee WON ela TEN                        Tr 3 7  TA PI 3 8  nor 3 9            3 10  eee ee 3 23          3 25    IMI 66             danas DENEN  1 5                              6      7  3 2     PTT 3 4  n  3 11       3 12   8 13   8 14     3 15     3 16   847   8 18                   ae      34 9     3 21    3 22     3 24   3 26    TT 3 28   A  3 30     Se Fase 4 49     4 67   4 86   5 18                       6 2     4 91  4 92    3 6     4 21   5 16    vivi ov U83    System Overview    CHAPTER   SYSTEMOVERVIEW    SECTION 1  INTRODUCTION    The digital telephone system is an expandable  communications system with many attractive  characteristics including the following     Unitized base unit which includes all system  features  The base unit is full featured and  self contained     Expansion modules which increase station and  line capacity  A 4 line  8 station expansion module is  available  It can be added singly or in pairs to   increase the station and line capacity of an existing  base unit installation     Secure off hook voice announce  SOHVA  feature     The SOHVA feature allows a station user to talk to a  busy station without being heard by the outside party  at the busy station  The called user can easily send  back a pre programmed LCD message or talk to the  caller without being heard by the outside 
268. speaker cannot be used for voice  response as the path is one way only  Use system  class of service programming to assign ringing and  paging to a PA port     FLEXIBLE STATION AND LINE   CLASS OF SERVICE CONTROL  The extension number of a station and all other  programmable attributes that are initially assigned to a  particular station port and the line  along with all  programmable line attributes that are initially  connected to a particular line port can be re assigned  to a different port through programming action  This  feature allows adds  moves  and changes without    1  166 083    re locating the station and line wiring  Line and station  class of service programming are used to reassign  stations and lines  Also refer to the discussion titled   Auxiliary Ringer Interface     FLEXIBLE STATION NUMBERING PLAN  The system supports a flexible station numbering plan  for individual stations  Each station can be  programmed to respond to the dialing of any available  number between 10 and 7999  This feature may be  used to match the calling number of a station located  in a pre numbered area to that area number  A  combination of two  three  or four digit extension  numbers can be assigned as long as they do not  conflict  For example  If 21 is assigned as an  extension number  there can not be any other  extension number assigned that begins with a 21  The  System class of service programming is used to assign  extension numbers to individual station ports     FULL BUTT
269. ss Al      Dial 2 or Press A2     Dial 3 or Press            Dial 4 or Press A4       Dial 5 or Press A5       Dial 6 or Press           Dial 7 or Press   9        Dial 6 or Press A10       Dial 9 or Press     1        Dial 0 or Press A12     Dial    for configuration mode       Dial 13    Select time       Dial 1 or Press Al       Dial 2 or Press A2      Dial 3 or Press           Dial 4 or Press M       Dial 5 or Press A5      Dial 6 or Press           Dial 7 or Press             Dial 6 or Press A10      Dial 9 or Press Al 1       Dial 0 or Press A12      RECALUFLSH XXXX      RECALUFLSH 0 08   WECALUFLSH 0 30   WECALUFLSH 0 50    RECALUFLSH 0 60    RECALUFLSH 0 75    RECALUFLSH 0 88     RECALUFLSH 1    RECALUFLSH 7 50     RECALUFLSH 2      RECALUFLSH 3      PAUSE TIME XXX       PAUSE TIME 0 50     PAUSE TIME 1     PAUSE TIME 1 50     PAUSE TIME2     PAUSE TIME        PAUSE TIME 5     PAUSE TIME 7 50     PAUSE TIME 10    PAUSE TIME 15    PAUSE TIME 20       Dial    for configuration mode     DEFAULT         Press SPKR to end     X                    01 4 UJO SAS       80 99 IWI    Press             7 4 6    for base level          DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY       Imed Hold Recall  After a call has  been on hold for a programmed    ngth of time  the system will recall  the station that placed the call on  old  The timing is in seconds        Jata Baud Rate  The speed or baud  ate of the data bit stream  which  aries the SMDR and configuration  lata between th
270. stalled and used  properly  may cause interference to radio and television  reception  This equipment has been tested and found to  comply with the limits for a Class A computing device  pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules  These limits  are designed to provide reasonable protection against such  interference when operated in a commercial environment   Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause  interference to radio and television reception  in which case  the user is encouraged to take whatever measures may be  required to correct the interference  If this equipment does  cause interference to radio or television reception  which can  be determined by turning the equipment off and on  the user  is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or  more of the following measures  Reorient the television or  radio s receiving antenna  and or relocate the KSU  the  individual telephone stations  and the radio or TV with  respect to each other  If necessary  the user should consult  the manufacturer or an experienced radio television  technician for additiinal suggestions  The user may find the  following booklet prepared by the Federal Communications  Commission helpful     How to Identify and Resolve Radio TV  Interference Problems   This booklet is available from the  Government Printing Office  Washington D C  20402  Stock  No  004 000 00345 4     This digital apparatus does not exceed the  Class A  limits  for radio noise emissions from dig
271. station 11    57  Dial 11     57   4  Dial    for another link or press SPKR to end     VOICE MAIL LINE ID  Optlon     The programmer can program the ExecuMail lines with identification  ID  numbers that allow the  ExecuMail system to identify which line it is answering  The ID numbers that the programmer  assigns here must match the ID numbers that are selected as part of ExecuMail system  programming     To program this feature  press ITCM      7 4 6      then do the following steps     1  Dial 43     VOICE MAIL LN ID   2  Select line port     line port 1 14   Dial 01     14 or Press Al      14            port 15  16   Dial 15  16 or press B1  B2     line port 17 24   Dial 17     24  or press HOLD then press Al     8    3  Dial      clear current ID   4  Dial ID number  6 digit maximum    5  Press SPKR to end     VOICE MAIL TRANSFER ON BUSY  Optlon     The programmer can arrange the system to alert a busy telephone that the ExecuMail system is  attempting to transfer a call to it instead of having it automatically route the call to a voice mail  box  He or she can use this programming feature to program a station  usually the attendant  station  for this option     To program this feature  press            7 4 6    then do the following steps     1  Dial 53   STATION FEATURES   2  Dial 31           XFR ON   5      3  Select station ports to be programmed      Station 11     57  Dial 11    57   4  Press SPKR to end           091    STATION 10   PROGRAMMING OVERLAY    Cut out
272. such as headsets  tape recorders  external ringers and  external pagers     continued on next                FEATURE          09 1    BENEFIT    Support for DigiTech There are several items that the installer programmer needs to consider when installing the    telephones with a  revision letter of   or  later     continued    Support for  single line   proprietary  telephones    revision   and later DigiTech telephone to a DigiTech system  These items are detailed below        While the DigiTech system with software release 11 a and later supports the use of all DigiTech  telephones regardless of their revision letter  any systems with a software release of 9 or earlier  will not support the revision   and later telephones       other words  whenvever a system includes  revision   or later telephones  be sure that the system software release is 11 a or later        Always program station ports to provide ringing line preference to revision   and later  telephones that are connected there  This action is necessary before the orange LED feature can  become active        The auxiliary jack will only serve the external device listed in the telephone display and will only  serve one of those devices at a time  The user must program a separate enable disable button   for each external device that he or she plans to connect to the auxiliary jack  The installer must  provide external power for the auxiliary device if it requires power  The telephone does not   supply any power to the
273. t Code Display Duration   Account Code Display for Incoming    Enable Disable  Account Code Display for Outgoing    Enable Disable  Emergency Numbers   Valid Account Codes    Enter 5 for All Station COS Data Printout  the system will print the status of  Forced  Account Code at Station     Note  If Account Code Length is greater than eight digits  SMDA reports by  station and by account will print in a two line format  Also  SMDR and  SMDA reports will include the Caller ID number in the number field for  incoming calls  The Caller ID number will be  preceded by a slash to  distinguish it from outgoing digits     Support for GENERAL INFORMATION   Caller ID Service Caller ID data is sent from the Central Off ice along lines assigned to the Caller ID service  Caller  ID information is displayed at a station only if the station is assigned to the Caller ID service  and  then only for Caller ID lines at that station which       ring audibly    are answered by pressing the ringing line    are transferred to the station    Caller ID data for a call is received at a station between the first and second rings  Through  programming  you can enable the first ring for a line assigned to Caller ID to be either audible or  silent  Selecting the  silent  option insures that the Caller ID data is displayed prior to ringing   which nearly eliminates the loss of Caller ID data due to premature answering     AUTOMATICALLY DIALING CALLER ID NUMBERS   Station users may automatically retrieve and
274. t purpose         light flutters while auto redial is  active       Number will be dialed once a minute for ten minutes   If called number Is busy       Press auto redial programmable button to  immediately start the re dial cycle     If call is answered      Take control by lifting handset  If control 15 not  taken  call will drop    To cancel automatic redial       Press auto redial button  lift and replace handset  or  press any station button   NOTE  Any user originated station activity during  automatic redial will cancel the feature     LAST NUMBERREDIAL  The last number previously dialed can be    automatically redialed with one button      two button  action     Dial     If on line listening to dial tone  press HOLD  then dial        Listen for ringing or busy tone      Ringing tone  When party answers       handset     Busy tone  Press           SPKR  to disconnect     System    Operation IMI 66 083    SAVED NUMBER REDIAL    The first 16 digits of the last manually dialed number  can be saved for later redial     To save the number         Press programmable button designated by class 0    service programming for this purpose     To dial a saved number       Lii handset  Listen for dial tone     e Press HOLD then press pre programmed  programmable button     HOLDING CALLS    MANUAL HOLD    To place call on hold    e Press HOLD  Status light will flash for line calls   Intercom hold causes intercom light to flash   To retrieve held call     e Press      with flashing 
275. t system features   System retums to configuration mode     Dial 30   LINE DEFAULT      Press   to default line features   System retums to configuration mode     Dial 50   STATION DEFAULT    Dial 00 to default station ports system wide      OR   Select station port to be defaulted       Station 10   57  Dial 10    57    Dial    for additional stations to default   Dial       for configuration mode          Press SPKR to end                 WO PONS    1       80 99 IWI                      SYSTEMCONFIGURATION          Mark the desired selections in the charts to record programming needs     Dial the feature code and then dial the selection code      press the programming button to program the selection   NOTE  A current program setting is indicated Dy a lghted LED next to the programming button for that selection  When a toggle  on off  action  is provided by a sing e button  the lighted LED indicates an active feature    EATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD  Base Level  The first step in any Press        Dial   7 4 6      programming sequence is to enter the  base level  Once in this mode  any  desired configuration can be set   System Defauft  The system 1  Dial 10   SYSTEM DEFAULT   onfiguration features  described in 2  Press  40 default system features   the following procedures  can be  lefautted to a standard set of values   These values will provide satisfactory  ystem performance in a broad range  f site applications   Jnanswered      
276. tation 10    57  Dial 10     57       Dial    for further ACCOUNT CODE    button assignment    OR    Dial       for next button mapping feature    OR    Dial          for next configuration mode             CHART ON PAGE 4 49     SEE CHART ON PAGE 4 49      Press SPKR to end        DUIWUWEIDOI ef           5      80 99 IWI           66 083 System Programming      NON    SQUARE SYSTEM REFERENCE RECORD   Copy this chart for additional record space if add on expansion modules are included with the system       BUTTON B1    2         B4   85   B6   B7   B8           2        1  4   AS          A    A8   A9   A10 A11 A12 A13 A14            SA          ERR D E D                   SRR SAREE  ath                         EE                  28 NN                           ee                             reden ae  Eccc LES              ETC                                                                         E                              o             olojo         o      gt              gt   gt     i           T E      ES LE     _ Ju eres  S HH         STA       TA           SE Lors quo de    tI d ND i TEES      DEFAULT SETTINGS  B1  B8   Line 1   Line 8  and     21    2 19         17  A4   15    513         11   A7 x 9  A82 22        20  A10   18  All   16  Al2   14  AI3   12         10          4 49    an    STATION RECORE   Copy This Record Sheet As Required Fo  Additional Stations               g  3         LCD Speakerphone  PROGRAMMED BUTTON FUNCTION        Enter code on button
277. tation Operation                5411  Description  Common Equpment                  3  Description Of System Features                2    Description  Station _                      f 3  Designated Programmable Buttons               2 7  Dial 0 For System Attendant                    2 7  Dial Time Limit  DISD                     4 53  Dial Time Limit  Calf Costing                   4 73  Dimensions 22222222024                       1 8  Direct Department Calling                   4 31  Direct Department Calling  Access Codes           4 23  Direct Department Calling With DCD           2 7  4 18  Direct Inward Station Dialing             2 8  4 53  5 17  Direct Station Call     00                   2 9  Direct Station     000                       5 4  Direct Station Selection Programmable            2 9  DiscardDightS              4 73  DISD Assist Station                      4 53  DISD Incoming Rings                     4 53  Display  Account Code                    4 76  Display Intensity                        5 21  Display Of Costed Calls                    4 34  Distinctive Ringing                          2 9       Not Disturb                       2 9  5 7  Do Not Disturb Button                     444  Do Not Disturb Inhibit                    2 9  4 8  Do Not Disturb Override                   2 9  4 24  DSS BLF Buttons                       442  DSS BLF Programming                    5 12  Dual Intercom                          2 9  Dynamic Line Buttons           
278. tation extension number    PHYS PORT              Dial physical port number 10   57    LOGICAL STA XX        Dial   to make assignment     0010   7999     i  Dial    for configuration mode          ND       gt            Dial 56      BLK PROGRAMMING      Select model station port      Station 10    57   dial 10   57     MODELSTA XX        Dial first station port in block  dial code as above    Dial        Dial last station port in block  dial code as above    Dial        Dial    for further block programming      OR   Dial       for configuration mode     NOTE  The first  last and all station ports in between will be  block programmed      the mode  station port  To  block program an individual station port  select the first  and last port to be the same number   For example  25   264 26  programs station 26 exactly as 25      REFERENCE RECORD                      RNTRY   PORT   ENTRY      3 1 142 1                          H e       GO  ag        31        ne           12   1    14      8    135 1 T                                    3  ee                   4   40 56    5 41 57  PORT 10   STA 10  ETC     MOLD A LION  BLOCKED STATIONS            Press SPKR to end     580 99 INI                                   45         d    Press             7 4 6   for base level        EATURE DESCRIPTION  NTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY    3tatlon Disable  Station ports can be    Dial 59   DISABLE  STATIONS        Select station ports to be disabled        Station 10   57  Dial 10   57  
279. te ust   5 9  Service Observing  uxo    Ros Re                                       m XT        ux            5 10  Executive  Qverride                     o        Aya med                      A EUR                                                                  5 10  Speakerphone  Operation zug                                             auae      E ERRORES  5 11  Departmental Station Operation                       eR pri                            P RR        5 11  Station User Programming                                                  2 3 5 11  SECTION 2 ATTENDANT STATION OPERATION                               5 14  System Glock           hte                             5 14  System Speed Dial Programming                                              5 14  Night Transfer Ot Ringing   255                                      OI Ru                      USA RSS  5 14  Music sOnvHold   12 deus te sx Semet qai               eda       5 15  ECD   Messaging  asks pga        E haus NER ege e etm                                5 15  Station Names                              8 15  Station Message Detail Accounting  SMDA  Printout                                    5 17  System Alarm Reporting               5 17  Direct Inward Station Dialing 0                                              5 17  SECTION 3 SYSTEM OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS                           5 19  Feature Code Numbering Plan                                                 5 19  Ringer Volume Control    2 2
280. tely interconnected by   employing industry standard 50        connectors and   modular plug jack combinations  Station wiring is   small  2 conductor  twisted pair cable throughout the   system  A 4 conductor twisted pair cable can be   employed if a spare pair is required for a separate   wiring purpose    MUSIC INTERFACE  EXTERNAL SOURCE  REQUIRED    A jack is provided on the common equipment for the   connection of a customer provided music source    Also refer to the discussions titled  Background   and Music On Hold     Music    MUSIC ON HOLD    Music is provided to outside lines that are placed on  hold if an external music source is connected to the    system  Refer to the discussion titled  Music  Interface   MUSIC ON HOLD SYSTEM WIDE    ENABLE DISABLE  Music is provided to outside lines that are placed on  hold if an external music source is connected to the  system  Musicon hold can be disabled system wide  by attendant action  Also see discussions titled   Music Interface        Music On Hold     MUTE    Each station has a MUTE button which  when pressed   will mute the handset transmitter  or internal   microphone on speakerphones  to prevent the user s  voice from being heard by the distant party  The   MNTR  SPKR  light flutters to indicate a muted   condition  The button provides     push on push off  operation on speakerphones  No class of service is  required  Also refer to the discussion titled    Handsfree  Answer Inhibit     NIGHT TRANSFER  OF RINGING   N
281. tem Overview                 1690 7   6867       jueuidinb3                                                2 1 anba  euoudeje                                   J             1899 LZ                           2                              _             80998                System Overview          83    soDeui  uos  5 1           4     Sepoo jonpoud jonpoud                      EJDIp JO 151     10J 6 1            eeg  310N    euoudeje                X  euoudaexyeeds 007  1  8                                  CDED EH     CD CD ED  CD C9 CH  CD                 D  GR   D        1                                       d ho                                          SS ee         Q  V             System Overview        66 0       SECTION4  GENERALSPECIFICATIONS    4 LINE  8 LINE  16 LINE  8 STATION  16 STATION 32 STATION  SYSTEM CAPACITY  LINES  4 8 16  STATIONS  8 16 32  DSS BLF CONSOLES   FUTURE FEATURE   INTERCOM PATHS  Non blocking Non blocking Non blocking  MAXIMUM SIMULTANEOUS  INTERCOM CONVERSATIONS  Non blocking Non blocking Non blocking  PAGING PORTS     1  PARK ORBITS 9 9 9  SPEED DIALS  SYSTEM 99 99 99  STATION 10 10 10  AUTODIALS Unused buttons Unused buttons Unused buttons  POWER FAIL CIRCUITS     1  CONFERENCING     Maximum Combinations  At Any One Time    five way plus 1 three way    plus 2 SOHVA    4 five way plus 5 three way  plus 1 SOHVA    2 four way plus 2 SOHVA    four way plus 3 three way  5 three way plus 1 SOHVA    6 four way plus 2 three way  3 four way plus
282. temately  the system can be  programmed to only allow tone dialing  The line class  of service programming sets the dialing mode required  for a particular line     RESPONSE MESSAGING    This feature allows a user to reply in a non verbal  manner to a voice announce or tone signalled  intercom call or to a secure off  hook voice announce  call if the intercom caller is using an LCD  speakerphone  A station user can press a  programmable button in response to an intercom        and send a message to be shown on the display of the  calling station  Response messages are  pre programmed by the attendant and later stored by  station users at programmable buttons on their  individual stations as need dictates     REMOTE PROGRAMMING   AND ADMINISTRATION  Both remote class of service programming and the  transmission of SMDR data for printing are available  through serial data ports  The system supports X on  X off terminal control codes as well as a DTR signal for  handshaking  The system data communications  operates per the popular XMODEM protocol  The  database can be uploaded or downloaded  error free   from or to a remote computer that is running software  that supports the XMODEM protocol  The two serial  data ports allow VDT programming  either local or  remote  to be conducted through one port at the same  time that the other port is being used to send SMDR  data for printing  VDT programming of the system is  menu driven     RINGING LINE PREFERENCE    The system can be pro
283. ter Account Code          the prompt    Enter Account Code    appears  type in only one valid account code   the system will respond with  Command Accepted    and will allow immediate  subsequent account code entry        f you type in more or less than the number of digits      as the verified  account code length  the system will respond with Command Rejected            To enable optional account codes  with verification       Enter3    To enable optional account codes  without verification      Enter4    To enable forced account codes  with verification      Enter 5    To enable forced account codes  without verification        Enter 6      TAB 099    FEATURE        sount  _            cont      T                      T          T                                      T                          DigiTech System Software Enhancements    BENEFITS    DT COS PRO     disable account codes     Enter7    enable account code display for incoming calls     Enter8    disable account code display for incoming calls     Enter9    enable account codes display for outgoing calls     Enter 1 0    disable account code display for outgoing calls     Enter 1 1    set the account code message display time     Enter 12    Type in display time   20 seconds     set the maximum account code length     Enter 1 3      Type in account code length  3   16 digits    this number must be greater than or equal  to the number of digits to verify    set the number of account code digits to verify     Enter 
284. ter3  Dial station number s     To remove Caller ID service from stations       Enter4      Dial station number s     10    TAB 099           099 DigiTech System Software Enhancements    FEATURE BENEFITS  r    er ID  cont   VDT PROGRAMMING             To define your local area code     Enter 5  Enter Y if displayed area code is correct    or    Enter N if displayed area code is incorrect  then enter the correct three digit area  code    To define your local office codes     Enter 6      Enter 1 to define a new local office code  then enter six sigits or five digits plus a  wildcard character        Enter 2 to delete the local off ice code last displayed  Enter 3 to display the next office code   Enter 4 to display all local off ice codes in list   Enter 5 to return to previous menu    To set the Audible first Ring option       Enter7  Enter 0 to silence first ring on Caller ID lines    or  Enter 1 to enable Audible First Ring    To set the Caller ID Distribution option     Enter8  Enter 0 to disable Caller ID Distribution    or    Enter 1 to enable Caller ID Distribution to SMDR port    To return to previous menu     Enter9    To set terminal printout of line and station Caller ID assignment status     Enter COS programming    Enter 1 for System COS   Enter 6 for COS data printout     Enter 3 for ALL line COS data     Enter 4 for SELECTED line COS data  then enter line number  Enter 5 for ALL station COS data  Enter 6 for SELECTED COS data  then enter station number    Caller
285. that can be connected to this port     INTERCOM HUNT GROUP    Station ports can be assigned to intercom hunt  groups  When a station that is assigned to a hunt  group is busy or is a ring no answer  RNA   a call to it  will ring at the next idle station in the group  A hunt  group can be terminal or circular  A call will route down  a terminal group from the called station until it finds an  idle station or reaches the end of the group  A call will  search around a circular group until it encounters an  idle station or until all stations in the circular group are  searched  The ringing time at any one station is  programmable  Hunt groups are created through  station class of service programming     INTERCOM LINE TIMEOUT  Should the intercom line be selected with no dialing or  other action taking place  the intercom will timeout  after ten seconds  and return to an idle state     LAST NUMBER REDIAL    Each station is provided with a last number redial  feature  This feature will save 32 digits of the last  outside number dialed  A newly dialed number will        won Of System Features IMI66 083    always automatically replace a previously dialed  number  Upon command  the system will choose a  Line and redial the saved number  The system will first  choose the prime line if assigned and idle  If it is busy  or unavailable  the system will choose any line  assigned to idle line preference  If they are  unavailable  the system will chose the last line used at  the station  If 
286. the  line  If extension number dialing is not completed  within the programmed dial time limit  the call is routed    2 8          66 083    to the DISD assist station if one is programmed   otherwise  the line is dropped  If the assist station is  busy  call will camp on at the assist station  or if the  assist station does not answer before the transfer recall  timeout period  the system will return the caller    DISD  dial tone  If extension number dialing is not completed  within the dial time limit this time  the line is dropped     It is recommended that a music source be connected  to the system to provide a reassurance to the caller  during a camp on situation when the DISD feature is  being used     DIRECT STATION CALL   HOLD  STATION PARK   This feature allows a station user to park a call at a  specific station where it will be held without ringing  A  feature code plus a station extension number can be  dialed over the intercom line to park the call or a  programmable button        be programmed to provide  a    directed hold    to a specific station  The parked call  is picked up by directed station by dialing a feature  code    can be picked up at any station through the  use of the call pickup feature  No class of service is  required  Also refer to the discussions titled  Call  PickUp   Directed and Call Park     DIRECT STATION SELECTION  DSS   PROGRAMMABLE    Refer to the discussion titled  ProgrammableDSS BLF     DISTINCTIVE RINGING  The ringing cadence of a
287. those collected during the printing operation    These are stored for later printing     FEATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD  DEP JEP BER    Station Message Detall Accounting 1  Dial 75   SMDA PROGRAMMING                NUMBER        Department Numbers  Eight different   2  Dial 04 to define department numbers    department numbers can be defined so  SMDA DEPARTMENTS    that SMDA call cost reports can be 3  Dial 1 6 for dept  18   DEPT X     produced on a department by                  4 4 Digi 0000 9999 for department number    basis       DEPTX YYYY     NOTE  Each station in the system can 5  Dial    for next department  and repeat steps      3 7 until all departments are numbered   cd pem ds      6  Dials   for next SM DA feature  pera CENONE AS GND  no assignment is required  7  Dial  for configuration mode   Refer to the procedure given on  page 4 32 for station  assignment details         Press SPKR to end           80 99 IWNI    PressITCM  746 for base ees      EATURE DESCRIPTION E ws CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY    iccount Codes  Account codes are used 1    1  Dial 75   SMDA PROGRAMMING      identify calls by category  or by any 2  Dial 05 to configure account codes     ther desired grouping  so that costing by  that category or grouping can be   worded  An account code can be a  ninimum of three numbers and a  naximum of eight numbers      SET ACCT  CODE        Dial account code number  000    999    b  Dial   plus next account number 
288. thout indicators  e TAP  TRANS CONF    MUTE  e Programmable buttons with indicators       7 foot  G conductor line cord   e 6 position  4  or 6 conductor modular line jack  e K type handset  hearing aid compatible    e Ringer volume control  Off  Low  and High       Wall mounting capability    1 3    System Overview        66    The image designations refer to the number of available in both monitor and speakerphone   programmable buttons located below the keypad  versions    including the hold and intercom buttons  as opposed   The LCD speakerphone is available in a 5x14   to the number of programmable buttons located above image  This image provides a priority line grouping   the keypad  and contains a liquid crystal display  which shows     The 10x14 image provides a moderate sized line call handling data and other useful information  The  button matrix along with a moderate sized priority LCD speakerphone is used as an attendant station  line button grouping  This image is best suited for as well as being very applicable for use as an  typical work area stations  The 10x14 image is executive station           00 083 System Overview    20 50       4 Line  8 Statlon Base Unit         16 50                                             26 25           8 Line  16 Station Base Unit    14 87  16 50          77 44   4 54     _____________  AE SE            26 65       283        16 Line  3 Station Base Unk    Figure 1 l  Outline Dimensions   Common Equipment           66 0     Sys
289. tion     Example  A telephone company exchange consists of office codes 976 977  and 978       ice code 976 is assigned to an outlying area while off ice  codes 977 and 978 are assigned to the heart of the city  Assign 977 and 978 to one office code band table and 976 to another one    Program a special  call costing rate for each banding table  Then  calls that are made to 976 nnnn are costed at a different rate than calls that are made to 977 nnnn or  978 nnnn     3  ZONE CALL BAND TABLES  LONG DISTANCE CALLS     In certain heavily populated geographic areas  different area codes exist within the same geographic distance  or zone  from the calling location  In  these cases  use zone call band tables to cost calls based upon the zone  or geographic distance  from the caller     All calls that do not match exception tables are measured for the number of digits dialed  Those calls with numbers that have 10 digits or more  long  distance calls  are compared to entries in the zone call band tables  Zone call band tables are the second orioritv level of costing for long distance  calls  They provide a means of assigning office codes and corresponding area code into different zones and applying a separate call costing rate table  to each zone  Zone call band tables 1   4 are associated with call rate tables 25   28  A call must match both the office code and area code of an entry  before it is costed by a zone call band table     Example  Zone 1 contains area code 203 with office 
290. tion    A line port can be configured by class of service           programming to be an AUXILIARY port  As an e The audio input of an external paging amplifier can  AUXILIARY port  it can be used to couple a station to be connected to the tip and ring leads of the  an external paging device  This coupling is done from AUXILIARY port as shown in Figure 3 11 below   any station with that line presence by pressing the  proper line key to select the AUXILIARY port  DTMF                 tone select  zone paging amplifier can be  tones or dial pulses can be dialed through the employed if desired  If used  the zone select code  AUXILIARY port as needed  The paging enable relay must be dialed after the AUXILIARY port line select    key is pressed     PROGRAM LINE PORT   AS AUXILIARY PORT   AND CONNECT PA SYSTEM   TO TIP AND RING PAIR PA SYSTEM  OF THAT PORT                   TYPICAL  COMMON EQUIPMENT              SAN       IL         19          66        CONNECTOR          Figure 3 1 1  Typical External Paging Connection    Line Port    3 19    jon    DATA DEVICE CONNECTIONS     The system provides two RS232 Data Ports for use     e When a video display terminal  VDT     used to    perform class of service programming  connect it to  RS232 Data Port A         When a serial data printer is used for SMDR             and        printout  connect it to the RS232  Data Port B     The distance between the data device and the  common equipment can be up to 500 feet in a quiet  electrical 
291. tion 5     e With the accessory headset connected to the data  switch  set the compatibility control to position 9     The data switch has a phase switch located on the  right side of the cabinet     e Set this switch to the NORMAL position  toward the  rear of the cabinet      It is very important to set the telephone volume  control to the minimum level     COMMUNICATION PROCEDURES   STATION TO TRUNK   To make a data transmission to a distant site over a   CO PBX line    1  Set data switch    VOICE    2  Prepare modem and data device for data  communications  Refer to information supplied  with software and equipment    3  Press telephone line button and hear dial tone    4  Set data switch to DATA    5  Issue dialing command to modem from data device  keyboard    STATION TO STATION   To make a data transmission to another station   equipped and connected as shown in Figure 1    1  Set data switch to VOICE     2  Prepare modem and data device for data  communications  Refer to information supplied  with software and equipment     3  Press ITCM on telephone and hear dial tone    4  Dial other station and set up voice call    5  Type ATX1 D on data device keyboard but do not    press ENTER  Ask intercom party to type        on    their data device keyboard but do not press  ENTER     6  Complete voice conversation  ask intercom party to  set their data switch to DATA and to press ENTER  on their keyboard    7  Set data switch to DATA  and press ENTER on  data device keyboard 
292. tions  or a combination of both  maximum  of five parties  originator plus four additional parties      1  Make first call    2  Press TRANS CONF  Call is placed on hold  automatically    3  Make next call    4  Press TRANS CONF  Conference is established    5  Repeat steps 2     4 to add up to two more parties     NOTE  When setting up a conference call with outside  lines and inside stations  you must call the  outside lines first    To continue conference with last conferee after   outside lines  up to three  have dropped out of   conference       Press line button of remaining party     To drop outside lines from conference       Press HOLD to place all lines on hold before caller  hangs up  Not doing this will result in a tone  sounding in the handset receiver  interrupting the  remaining conferees     To retrieve remaining lines and bring back Into  conference         Repeat five party conference procedure for      remaining lines     UNSUPERVISED CONFERENCE   CALL  Maximum of Two Outside Lines   Dropping out of a conference call and leaving up to  two outside lines in conference together is known as  an unsupervised conference call        do this  dial   and hang          NOTE  Conference volume levels are dependent upon  the quality of the external lines     MESSAGING    MESSAGE WAITING CONTROL   The message waiting light at any telephone can be  turned on from another telephone to alert the user that  a message awaits pickup  The ability to control  message wafting l
293. titioned into time slots  A time slot is a portion Of  time assigned to a particular position of the system  clock  Each time a particular clock position is    reached  the information associated with that position    can be read  As the system clock goes through the  clock cycle  all necessary digital information is passed  between the pieces of equipment sharing the highway     The common equipment consists of a base unit  which  provides complete feature support  and optional  expansion modules which provide extended station  and line coverage     The wmmon equipment is contained in a functional   modem style metal housing of contemporary design in  keeping with the needs of the modem off ice  environment  It is engineered to be wall or rack  mounted  The outline dimensions of the common  equipment base units are illustrated in Figure l l     STATION DESCRIPTION    The digital telephone stations employed with the  digital system are electronic  microprocessor   controlled  devices  They allow not only multiline  pickup but also single key access to features available  from the serving CO  PBX  or CENTREX switch as  wel as the wmmon equipment  The digital telephone  is available in two different images  The features of  the images are as listed below and as detailed in  Figure 1 2 and      Figure 1 3     The wide image digital telephone provides the  following features     e Full modular connection    3 fixed buttons with indicators    SPKR  e HOLD  ITCM  3 fixed buttons wi
294. trieve a parked call    e From any extension  press               Dial          Dial a park orbit access code  91   99      TRANSFERRING CALLS    SCREENEDTRANSFER    To transfer a call to another statlon In the system     e Answer outside call  Do not press HOLD      e Press TRANS CONF   Outside call is placed       hold automatically        Dial extension number of party to be transferred to   or press DSS button for one button intercom  calling      e When intercom patty answers  announce call and  line number     e Hang up handset            66 083    If the called party Is busy or does not answer       Press TRANS CONF button or flashing line button  to retrieve call     UNSCREENED TRANSFER    To transfer a call to another station In the system     Answer outside call   Do not press HOLD      System Operation      Press TRANS CONF   Outside call is placed on  hold automatically     Dial extension number of party to be transferred  or  press DSS button for one button intercom calling      Hang up handset  If transferred call is not received  after pre programmed length of time  it will ring back  at transferring station     To answer recall of transferred call     Press TAP button     CONFERENCING    Conferencing can include the originating station and  up to four outside lines  or four additional stations  or a  combination of stations and lines to a maximum total  of five parties     FIVE PARTYCONFERENCE   To set up a conference that includes outside lines   intercom sta
295. tside lines that are placed on hold if   Press Al to toggle between enable and disable DEFAULT a ENABLED  an external music source is connected  LED On   Enabled    to the system  Music on hold can be  OR   disabled by attendant action  Dial 1 to enable   MOH ENABLED     Al LED on    Dial 2 to disable  MOH DISABLED        Dial    for configuration mode     LCD Messaging  A message can be   Dial 05     LCD MESSAGES    set at any system station and displayed   Dial 1   0 for message number                  by any LCD speakerphone that calls it   Dial   to clear current message    on the intercom line  Two standard   Refer to Table 44  page 4 21     messages are provided for use but the and compose message  16 digits max     attendant can create up to 10 custom   Dial all  two digit codes necessary to enter    messages if needed  the message   YYYYYYY       OR   Dial 10 for pre programmed message       BACK AT   OR   Dial 20 for pre programmed message     CALL    Dial    for next message location and  repeat steps 2     5       Dial       for configuration mode   DEFAULT  1   BACK       2   CAL      Press SPKR to end              80 99 INI                                   45    IA     press ITCM    746    for base level     ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY           FEATURE DESCRIPTION    Station Names  Stations can be  assigned individual names or category  names that will be displayed by an LCD  speakerphone when it is called by the  station  Typical names could be TEC  SER  
296. u31N1  LOA                1U0d Vivo  cEcSu 01        01010  02      2     1 1                 NVLIS       5             ation IMI 66 083    MUSIC INTERFACE impedance of this input is approximately 500 ohms   If music is to be part of the system  connect a Use the volume control on the music source to adjust  customer provided music source to the common the audio level of the music as required   equipment music interface jack  phono jack  provided  for this purpose as shown below in Figure 3 13  The         MUSIC INTERFACE        TYPICAL  COMMON EQUIPMENT   B LINE  16 STATION  BASE UNIT SHOWN          GROUND    Figure3 13 Music Interface    3 22           66 083 Installa     SECTION 3  ADD ON EXPANSION MODULES  INTRODUCTION provides station ports 10 through 25 and lines 1  One or two optional add on expansion modules can through    When installed  a 408      oe  be installed on the common equipment base unit to will provide station ports 26 through 33 and lines 9  increase the line and station capacity of an installed through 12 thus creating a twelve line by twenty four  system  The add on module is as follows  Station system   Each expansion module provides    tip and ring pair as  e 408 Expansion Module   A four line by eight station an emergency power failure circuit  This circuit is  expansion unit connected to the first module provided line    The expansion capabilities provided by the add on The line connections of the expansion module are  module are shown in Figure 3 
297. ucedby the system for printing          lenerated automatically whenever the  ystemdetectsthattherecordsstorage  eais ninety five percentfull  Program  he system to automatically generate  hese reports for printing at a certain time   achday if desired     Station Message Detall Reporting          Printout  Program the system       the SMDR to provide continuous    Dial 75   SMDA PROGRAMMING   Dial 13 for auto report time    AUTO TIME XXXX      Dial new time in hours and minutes  HH MM  in 24 hour time  or dial    to accept current time   3  Dial 14 for report definition     AUTO REPORT   t  Choose reports for printing     Dial 1 for sta                 STATION REPORT      Dial 2       report   ACCOUNT REPORT      Dial 3 line report   LINE REPORT      Dial 4 dept  report   DEPT  REPORT       Dial 5 print ail   PRINT RECORDS     Dial 6 delete records     DELETE RECORDS        Dial 7 for DCD report     DCD REPORT    5  Dial for next SMDA feature    OR   Dial       for configuration mode     l   2        ro program SMDR cost repofting      Dial 77   SMDR PRINT    2  Dial 1  XXXXXXXCOSTING     xrintout of system wide station callactivity3  Press     to toggle between enable and disable    as it is collected by the system if desired   Additionalprogrammingactionwillcause  the printing of the cost of each reported    allto be included when the printout  JCCUIS      AI LED On   Enabled     OR     Dial 1 to enable     Al LED on     WITH COSTING       Dial 2 to disable     WITHOUT COS
298. uipmeni        87654 2 1 PWR IN OUT  Ports RS 232 RS 232          1008 Caller ID Unit    Printer    Figure 1  System Configuration         Caller ID Unit Common Equipment  RS 232 OUT RS 232 Data Port B  MALE  0        9 PIN   D   sub    MALE    D sub Printer PIN                         WH          Solder Cup Side iux  Figure 2  Caller ID Unit and Printer to Common Equipment Through Data Port B    9    DigiTech System Software Enhancements    FEATURE  Caller ID  cont     BENEFITS    STATION 10 PROGRAMMING    1     2     Press            746    to enter COS programming    To assign Caller ID lines   Press47    Dial line number s     To assign Caller ID stations   Press 5 3 for Station Features  Press 3 6 for Caller ID stations  Dial station number s     To set the Audible First Ring feature     Press 17  Press 0 1 for Audible First Ring Option  Press 1 to silence the first ring on Caller ID lines  Press 2 to enable Audible First Ring    To set the Caller ID Distribution feature     Press 1 7  Press 0 2 for the Caller ID Distribution Option  Press 1 to disable Caller ID Distribution  Press 2 to enable Caller ID Distribution to Port B    Press       for configuration mode    VDT PROGRAMMING  1  Enter COS programming    2     3     Enter 2 for Line COS    Enter 1 3 for Caller ID assignments  To assign Caller ID service to lines     Enter 1  Dial line number s     To remove Caller ID service from lines      Enter2  Dial line number s     To assign Caller ID service to stations   En
299. uirement      e Dial account code number  If error tone sounds or  error message shows on LCD  check account code  for validly and re enter correct code     e Dial number to be called     INCOMING CALL  WITHOUT ACCOUNT CODE BUTTON    e Answer call    e Press ITCM   0 4  Incoming call is automatically  placed      hold    e Dial account code  If error tone sounds or error  message shows on LCD  check account code for  validity and re enter correct code         Press line button to return to call   WITH ACCOUNT CODE BUTTON    e Answer call    e Press ACCOUNT CODE button and dial account  code number anytime during call  If error tone  sounds or error message shows on LCD  check  account code for validity and re enter correct code     NOTE  The ACCOUNT CODE button will on y work  when account codes have been programmed  by SMDA class of service programming            66 083    System Operation      SPEAKERPHONE OPERATION    The optional speakerphone can use the previously  described features in a handsfree manner  Handsfree  calling and answering is as described below     To place a call       Press line button or ITCM     Dial number or press programmable button     When party answers  speak toward the telephone     To answer a call       Press a line button     e Speak toward the telephone    To end a call    e Press SPKR    To switch from speakerphone to handset       Lift handset    To switch from handset to speakerphone       Press SPKR     Hang up handset     DEPARTMENTAL 
300. umber   To call system operator   dial 0          Speak to called party     To voice call    055 number     Lii handset       Press programmable button that is programmed for  desired station         Speak to called party    NOTE  The outside line is automatically placed on  hold when a DSS button is pressed or when  the ITCM button is pressed prior to manually  dialing an intercom extension number     TONE CALLING    To tone call an Intercom station      Lii handset      Press             Dial extension number      Press         again  Called telephone will ring    NOTE  Some systems may be programmed    tone  signal as the first option  Pressing ITCM a  second time is not necessary in this case           66 083    To tone          055 number      Liit handset      Press programmable button that is programmed for   desired station      Press         Called telephone will ring    NOTE  The lights  LEDs  adjacent to programmable  buttons indicate status of DSS telephones   DARK indicates idle telephone  STEADY ON  indicates telephone in use  FLASHING  indicates station is ringing  providing station  monitoring is enabled      SECURE OFF HOOK  VOICE ANNOUNCE  SOHVA     To make a secure voice announcement to another  station that is off hook or busy on a call    If the calling station has    SOHVA originate button  programmed     e Lift handset   e Make intercom call and hear busy signal     e Press SOHVA button and hear SOHVA warning  tones  six quick tone bursts  If busy signa
301. uration    Dial 1 to print all configuration data     PRINT ALL     Dial 2 to print system data     PRINT SYSTEM     Dial 3 to print line data     PRINT LINES     Dial 4 to print data for all stations     PRINT STATIONS     Dial 5 to print data for selected station     PRINT STA     Select station to be printed     PRINT STA  XXX      Dial 10 57 for stations 10   57    Dial 6 to print toll restriction assignment     PRINT TOLL     Dial 7 to abort printing    ABORT PRINT      Dial    for configuration mode        Press SPKR to end    DuiuJUJEJDOJd WAISAS      80 99 IWI    S9 r    INTEGRATED CALL COSTING    Call costing provides a means of establishing costing to be applied to outside calls made from system telephones  Call costing computes charges for  a call after it is completed  It does not restrict dialing as toll restriction does  The system provides several ways of establishing call costing  They are  as follows     e Exception tables e Area code band tables  e Zone call band tables e Call rate tables  e Office code band tables e Call rate table of last resort    With this range of costing methods  it is possible to apply reasonable rates for the entire country  Call costing is applied to a dialed number as  described below  The call costing process is illustrated by the diagram shown in Figure 4 2     1  EXCEPTION TABLES  LOCAL CALLS AND LONG DISTANCE CALLS     All calls are first compared to entries in 4 exception tables  one entry per table   These tables provide the 
302. utton  7              Zone           1 3                                               Auto Callback                           Cal Forward    IMI 66 083                       Park  19                   Line Group  4          Voice Announce Block  TO  cce Line Group Queue  Esa Exit Button Mapping    System displays list of current key mapping at station   equipment  Some keys listed may not be present on  the station being programmed     Enter new function for key and press  ENTER to accept current function     ENTER  or press    e Selection 8  Toll restriction administration  assigns  toll tables to station   Toll Restriction Table Assignment  assign  pre programmed toll restriction tables to be  applied to all regular calls   Night Mode Toll Restriction Table Assignment   assign pre programmed table to be applied to  calls on night transferred line   System Speed Dial Toll Restriction  assign  pre programmed toll restriction tables applied to  System speed dial numbers     Selection 9  Automatic busy RNA forwarding   Links programmed station to another one to form  hunt group  Also  selects number of rings to occur  at programmed station before ring no answer   RNA  call is forwarded to linked station     e Selection 10  Miscellaneous feature programming   PEE a variety of features for the station   Automatic Privacy Release  Enable or disable  automatic privacy release or a per line basis    Line Auto Hold  active line automatically held  when new line is selected   Interco
303. x                                 e E ELE eA XR     Call Forwarding       Calls                   en ec etn et                  af Epp         Call  Forwarding  Personal                         Uem                    aee ates                     Vus de bln e bin eoa adeb dos e or died ip du bigis s  Call Pick  p s  Directed    recede deeds etr      ter av ter el re Oe a es    gute oes ds  Call  Pickup Group   Lise eer equ ________ roe ecd  Call Transfer    Screened      Rm Yo e grt e ete cn n                     wey AU  Gall Transfer w Unscreened         gt                        eee fei ke XAR  Call Waiting Tone         Calling Station Identification On                                                   Class Of Service Programming  From Main Station     s t        n n    n  Class Of Service Programming                   sss        X A A  Class Of Service Program Printout                                              Common Audible Ringer Interface    aA bade                          we eae            Conferencing      0        ee    Table Of Contents 27 Ml66      Conferencing    Multiline                 e ace Dn CR CR 4             ACRI AIR RE UR CROCO    a Pd 2 6  Conferencing   Unsupervised                                                2 6  Data           dad ed                    n                                       2  6  Default Functional Program         sss RR IR RR RR RR I I        2 6  Default Toll Restriction             RR IR RR I hh hh 2 6  Delayed Ringing    
304. xt button mapping feature    OR   Dial         for configuration mode                                                                1  Dial 56   BUTTON MAPPING    2  Dial 10   ASSIGN CALL BACK   3  Select button to be programmed     Press A1   A14  B1   B8   4  Select station ports to be programmed  with CALL BACK button     Station 10   57  Dial 10   57   5  Dial   for next auto call back button assignment    OR   Dial      for next button mapping feature    OR   Dial        for configuration mode     Automatic Call Back Button  A button  can be programmed to be an automatic         this button after a busy tone is  encountered  the system will  automatically ring the called and calling  stations when the called station becomes  idle           Press SPKR to end       580 99 INI                           ue1s  S    9r v    Press            7 4 6    for base level     FEATURE DESCRIPTION ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY REFERENCE RECORD    Call Forward Button  A button canbe   1  Dial 56   BUTTON MAPPING    programmed to provide one button 2  Dial 11   ASSIGN CALL FWD    forwarding of all calls to another 3  Select button to be programmed   extension    Press A1   A14  B1   B8   4  Select station ports to be programmed  with a CALL FWD button     Station 10   57  Dial 10   57     Dial  k for next call forward button assignment    OR   Dial       for next button mapping feature           Dial          for configuration mode     Cail Park Orbit Button  Pressing a   Dial 56   BU
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
HomePlug Turbo Ethernet Bridge  User Manual - Projector Central  Oracle Database Real Application Testing User's Guide  Savile V8D - Babyauto Seguridad Infantil    MPL-403c  NAD M4  Polar FT7 user manual  取扱説明書 - 日立の家電品      Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file